Home

MODEL 700E DYNAMIC DILUTION CALIBRATOR

1. GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE e s EN EX See PRIMARY SETUP Menu See PRIMARY SETUP Menu f n SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION Submenu ht Basic J V Bee SECONDARY SETUP Menu 7 E Ne P CYL o3 USER PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT PRTI PRT2 PRT4 MODE oie PHOT NONE ADD EDIT CNST REF BNCH Causes the drive voltage of BCAL DARK S02 the optional Os generator to H2S 2500 mV This is used to N20 fle Press of these to select manually adjust the position T A gas inlet PORT this gas inlet PORT mode for Os generator of the generators UV Lamp NHB co NONE uj co2 502 a IDs ENTR EXIT Allows calibration of the Initiates automatic USR N20 photometer bench Dark Calibration USR2 Accepts selected procedure 3 NO2 Jenerator Leaves d See Chapter 8 for more tone NHS modo generator mode information co unchanged and coz any gas type HC EXCEPT NONE is selected USR1 4 ENAB NAME MASS PORT1 0 0 PPB GAS NAME SETUP X X 0 0 0 0 PPB 25 EXIT SETUP GAS NAME NONE SETUP X X MOLAR MASS 28 890 GRAMS Toggle these keys to set the target concentration of the calibrator output for this gas Toggles through available gas types N N E ENTR EXIT 0 0 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle thes
2. Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH 1 0 LPM Pressure Regulator GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR DILUENT tS lt P S a 8 INLET on 2 ol PHOTOMETER _________ amp 8 PRESSURE SENSOR Valve GEN PHOTOMETER o 5 PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA a ES in 5 Flow Control E 800 cm Purge eO Valve N an ues gs 59 DILUENT i Diluent 25 1 M cui Pressure Mass Flow Controller 3 e SENSOR tr 0 6 en ESTE B NA PHOTOMETER CAL GAS 2 Boa Valve ZERO OUT INLET Eia E a CAL GAS I E D INTERNAL CAL GAS 3 he SENSOR X INLET ure S Ger EXHAUST orn Valve ND gt om CAL GAS 4 a PHOTOMETER inet o gt T mi OUTLET yel red GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel on back panel yel I CAL GAS Cal Gas OUTPUT 1 Mass Flow Controller 1 x CAL GAS GPT m OUTPUT 2 Volume 1 SE VENT s OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 6 9 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when in PURGE mode 05622 REV B 89 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual To activate the PURGE feature press STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0
3. Os GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA YOSNAS PHOTOMETER MO14 0 jquiessy 10je1euec o 001 Jo33uo Flow Control 800 cm On Back Panel o PHOTOMETER INLET wht PHOTOMETER ol 4 CAL GAS 1 ZEROIN TQ INLET s 8 Mass Flow Controller su PHOTOMETER EWS ZERO OUT PT CAL GAS 2 age DARE 23 INTERNAL Wee CAL GAS VENT PRESSURE CAL GAS 3 SENSOR INLET EXHAUST CAL GAS 4 PHOTOMETER INLET OUTLET red GAS INPUT MANIFOLD back panel CAL GAS Cal Gas OUTPUT 1 Mass Flow Controller 1 _ Yeo NS CAL GAS N GPT Y bi OUTPUT 2 Volume VENT P blu GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 9 18 O Photometer Gas Flow Measure Cycle M700E Chassis Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH DILUENT INLET DILUENT Valve Purge CAL GAS 1 INLET CAL GAS 2 INLET CAL GAS 3 INLET CAL GAS 4 INLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD on back panel INPLIT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR SENSOR Pressure Regulator Diluent Mass Flow Controller DILUENT PRESSURE qm CAL GAS PRESSURE sensor yel
4. 177 8 4 Calibrating the 0s Generator e re Ride EUR EEG UO e Ede entes 178 8 4 1 Setup for Verification and Calibration the O4 178 8 4 1 1 Setup Using Direct Connections ssssssseseeee emm eem enne nennen nnns 178 8 4 2 Verifying Os Generator Performarice eee acted eelaacheveneeceeeesdachenesensddesladddevensscdeneenensdaeed a 179 8 4 3 Generator Calibration 180 8 4 3 1 Viewing Generator Calibration Points 180 8 4 3 2 Adding or Editing Generator Calibration Points ssssee eme 181 8 4 3 3 Deleting Generator Calibration Points 182 8 4 3 4 Turning Generator Calibration Points ON OFF ssssssssssseee eee 183 8 4 3 5 Performing an Automatic Calibration of the Optional 184 8 5 7 Gas Pressure Sensor Calibration ssssssesssseseeene eene nnne 185 8 5 1 1 Calibrating the Diluent Cal Gas Optional Generator Pressure Sensors 187 8 5 1 2 Calibrating the Optional Photometer Sample Gas Pressure Sensors 188 TEGHNICAL INFORMATION 535555 65 pers
5. 243 11 2 Using the Analog Output Test nennen 244 11 3 Using the Internal Electronic Status LEDS sse 245 11 3 1 CPU Status Indicator e Lee oed aire Aan fepe ed aires 245 11 3 2 Relay PCA Status LEDS nennen nennen edendis nennen enn 245 11 3 2 1 Bus Watchdog Status LEDs eroe ente tet imet e e ede dete ars 245 11 3 2 2 O3 Option Status 05 ete cen e etcetera ers 246 11 3 3 Valve Driver PCA STATUS LEDS rre teta tete RR Rr idea 247 11 4 Subsystem GheckOUt Rn ED HE Rb tea on ett 248 11 4 1 Verity Subsystem GCallDratlQni cit tet rt a oe peti eto ots Diele e D EROR a 248 TAZ AC Main PBOWGT 2 2 tre eR E ot Pt tuae ua iuret teta tests Mr t PD E 248 11 4 3 DC Power Supply Se ede e beer ao cett ede bee een 249 MOM TM 250 11 4 5 Keyboard Display Interface nennen enne 250 11 46 Relay PCA Cr ES 251 11 4 7 Valve Driver lie Gee a ele e adele ae aaa ead 251 11 4 8 Input Gas Pressure Flow Sensor 252 11 4 9 PHOTOMETER O Generator Pressure FLOW SENSOR 253 11 410 Motherboard
6. enne nnns 213 Figure 9 14 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations sssssssesseeneene mener 214 Figure 9 15 Generator Electronic Block Diagram 215 Figure 9 16 Generator Electronic Components 216 Figure 9 17 Generator Temperature Thermistor DC Heater 217 Figure 9 18 Photometer Gas Flow Measure Cycle eene nnne 220 Figure 9 19 Photometer Gas Flow Reference Cycle 220 Figure 9 20 Photometer Absorption Pathi aoe eataa e araa 221 Figure 9 21 Photometer Layout Top Cover Removed 222 Figure 9 22 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram 223 Figure 10 1 Bypassing the Photometer Sensor PCA and Pump sssssseeeee eene 227 Figure 10 2 Gas Port Setup for Auto Leak Check 228 Figure 10 3 Gas Flow for Auto Leak Check Procedure of Base Model 7 6 229 Figure 10 4 Gas Flow for Auto Leak Check Procedure of M700E s with Optional Photometer 229 Figure 10 5 Photomete
7. KEYBOARD Beeper Figure 9 11 Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram The keyboard display interface electronics of the M700E Calibrator watches the status of the eight front panel keys alerts the CPU when keys are depressed translates data from parallel to serial and back and manages communications between the keyboard the CPU and the front panel display Except for the Keyboard interrupt 210 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation status bit all communication between the CPU and the keyboard display is handled by way of the instrument s l C bus The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus are allowed to talk or required to listen Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information is intended KEYPAD DECODER Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line When a key is depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal latches and holds the state of all eight lines in effect creating an 8 bit data word alerts the key depress detect circuit a flip flop IC translates the 8 bit word into serial data and sends this to the interface chip KEY DEPRESS DETECT CIRCUIT This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the interface chip causing it to se
8. 143 Figure 7 3 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multi drop PCA Option 62 155 Figure 7 4 RS 232 Multi drop PCA Host Calibrator Interconnect 156 Figure 7 5 CPU Card Locations of RS 232 485 Switches Connectors and 157 Figure 7 6 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 Mode 158 Figure 7 7 CPU Connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 Mode sse 158 Figure 7 8 APICOM Remote Control Program 165 Figure 8 1 Location of MFC Outlet POMS nrne ener ener nnne 168 Figure 8 2 Set up for Verifying Optional Photometer ssssssseseeneneene nemen 170 Figure 8 3 External Photometer Validation Setup Direct Connections sssee 172 Figure 8 4 External Photometer Validation Setup with Calibration 173 Figure 8 5 Generator Calibration Setup Direct Connections ssssssssssssseeeme 178 Figure 8 6 Pressure Monitor Points M700E Basic Unit sse emen 186 Figure 8 7 Pressure Monitor Points M700E with Options and Multi
9. 1 0 LPM PI GEN GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR V PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA RESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER PHOTOMETER MNoLvUy3N39 o Alguiassg Ingiauac Ec eus ur ODL aun Mo 4 Cal Gas Mass Flow Controller 1 Figure 9 19 Flow Control REF MEAS 800 cm bik INTERNAL VENT O Photometer Gas Flow Reference Cycle io PHOTOMETER INLET wht PHOTOMETER ZERO IN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT blk EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD 220 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 7 1 3 The Absorption Path In the most basic terms the M700E photometer uses a high energy mercury vapor lamp to generate a beam of UV light This beam passes through a window of material specifically chosen to be both non reactive to O3 and transparent to UV radiation at 254nm and into an absorption tube filled with sample gas Because ozone is a very efficient absorber of UV radiation the absorption path length required to create a measurable decrease in UV intensity is short enough approximately 42 cm that the light
10. MAIN MENU SEQ MSG CLR SETUP I L PREV NEXT Press to Press to cycle clear an through the active active warning warning messages Cycles messages through existing See PRIMARY SETUP Menu calibration NC S sequences 1 Only appears when warning messages are active Only appears when an one or more calibration sequences are programmed into the calibrator s memory 3 Only appears if optional generator is installed Only appears if optional photometer bench is installed Figure A 1 Main Menu 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 3 APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual MAIN MENU gt GEN S AUTO MAN PURG GPTZ GPT GPTPS When any gas type EXCEPT ZERO Js selected Puts the Initiates the Initiates the GENERATE GENERATE 000 0 PPB ZERO ZERO ENTR EXIT calibrator into See Manual Calibrators Calibrator s Purge mode eneum GPT feature GPTPS feature 0 0 PPB H2S ENTR EXIT Toggles through available gas types See the GAS sub menu of the PRIMARY SETUP menu STANDBY GP7 GP7PS PPB NO 000 0 PPB Toggles x ZERO 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT through S o3 available S H2S gas types uj NO ENTR This key sets co Toggle these keys to set the the NO Units of target concentration of NO gas Measure Toggle these keys to set the target con
11. 267 12 1 How Static Charges are 267 12 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause Damage sss ener 268 12 3 Common Myths About ESD Damage sssssssssessseseee eene nennen rennen nnn enne 269 12 4 Basic Principles of Static Control sese enne nnne nenne nnne nns 269 12 41 General RUGS ot Re D a ei REM 269 12 4 2 Basic anti ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance 271 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument Rack sse eene ener ener ener enne 271 12 4 2 2 Working at an Anti ESD Work Bench ssssssssseeee eene nemen nnne 271 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and 272 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from Teledyne API s Customer 272 12 4 2 5 Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API s Customer 273 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3 1 M700E Front Panel Layout a nennen nensi nennen nennen rennen rne nnns 12 Figure 3 2 M700E Rear Panel Layout sse nennen nennen nnne nennen tenes 12 Figure 3 3 M700E Internal Layout Top View Base Unit e
12. Figure 5 5 M700E with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets Installing the strap handle prevents the use of the rack mount slides although the rack mount brackets Option 21 can still be used CAUTION A FULLY LOADED M700E WITH BOTH THE GENERATOR AND PHOTOMETER OPTIONS INSTALLED WEIGHS ABOUT 17 KG 40 POUNDS TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY THE CALIBRATOR ENSURE TO DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE CALIBRATOR BEFORE CARRYING IT 5 5 SPARE PARTS KITS 5 5 1 M700E EXPENDABLES KIT OPT 46A This kit includes a recommended set of expendables and spare parts for 1 unit for one year of operation of the M700E See Appendix B for a detailed listing of the contents 5 5 2 M700E SPARE PARTS KIT OPT 46B amp OPT 46C This kit includes a recommended set of spare parts for one year of operation of M700E s that have the optional generator and photometers installed See Appendix for a detailed listing of the contents OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION OPT 46B Photometer Spares Kit for 1 unit OPT 46C Photometer with IZS Spares Kit for 1 unit 56 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 6 COMMUNICATION OPTIONS 5 6 1 RS232 MODEM CABLES OPT 60A amp OPT 60B Option 60A consists of a shielded straight through seria
13. 140 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 REMOTE OPERATION OF THE M700E 7 1 USING THE ANALYZER S COMMUNICATION PORTS The M700E is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel accessible via two DB 9 connectors on the back panel of the instrument See Figure 3 2 The COM1 connector is a male DB 9 connector and the COM2 is a female DB9 connector Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with issue commands to and receive data from the calibrator through an external computer system or terminal e The RS 232 port COM1 can also be configured to operate in single or RS 232 multi drop mode option 62 See Section 5 6 3 and 7 2 1 e The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS 232 operation half duplex RS 485 communication or for access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne API s Ethernet interface card See Section 5 6 4 and 7 4 T 1 1 RS 232 DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION RS 232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment DTE and data communication equipment DCE Basic data terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices Electronically the difference between the DCE and DTE is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions e DTE devices receive data on p
14. 8 4 1 1 Setup Using Direct Connections Figure 8 5 shows the reference photometer connected directly to the fixtures on the back of the M700E Calibrator REFERENCE PHOTOMETER PHOTOMETER INLET Capped PHOTOMETER OUTLET Max Length 3 meters or 10 feet PHOTOMETER ZERO INI Capped PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT Calibration Source Gas If the gas flow on this line is connections 25SLPM the are as shown minimum O D M700E must be 3 8 inch in Section 3 2 DI LUENT IN e Calibrator CAL OUT gas outlet connections to manifolds instruments Figure 8 5 Generator Calibration Setup Direct Connections 178 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Calibration and Verification 8 4 2 VERIFYING GENERATOR PERFORMANCE Using the set up shown in Figure 8 4 perform the following steps Make sure that the STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM 7 is in lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP STANDBY mode STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO MAN PURG STANDBY GENERATE ZERO ZERO ENTR SETUP Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types as programmed during initial setup Continue pressing this key until the desired gas type appears STANDBY GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT Cee Toggle these keys Toggle this key to to set the target set
15. CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 M700E Chassis DILUENT INLET CAL GAS 1 INLET CAL GAS 2 INLET CAL GAS 3 INLET CAL GAS 4 INLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD on back panel Press DILUENT PRESSURE SENSOR INPLIT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA Pressure A Monitor Pressure Regulator Monitor J G9 a Ny z p E E E ure i 2 eT ae bm 8 3 8 Cal Gas Mass Flow Controller 1 Pressure Monitor N Cal Gas Mass Flow Controller 2 Flow Control 1 0 LPM yis V AY Valve T red 5 L_ erT Y Volume pH blu GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA blk PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR 800 cm Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH T REF MEAS Valve INTERNAL VENT OnBack Panel PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER ZEROIN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 8 7 Pressure Monitor Points M700E with O Options and Multiple Cal MFC s Installed 186
16. character left or right Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 or 1 gt SETUP X X 2 SET CC OUTPUT 000100010110 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT 108 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 2 9 The MANUAL Gas Generation Step The MANUAL step causes the M700E calibrator to enter MANUAL CALIBRATION MODE It is programmed in a similar manner to the calibrators GENERATE gt MANUAL function AT the end of the programming sequence the M700E firmware will automatically insert DURATION step that needs to be defined To insert MANUAL step into a sequence press Starting al the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP INSERT STEP GENERATE PREY NEXT ENTR EXIT Use the PREY and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructians SETUP INSERT STEP MANUAL ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set he target GA SrLow Toggle these keys to set the target concentratian This Key Turns the the C Generator OFF ON SETUP CAL GAS TYPEZERO ZERO ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types programmed during initial setup Cantinue pressing this key until he desired gas type appears SETUP X X GAL GAS TYPE SO2 502 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X CAL GAS FLOW 0 000 LPM 3 p o ENTR EXIT EXIT discards th
17. 001 Jo13u02 PHOTOMETER ZERO IN ll ZERO OUT CAL GAS 1 DILUENT Diluent PRESSURE INLET Mass Flow Controller SENSOR CAL GAS 2 INLET INTERNAL blk VENT INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL GAS PRESSURE SENSOR CAL GAS 3 INLET EXHAUST CAL GAS 4 INLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD on back panel CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 Cal Gas Mass Flow Controller 4 CAL GAS GPT ig OUTPUT 2 Volume Y per blu VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 5 2 Internal Pneumatics for M700E Calibrator with Optional Generator and Photometer Table 5 2 Operating Mode Valve States for M700E Calibrator with Optional Generator and Photometer VALVES MFC s X Closed O Open PHOT PUMP Generate Reference Source Gas Phase Loo NENNEN Switching OFF OFF Reference Phase GAS TYPE Lm ppc xm LO GFF OFF Reference Phase Reference 1 Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open 3 In instrument with multiple MFC s the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested When generating
18. NOTE Ensure that the gas outlet of the bottle is CLOSED before disconnecting the gas line from the CYL 1 port 6 Connect a gas line from the zero air gas source to the DILUENT IN and to the CYL 1 port using a T type pneumatic fitting see Figure 10 2 228 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M700E Chassis DILUENT INLET DILUENT CAL GAS 1 INLET a W ao as Eau CAL GAS 2 2E INLET CAL GAS ie PRESSURE CAL GAS 3 SENSOR INLET om CAL GAS 4 INLET Diluent Mass Flow Controller GAS INPUT MAMIFOLO back panel Cal Gas Mass Flow Controller vel On Back Panel PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER ZERO IN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS 9 OUTPUT 2 EE VENT b GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 10 3 Gas Flow for Auto Leak Check Procedure of Base Model M700E s PHOTOMETER BENCH DILUENT INLET M700E Chassis Flow Control 1 0 LPM 2 4 Prosqurg Regulator d e Q amd NJ YOLVYANAD 2 O 9 8 z g 8 A B E g DILUENT CAL GAS 1 TALET PRESSURE SENSOR
19. Table 2 2 M700E Dilution Electrical and Physical Specifications Temperature Range 5 40 C Humidity Range 0 95 RH non condensing Materials Cal Gas Output Wetted Surfaces PTFE Cal Gas Output Manifold Glass coated Steel Dimensions HxWxD 7 178 mm x 17 432 mm x 24 609 mm Operating Altitude 10 000 ft Maximum Weight 31 Ibs 14 06 kg 9 39 2 Ibs 17 78 kg including optional photometer GPT and 03 generator 85VAC to 264VAC 47 Hz to 63Hz Analog Outputs 1 user configurable output 0 1V 1V 5Vor10V Analog Output Ranges Range with 5 under over range Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full scale voltage 12 bit Digital Control Outputs 8 opto isolated outputs Digital Control Inputs 12 opto isolated inputs Status Outputs 8 opto isolated outputs 2 ports 1x RS 232 1x RS 485 or RS 232 configurable Communication speed 300 115200 baud user selectable EN61326 1997 w A1 98 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class n A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 Certifications Class A IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 At 115V Start up 110 W Steady State 140 W At 230V Start up 159 W Steady State 148 W Serial Actual Power Draw 05622 REV B 7 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Specifications Approvals and Warranty M700E Calibra
20. 6 4 4 5 Initiating a GPT Calibration Gas Generation NOTE It is highly recommended to perform a GPT Pre Set before initiating any GPT gas generation To initiate GPT gas generation you will need to know e The TOTAL GAS FLOW for the mixture output e The Target concentration equal to the target concentration to be generated and e The NO source gas concentration Then press Make sure that the STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM M700E is in lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP STANDBY STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO MAN PURG GPT GPTPS STANDBY GPT 0 0 PPB NO EXIT discards the new gas type amp Toggle these keys to 0 0 ip PPB ENTIS SEAT target concentration set the NO target concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp MUST be at least 10 i Higher than the Target target concentration Concentration JA STANDBY GPT 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new gas type amp Toggle these keys to l target concentration set the NO target O concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp IN the target concentration concentration STANDBY TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new hi Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM ENTR accepts the GPT ACT CAL 2 000 LPM new gas flow rate TEST GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP The M700E will stay in generate mode until the STBY button is pressed 05622 REV B
21. Diluentrow Equation 9 2a WHERE GA Siow source gas flow rate Diluentiow zero air flow rate For instrument with multiple source gas MFC total Flow is Equation 9 2b TOTALFLOW GASnow uec1 GASnow GA Show Diluentiow rate This dilution process is dynamic The M700E s CPU not only keeps track of the temperature and pressure of the various gases but also receives data on actual flow rates of the various MFC s in real time so the flow rate control can be constantly adjusted to maintain a stable output concentration The M700E calibrator s level of control is so precise that bottles of mixed gases can be used as source gas Once the exact concentrations of all of the gases in the bottle are programmed into the M700E it will create an exact output concentration of any of the gases in the bottle 05622 REV B 193 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 1 1 GAS PHASE TITRATION MIXTURES FOR AND NO Because ozone is a very reactive and therefore under normal ambient conditions a short lived gas it cannot be reliably bottled however an optional generator be included in the M700E calibrator that allows the instrument to be use to create calibration mixtures that include O3 This ability to generate internally also allows the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator to be used to create calibration mix
22. 05622 REV B 211 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 5 SOFTWARE OPERATION The M700E calibrator s core module is a high performance 386 based microcomputer running a version of DOS On top of the DOS shell special software developed by Teledyne API interprets user commands from various interfaces performs procedures and tasks and stores data in the CPU s memory devices Figure 9 12 shows a block diagram of this software functionality API FIRMWARE Memory Handling Calibration Data System Status Data Calibrator Operations Calibration Procedures Configuration Procedures PC 104 BUS Autonomic Systems Diagnostic Routines CALI BRATOR HARDWARE Interface Handling Gas mixture Algorithms Measurement Algorithms for photometer Sensor input Data Display Messages Keypad Analog Output Data PC 104 BUS RS232 amp RS485 External Digital 1 0 Figure 9 12 Schematic of Basic Software Operation 212 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 6 GENERATOR OPERATION 9 6 1 PRINCIPLE OF PHOTOLITIC GENERATION Ozone is a naturally occurring substance that is sometimes called activated oxygen It contains three atoms of oxygen O3 instead of the usual two
23. CONTROL Bit 03 CONTROL Bit 04 7 CONTROL Bit 05 CONTROL Bit 02 27 CONTROL Bit 03 7 CONTROL Bit 04 CONTROL Bit 05 1277 CONTROL Bit 06 CONTROL Bit 06 CONTROL Bit 01 CONTROL Bit 01 N e o c 7 9 10 11 12 4 CONTROL Bit 09 CONTROL Bit 12 CONTROL Bit 07 CONTROL Bit 08 CONTROL Bit 09 ONTROL Bit 12 CONTROL Bit 07 CONTROL Bit 10 CONTROL Bit 11 CONTROL Bit 10 CONTROL Bit 11 5 VDC Power Supply Figure 3 9 M700E Digital Control Input Connectors 05622 REV B 19 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 1 2 5 Connecting the Control Outputs The calibrator is equipped with 12 opto isolated digital control outputs These outputs are activated by the M700E s user programmable calibration sequences see Sections 6 5 1 6 and 6 5 2 8 for instructions on assigning the control inputs to specific calibration sequences These outputs may be used to interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as Programmable Logic Controllers PLC s dataloggers or digital relays valve drivers They are accessed via a 14 pin connector on the calibrator s rear panel see Figure 3 2 CONTROL OUTPUTS 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 7 fi 12 E Figure 3 10 M700E Digital Control Output Connector NOTE Most PLC s have internal provisions for limiting the curr
24. DILUENT On Back Panel INLET PHOTOMETER INLET DILUENT Valve PHOTOMETER ZERO IN Purge W Valve PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT DILUENT PRESSURE SENSOR EXHAUST Diluent Mass Flow Controller CAL GAS 1 INLET INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL GAS 2 PHOTOMETER INLET OUTLET CAL GAS PRESSURE CAL GAS CAL GAS 3 PE OUTPUT 1 INLET CAL GAS CAL GAS 4 OUTPUT 2 INLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD y on back panel Cal Gas GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Mass Flow Controller Figure 6 4 Gas Flow through Basic M700E in GENERATE Mode Table 6 4 shows the status of the M700E s various pneumatic components when the calibrator is in GENERATE mode Table 6 4 Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE Mode VALVES X Closed Open MFC s Boy GAS TYPE PHOT CYL CYL CYL CYL 0 Generate X X Reference Source Gas B o EN Oo OFF on Switching The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open 3 In instrument with multiple MFC s the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested 1 Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed 05622 REV B 75 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Chassis Flo
25. Detector Lamp Heater Photometer ee CAL GAS2 1 _ _ Photometer Lamp Power Detector IMLET CAL GAS 1 INLET i Photometer DILUENT Valve CAL GAS 4 INLET CAL GAS 3 INLET Figure 9 3 M700E Electronic Block Diagram At its heart the calibrator is a microcomputer CPU that controls various internal processes interprets data makes calculations and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne API It communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the Mother Board 05622 REV B 199 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual The motherboard collects data performs signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the calibrator s other major components Data is generated by the various sub components of the M700E e g flow data from the concentration from the optional photometer Analog signals are converted into digital data by a unipolar analog to digital converter located on the motherboard A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the calibrator s major components again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard These status reports are used as data for the concentra
26. PREY NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until 03 GEN CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR 03 GEN CALIBRATION CAL PNTS 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Toggle these keys to move between calibration points 180 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification 8 4 3 2 Adding or Editing Generator Calibration Points To add a calibration point to the table or edit an existing point press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR PREV NEXT Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O CAL PNTS PREV NEXT 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT 4 Toggle these keys to the place in the table where the point is to be added or edited New Points are inserted BEFORE the displayed point SET SET gt EDIT INS DEL EDIT CAL POINT DRIVE 0 MV Continue pressing NEXT until O3 GEN CALIBRATION ENTR O3 GEN CALIBRATION EXIT C Toggle these keys to move between calibration points parameters es CAL POINT DRIVE 0 MV 0 3 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards CT j the new setting Toggle these keys to set the ENTR accepts drive voltage m the new setting CAL POINT DRIVE 300 MV Y lt SET SET gt EDI
27. TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 3 4 VALVE DRIVER PCA The valves that operate the M700E calibrator s main source gas and diluent gas inputs are controlled by a PCA that is attached directly to the input valve manifold see Figure 3 3 or Figure 3 4 Like the relay PCA the valve driver PCA communicates with M700E s CPU through the motherboard over the I C bus WATCHDOG INDICATOR DGND 50 12RT 120 Hos E 1 1 2 TP4 u jtm 0546S E im m 1 CAL GAS VALVE 2 m mij EN H r Pt DILUENT a m VALVE CAL GAS m 5 oam m VALVE 1 a VALVE 2 di 22 220 6 BN s EN am 3 nu je c eo e z e e D7 o ege o o e e e je e fe e c e e o e e cae e Teledyne API 2008 e Figure 9 8 Status LED Locations Valve Driver PCA 9 3 4 1 Valve Driver PCA Watchdog Indicator The most important of the status LEDs on the relay PCA is the red 2 Bus watchdog LED It is controlled directly by the calibrator s CPU over the I C bus Like the watchdog LED on the relay PCA should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds if the CPU or I C bus has stopped functioning this Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turns off all heaters and lamps 05622 REV B 205 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s
28. EXHAUST TAL GAS OUTPUT CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLO Se Figure 9 1 Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M700E s with Options Installed The flow orifice assemblies consist of e A critical flow orifice e Two o rings Located just before and after the critical flow orifice the o rings seal the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice e Aspring Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o rings the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing 196 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 2 1 3 Critical Flow Orifices The most important component of the flow control assemblies is the critical flow orifice Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice a pressure differential is created This pressure differential combined with the action of the calibrator s pump draws the gas through the orifice As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice the pump side continues to drop the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2
29. Flashi Chips iet bte ioo etes chad nee 201 9 3 3 Relay PGA ste v alates eph e vie ehe eene 202 9 3 3 1 Valve Gontrol 3 o ec eo det al dodanie e ect osea vel Ae e tween Meet dte a 203 9 3 3 2 Heater Control noceret ated ated vel Sec evade ies oed nba alee udo Gt uev duet des 203 9 3 3 3 Relay PCA Status LEDs amp Watch Dog Circuitry 203 9 3 3 4 Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator 1 204 9 3 4 Valve Driver unire ete ee dede et batten Sheed Lae dat die ead 205 The valves that operate the M700E calibrator s main source gas and diluent gas inputs are controlled by a PCA that is attached directly to the input valve manifold see Figure 3 3 or Figure 3 4 Like the relay PCA the valve driver PCA communicates with M700E s CPU through the motherboard over the PC bus sis 205 9 3 4 1 Valve Driver PCA Watchdog Indicator sssseeeeenm emm mme 205 9 3 5 MotherbOard Eee oth eve deett m ade codem io cores dod tiers 206 9 23 51 Acto Di COnversion iv ae PH PERDRE ee de DE Eb Di aet tan Ei aed ad aa ade e eo 206 9 3 5 2 Sensor E edt raten dato dem dd 206 973 5 3 TTiermistor Iriterface oi entere RE t eie e De nete aede edet aee p 206 9 3 5 4 Analog Qutputs m entren etim e eo dee PORE HR vede P EE e HERE 206 9 3 5 5 External Digital
30. GAS CONFIG MODE ADJ ACT CAL 0 000LPM lt TST TST gt Press TST or TST until GEN REF 2500 0 MV TST TST gt Slowly rotate the lamp up to a turn in either direction to until the O3 GEN REF displays the lowest value 2 7 Po Sen MES 2 Is the value of TU O3GENREF between 2500 0 MV gt IRL and 46000MV Using an insulated pot adjustment tool turn the O3 GENERATOR DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT POT until the value of O3 GEN REF is approximately 2500 0 MV ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE 05622 REV B DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 235 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M700E Operator s Manual 11 Replace the calibrator s cover 12 Perform an auto leak check See Section 10 2 1 13 Perform an Ozone Generator calibration see Section 8 4 USER NOTES 236 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR OF THE M700E CALIBRATOR This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the calibrator NOTE The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only CAUTION e Risk of electrical shock Some operations need to be carried out with the instrument ope
31. GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP 88 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 4 6 GENERATE gt PURGE Activating the M700E s Purge Feature The 7 calibrators PURGE feature clears residual source gases and calibration mixtures gases from the previous generated steps from the instruments internal pneumatics as well as any external pneumatic lines down stream from the calibrator When activated the PURGE feature e Opens the Diluent zero air inlet valve allowing zero air to flow into the calibrator form its external pressurized source e Adjusts the diluent air mass flow controller MFC1 to maximum flow e Adjusts all of the component gas mass flow controllers installed in the calibrator to maximum flows 10 SLPM and 100 SCCPM accordingly to flush out the pneumatic system of the M700E The PURGE air is vented through the VENT port of the rear panel of the instrument see Figure 3 2 Table 6 7 Internal Pneumatics During Purge Mode VALVES MFC s X Closed O Open PHOT PUMP dr 2E p PHOT 1 Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open 3 In instrument with multiple MFC s the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested M700E Chassis
32. NOTE This calibration must be performed when the pressure of the photometer sample gas is equal to ambient atmospheric pressure Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover Disconnect power to the photometer s internal pump Measure the ambient atmospheric pressure of M700E s location in In Hg A SN cm Turn on the calibrator and perform the following steps Make sure that the M7O0E is in standby mode GEM STBY SEQ SETUP LU PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD amp 1 amp ENTR D Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD gt SIGNAL VO PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREY NEXT ENTR DILUENT PRESS 20 56 PSIG 5 6 ENTR EXIT Continue pressing ENTER until SAMPLE PRESS 30 26 IN HG A Toggle these keys 10 change the M700E s 0 3 0 2 6 pressure display to match Ld ambient almospheric pressure value as measured by an external pressure monilor J 5 Turn OFF the M70OE 6 Reconnect the internal pump 7 Close the calibrator s cover 188 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Calibration and Verification USER NOTES 05622 REVB 189 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTE
33. O SAMPLE Tue temperature Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO STEMP from in the photometer 0 C TEMP Table 11 2 absorption tube Possible failure of Bench lamp heater Bench lamp temperature sensor The temperature of the Relay controlling the bench heater photometer UV lamp Entire Relay PCA C Bus Hot Lamp 03 LAMP The temperature of the TEMP generator s UV 0 mV 5000 mV Same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 lamp CHASSIS The temperature ipsige Possible causes of faults the same as BOX TEMP from Table TEMP the M700E s chassis 0 11 2 same as BOX TEMP i Bus malfunction Gas flow problem through the photometer Electronic failure of the photometer subsystems The current Failure or pressure temperature sensors associated with the 03 PHOTO concentration of hotometer CONC being measured by the p photometer Bad incorrect Span Gas concentration Contamination of the Zero Air supply Malfunction of the generator Internal A D converter problem N O N O 244 05622 REV PRINTED DOCUMENTS UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 3 USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the calibrators CPU 2 bus and Relay PCA are funct
34. PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA EDI to DILUENT INLET AQWIASSy yeuan O On Back Panel PHOTOMETER INLET 0011 uong DILUENT PHOTOMETER PRESSURE ZERO IN SENSOR CAL GAS 1 INLET Diluent PHOTOMETER Mass Flow Controller ZERO OUT CAL GAS 2 INLET INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA GALEAS EXHAUST PRESSURE et SENSOR CAL GAS 3 INLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS 4 INLET CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 GAS INPUT MANIFOLD on back panel Cal Gas err CAL GAS Mass Flow Controller OUTPUT 2 GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 5 1 Internal Pneumatics for M700E Calibrator with Optional O Generator and GPT Chamber Table 5 1 Operating Mode Valve States for M700E Calibrator with Optional Generator VALVES X Closed O Open MEC s Generate Source Gas Generate Seep efx 9 pel o arn ore ore ww xa xT o x orr 1 Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open 3 In instrument with multiple MFC s the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested 50 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Ope
35. PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification 8 5 1 1 Calibrating the Diluent Cal Gas Optional Generator Pressure Sensors 1 Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover 2 For the sensor being calibrated insert a T pneumatic connector at the location described in Table 8 2 and shown in Figure 8 6 and Figure 8 7 3 Turn on the calibrator and perform the following steps Make sure that the M7O0E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP 4 PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 1 amp ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the carrect PASSWORD 929 gt SIGNAL PREV NEXT PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR DILUENT PRESS 20 56 PSIG 0 2 0 5 6 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys change the M7OQE s pressure display to match the value measured by pressure monilor installed in line with the pressure sensor being calibrated see Table 8 1 and Figures 8 6 amp 8 7 4 Turn OFF the M700E 5 Remove the pressure monitor 6 Restore the pneumatic lines to their proper connections 7 Close the calibrator s cover 05622 REVB 187 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 5 1 2 Calibrating the Optional Photometer Sample Gas Pressure Sensors
36. TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started M700E Chassis DILUENT d On Back Panel INLET PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER ZEROTN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT DILUENT PRESSURE tea SENSOR EXHAUST Diluent Lo Mass Flow Controller CAL GAS 1 INLET CAL GAS 2 INLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS PRESSURE CAL CAS Sees amp iid OUTPUT 1 INLET n INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL GAS CAL GAS 4 OUTPUT 2 INLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD on back panel Cal Gas GAS GUTPUT MANIFOLO Mass Flow Controller Figure 3 5 M700E Pneumatic Diagram Base Unit M700E Chassis PHOTOMETER BENCH Flow Control 1 LPM ee ary ea Pi 5 0 GAS INPUT 0 0 PRESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER PRESSURE 3EMSOR OLGEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR MOSN3S 0 mar Hed TALET YOLVYANAD Me Flow Cantrol ji e lll jquiessy 1oje1eus c O hin DILUEMT PHOTOMETER 001 101 u09 CAL GAS 1 Dilieont OTOMET INLET Fkow Controllor Laren m PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT CAL G S 2 INLET a MA Ly INTERWAL Cal GAS Mdh bl PRES
37. TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE This includes a brief description of the hardware and software options available for the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator For assistance with ordering these options please contact the Sales department of Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instruments at TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 FAX 858 657 9816 TEL 858 657 9800 E MAIL api sales teledyne com WEB SITE www teledyne api com 5 1 OZONE OPTIONS 5 1 1 INTERNAL OZONE GENERATOR OPT 01 Because ozone quickly breaks down into molecular oxygen O2 this calibration gas cannot be supplied in precisely calibrated bottles like other gases such as 50 CO NO H2S etc The optional generator extends the capabilities of the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator dynamically generate calibration gas mixtures containing Additionally a glass mixture volume designed to meet US EPA guidelines for Gas Phase Titration GPT is included with this option This chamber in combination with the generator allow the M700E to use the GPT technique to more precisely create calibration mixtures 05622 REV B 49 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Chassis GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR Pressure GEN PHOTOMETER Regulator
38. The calibrator will also alert the user via the Serial COMM port s and cause the FAULT LED on the front panel to blink To view or clear the various warning messages press SYSTEM RESET SUppresses INS GEN STBY SEQ MSG warning messages SYSTEM RESET GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message field CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current message If more than one warning is active the next message will take SYSTEM ANALOG CAL WARNING its place TEST CLR SETUP Once the last warning has been cleared the ACT CAL function returns wil be NOTE If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm up periad ACT CAL 0 000 LPM displayed in the calibrator s main MESSAGE FIELD GEN STBY SEG MSG CLR SETUP 238 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator Table 11 1 Front Panel Warning Messages WARNING FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration and Calibration data reset to original Factory state Failed Disk on Chip User has erased configuration data DATA INITIALIZED Data Storage in iDAS was erased Failed Disk on Chip User cleared data FRONT PANEL WARN The CPU is unable to Comm
39. e FE pa Pe PR RS ao aee Rea C ere ete eere 191 9 THEORY OF OPERATION arenes araoe EEE oa SERS LUE 193 9 1 Basic Principles of Dynamic Dilution Calibration 193 9 1 1 Gas Phase Titration Mixtures for and 194 9 2 Pneumatic Operation ee itte eee ee de eo rie eade ee aba 195 9 2 k Gas Flow ue E dre pe P HERR eee alse eed ee ex Eger epe Tu ee ea 195 9 2 1 1 Diluent and Source Gas Flow Control ssssssssssssseseeeeneeemenenen emen 195 9 2 1 2 Flow Control Assemblies for Optional Components 196 vi 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents 9 2 1 3 Critical Elow OTIfIGeS iuro reete E deste e tol a ab desi det diat dc Det esa 197 9 2 2 Internal Gas Pressure Sensors nce nere esee rre telae evil idee epe sa teo uy 197 9 3 Electronic Operation oec e RR OR ck RI Ue OT OO ERE 199 O23 OVERVIEW Seat ME 199 9 3 2 GRU 9 a aad 200 9 3 2 1 DISKON Chip oret teet tte Ae id tees dedere heed e 201 9 3 2 2
40. s housing To do this slightly loosen the UV lamp setscrew Using an insulated pot adjustment tool Turn the UV Next slowly rotate the lamp up to turn in DETECTOR GAIN ADJUSTMENT POT until the value of either direction while watching the PHOTO_DET signal a Once the optimum lamp position is determined re tighten the lamp setscrew PHOTO_DET is as close as possible to 4600 0 MV If a minimum reading of 3500 0 mV can not be reached the lamp must be replaced 232 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 6 Replace the cover on the calibrator UV DETECTOR GAIN ADJUST POT UV LAMP SETSCREW He UV LAMP Figure 10 5 Photometer Assembly Lamp Adjustment Installation 10 2 4 UV SOURCE LAMP REPLACEMENT This procedure details the steps for replacement of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly This procedure should be done whenever the lamp can no longer be adjusted as described in Section 10 2 3 Turn the calibrator off Remove the cover from the calibrator Locate the Optical Bench Assembly see Figure 3 4 1 2 3 4 Locate the UV lamp at the front of the optical bench assembly see Figure 10 5 5 Unplug the lamp cable from the power supply connector on the side of the optical bench 6 Slightly loosen do not remove the UV lamp se
41. 05622 REV B iii DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Table of Contents M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 3 10 Setting the M700E s Total Gas Flow 43 4 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS AND GLOSSARY 45 AOS E PE 45 2 2 GIOSSALY ine e tee n En t aw Petre eee HD aequ 45 5 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND nnnnn nnn nnn 49 5l Ozone e ed lev rcd ve Le deve eee eee ved ed gud 49 5 1 1 Internal Ozone Generator OPT 014 ssssssssssssseeene nene enee rnnt enne nnns 49 5 1 2 UV Photometer Module OPT 024A en nennen eer enne aei 51 5 2 Gas FloW ODptiOns ite b Oei scale desee blsie ta tabu ca aiii edet 53 5 2 1 Flow Rate Options OPT 07A OPT 7B OPT 08A amp OPT 8 53 5 2 2 Multiple Calibration Source Gas MFC 53 5 3 Rack Mount Kits 20A OPT 20B amp OPT 21 ener nnne 55 5 4 Carrying Strap Handle OPT 29 4 5 tet ea pide nt eaae daa ce e e edd pid 55 5 9 opare Parts KITS 2 iit tte ee 56 5 5 1 M700E Expendables Kit OPT 464 aisinas innan ARAPA ARI
42. 136 SIESS Creating a GE TPS EEVEL 2 Rr rm Pe m tec mtd a HU 137 6 11 5 4 Creating a MANUAL LEVEL sese nnn eren nennen nennen nnns 138 6 11 5 5 Editing or Deleting a LEVEL iii rtr t tt o Rer Re n de 139 6 11 6 CONFIGURING LEVEL Status Blocks sssssse eene BEERA ener enne 140 7 REMOTE OPERATION OF THE M700E eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenne nennen nennt 141 7 1 Using AnalyZer s Communication Ports sssssssssessseeee ener 141 7 1 1 RS 232 DTE DCE Communication sessesseeneeeneeenen nennen nns 141 7 1 2 COMM Port Default Settings and Connector Pin 142 131 3 COMM Port Baud Rate ctae eee dart eed ede hee tide tee reb e e eee eee e head 144 05622 REV B v DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Table of Contents M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 4 COMM Port Communication Modes sss er rennen nnne EEEE 145 TiS COMM Port Testlng x2 n prier tr epo St d HA Oe CE edes dle AI oen e EHE eene 147 77106 ETHIC M tioned 148 11 1 Terminal Operating Modes entente roe re dO deco Re den p Dole tese Mae epus 149 7 1 7 1 Help Commands in Terminal eene 149 1T42156 2 Command Syntax uti e
43. 96S Second as decimal number 00 59 Aw Weekday as decimal number 0 6 Sunday is 0 y Year without century as decimal number 00 99 Y Year with century as decimal number Percent sign Factory option flags Add values to combine options 1 permeation tube 1 installed do not enable dual gas outputs option 2 generator installed 4 photometer installed 8 enable high concentration 16 enable high pressure diluent sensor 32 generator reference detector installed implies that generator is installed 64 enable MFC flow correction 128 enable dual gas outputs do not enable permeation tube Pg A 16 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 option 256 enable dual diluent inputs 512 permeation tube 2 installed do not enable photometer option 1024 enable software controlled maintenance mode 2048 enable Internet option 4096 enable switch controlled maintenance mode Dasibi emulation version only Dual permeation tube option iChip option I C MFC option 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 17 APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision D 1 Table A 2 M700E Warning Messages Revision D
44. Continue pressing NEXT until DIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT DIAG AIO DRIVE 1 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DO NOT DIAG AIO MFC DRIVE 2 5V OVR NOCAL Edit or change the SET SET gt EDIT EXIT settings for these channels DIAG AIO MFC DRIVE 3 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATEL NO lt SET SET gt CAL 118 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 9 1 2 Selecting a Test Channel Function to Output The Test Functions available to be reported are listed on Table 6 13 Table 6 13 Test Channels Functions available on the M700E s Analog Output TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF EN c PHOTO MEAS The raw output of the photometer during its 0 mV 5000 mV measure cycle O3 PHOTO REF The raw output of the photometer during its 0mV 5000 mV reference cycle The raw output of the generator s 0 mV 5000 mV reference detector SAMPLE PRESSURE The pressure of gas in the photometer 0 iba In 40 Hg In A absorption tube TEST CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ZERO FULL SCALE SAMPLEFLOW FLOW The gas flow rate The gas flow rate through the photometer the The gas flow rate through the photometer 1000 cm min The temperature of ga
45. Continue pressing SET gt until DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING TEST OUTPUT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT CALIBRATED YES lt SET SET CAL EXIT 126 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 9 2 3 Manual Calibration of the TEST CHANNEL Configured for Voltage Ranges For highest accuracy the voltages of the analog outputs can be calibrated manually NOTE The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted see Section 6 9 2 1 Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100 10 or 1 count increments VIN Recording Device ANALYZER Figure 6 11 Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL Table 6 15 Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration MINIMUM FULL ZERO SPAN SCALE TOLERANCE SPAN VOLTAGE TOLERANCE 0 1 VDC 0 0005V 0 001V 0 02 mV 1 VDC 0 001V 900 mV 0 001V 0 24 mV 5 VDC 0 002V 4500 mV 0 003V 1 22 mV 10 VDC 0 004V 4500 mV 0 006V 2 44 mV 05622 REV B 127 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator
46. Dee had lace tesla eeu eee 254 11 4 10 1 A D EUTnctlons uada tle int ree rude ceo Pee e a eed ed ees 254 11 4 10 2 Test Channel Analog Outputs Voltage senem nennen 254 11 4 10 3 Status Outputs eerie nene pe e Hou xe dede Sea DH Ed de Pee da ae 255 11 4 10 4 Control Inputs a aa eet eee oe de ce pe diane ne ee 256 11 4 10 5 Control OUtpUts s t tete ti ep e elg xag 256 T4411 CPU ea it eiie taut riga 257 11 4 12 RS 232 Communications idet ha Lc tenerse t go chr qo e hd eb cm 258 11 4 12 1 General RS 232 Troubleshooting nennen 258 11 4 12 2 Troubleshooting Calibrator Modem or Terminal 258 14 4 13 Temperature Probleitis Lot pete b e tele d atte lean dee ab Red dad 259 11 4 13 1 Box Chassis Temperature t mede hb tr teneo eter est edis add 259 11 4 13 2 Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature sssssssssssseseeeeneennne 259 11 4 13 3 UV Lamp Temperature rani eta ere 259 11 4 13 4 Ozone Generator 260 11 5 Trouble Shooting the Optional Photometer ssssssssssseseeeee eene 260 11 5 1 Dynamic Problems with the Optional Photometer ssesse een eene 260
47. Direct Cable Modem Windows Modem Ethernet TCP IP InstrumentName ID Staus M300 300 v 2053 Connected For Help press F1 NUM a 1 200 at Eng lab 200 rack Oy x BE ee 3 ZAAPPRCOr m Download graph save data Figure 7 8 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface NOTE APICOM is included free of cost with the calibrator and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at http www teledyne api com software apicom The M700E calibrator is fully supported by APICOM revision 3 9 4 and later Instruments with the LEADS support option must run APICOM revision 4 0 and later USER NOTES 05622 REV B 165 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 M700E CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION Basic electronic calibration of the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is performed at the factory Normally there is no need to perform this factory calibration in the field however the performance of several of the instrument s key subsystems should be verified periodically and if necessary adjusted These subsystems are e Mass Flow Controllers The accuracy of the mass flow controller outputs is intrinsic to achieving the correct calibration mixture concentrations therefore the accuracy of their output should be checked and if necessary adjusted e
48. See Section 11 3 1 There is no activity from the primary RS 232 port on the rear panel even if lt ret gt is pressed In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard specifically U57 the large 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board If this is true removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to startup but the measurements will be incorrect If the calibrator stops part way through initialization there are words on the vacuum fluorescent display then it is likely that the DOC has been corrupted 05622 REV B 257 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 4 12 RS 232 COMMUNICATIONS 11 4 12 1 General RS 232 Troubleshooting Teledyne API calibrators use the RS 232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be connected to a variety of computer based equipment RS 232 has been used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult Generally every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully Problems with RS 232 connections usually center around 4 general areas e Incorrect cabling and connectors See Section 7 1 2 for connector and pin out information e The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured S
49. Status Outputs Check PIN LEFT TO RIGHT STATUS 1 ST SYSTEM OK 2 SPARE 3 ST CAL ACTIVE 4 ST DIAG MODE 5 ST TEMP ALARM 6 ST PRESS ALARM 7 PERM VALVE 1 8 PERM VALVE 2 05622 REV B 255 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 4 10 4 Control Inputs Table 11 13 M700E Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions Bem SSCS Betm SSCS Bottom Betm contona oO The control input bits can be tested by applying a trigger voltage to an input and watching changes in the status of the associated function under the SIGNAL I O submenu EXAMPLE to test the A control input 1 Under the DIAG SIGNAL I O menu See Section 11 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output named 0 CONTROL IN 1 Connect a jumper from the pin on the appropriate connector to the U on the same connector Connect a second jumper from the V pin on the connector to the A pin The status of 0 CONTROL IN 1 should change to read ON 11 4 10 5 Control Outputs To test the Control Output electronics 1 Connect a jumper between the E pin and the V pin on the status output connector 2 Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested 3 Connecta voltmeter
50. amp OPT 92C Two options are available for extending Teledyne API s standard warranty see Section 2 3 Both options have to be specified upon ordering the analyzer OPT 92B 3 YEAR WARRANTY Includes 1 year standard 2 years additional Extends warranty to cover a three 3 year period from the date of purchase OPT 92C WARRANTY BEYOND 3 YEARS Consult factory for pricing 5 12 DUAL GAS OUTPUT NO SPECIAL OPT 73 The standard output manifold has been removed and replaced with 2 output fittings labeled Output A and Output B Output A is the primary calibration gas output all calibration functions can be performed on this output Output B is a secondary output commonly used for NOy probe calibrations This output cannot be used for ozone generation using the photometer feedback It can be used for standard dilution calibrations as well as GPT using ozone The dual output option consists of an internal output selector value that can be used to output calibration gas to one of two output fittings labeled Output A and Output B take the place of the output manifold When this option is enabled the output must be selected when generating gas See example as follows 1 Press SETUP 2 Press MORE 3 Press DIAG WARNING THERE ARE MORE VARS AVAILABLE WHEN USING THE 929 PASSWORD USE CAUTION WHEN PRESSING ANY BUTTONS WHILE IN THIS SETUP ANY CHANGES MADE MAY ALTER THE PERFORMANCE OF THE INSTRUMENT OR CAUSE
51. generator are entered into the calibrator s software the M70OE adjusts the NO flow rate and diluent zero air flow rate to precisely create the appropriate concentration at the output In this case Totalflow is calculated as Totalflow NO GAS O3 gow Equation 9 4 WHERE NOGA Siow NO source gas flow rate For calibrator s with multiple source gas MFC is the sum of the flow rate for all of the active cal gas MFC s Totalflow total gas flow requirements of the system O5 fow the flow rate set for the generator required diluent gas flow Again this is a dynamic process An optional photometer can be added the M700E calibrator that allows the CPU to tracks the chemiluminescent reaction created when the NO and O interact to measure the decrease in 194 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation NO concentration as is produced This information along with the other data gas temperature and pressure actual flow rates etc is used by the CPU to establish a very accurate calibration mixture 9 2 PNEUMATIC OPERATION The M70OE calibrator pneumatic system consists of the precision dilution system and valve manifold consisting of four gas port valves and one diluent air valve When bottles of source gas containing different gases are connected to the four source gas
52. one disk on chip and one or two flash chips 9 3 2 1 Disk on Chip Technically the disk on chip is an EEPROM but appears to the CPU as behaves as and performs the same functions in the system as an 8 mb disk drive internally labeled as DOS drive C It is used to store the computer s operating system files the Teledyne API firmware and peripheral files 9 3 2 2 Flash Chip The flash chip is another smaller EEPROM with about 64 kb of space internally labeled as DOS drive B The M700E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips The M700E standard configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity which is used to store the calibrator configuration as created during final checkout at the factory Separating these data onto a less frequently accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption through drive failure In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail the calibrator will continue to operate with just the DOC However all configuration information will be lost requiring the unit to be recalibrated 05622 REV B 201 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 3 3 RELAY PCA The relay PCA is one of the central switching and power distribution units of the calibrator It contains power relays valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves as well as thermocouple amplifiers power
53. w 0 Io3uo2 Mats Controllar CAL GAS 2 TALET Cal Gas Cal Gat PRESSURE Mat Flow Controlla d INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL 3 INLET CAL GAS 4 INLET SENSOR IVA GFT OO vae T et GAS INPUT MANIFOLD ud en bach panel Cal Gee Mase Flew Controllac 1 i Volume a T 0 GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR MOSN3S MO14 0 PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR GEM PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR Flow Control 1800 cm OFF INTERWAL VENT ps 12 PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER ZERO IM PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS OUTPUT CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 VENT E TPUT blu FAF OV Figure 10 4 Gas Flow for Auto Leak Check Procedure of M700E s with Optional Photometer 05622 REV B DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 229 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M700E Operator s Manual 10 2 1 3 Performing the Auto Leak Check Procedure To perform an AUTO LEAK CHECK press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP 4L PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD ENTR
54. 1 M700E Messages for Latest Revision Message Text Warnings WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power cycled or the CPU was reset WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased WPHOTOLTEMP PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING Photometer lamp temperature outside of warning limits specified by PHOTO LAMP variable WOSGENTEMP GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING Os generator lamp temperature outside of warning limits specified by GEN LAMP variable WPERMTEMP1 PERM TUBE 1 TEMP WARNING Permeation tube 1 temperature outside of warning limits specified by PERM SET variable WPERMTEMP2 PERM TUBE 2 TEMP WARNING Permeation tube 2 temperature outside of warning limits specified by PERM_SET2 variable WPHOTOREF PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING Photometer reference reading less than 2500 mV or greater than 4999 mV WLAMPSTABIL PHOTO LAMP STABILITY WARNING Photometer lamp reference step changes occur more than 25 of the time WO3GENREF GEN REFERENCE WARNING reference detector drops below 5 mV during reference feedback generator control WREGPRESS REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING Regulator pressure outside of warning limits specified by REG_PRESS_LIM variable WMFCPRESS MFC PRESSURE WARNING Any MFC pressure outside of warning limits specified by PRESS_LIMIT variable WMFCFLOW MFC FLOW WARNING Any MFC drive less
55. 1 the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound As long as that ratio stays at least 2 1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations surges or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice High Critical flow Low pressure orifice pressure regime regime ee Gas at sonic speed Spring Filter Orings Figure 9 2 Flow Control Assembly amp Critical Flow Orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice volume of gas per unit of time depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice The larger the hole the more gas molecules moving at the speed of sound pass through the orifice With a nominal pressure of 10 in Hg A in the sample reaction cell the necessary ratio of reaction cell pressure to pump vacuum pressure of 2 1 is exceeded and accommodating a wide range of variability in atmospheric pressure and accounting for pump degradation This extends the useful life of the pump Once the pump degrades to the point where the sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2 1 a critical flow rate can no longer be maintained 9 2 2 INTERNAL GAS PRESSURE SENSORS The M700E includes a single pressure regulator Depending upon how many and which options are installed in the M70OE calibrator there are between two and four pressure
56. 2 and numeral 0 to 9 or the underscore character To assign a name to a sequence press Make sure that the M700E ae is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M700E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT 1 SETUP 0 Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Scrolls back and forth between SETUP NAME 0 existing sequences EXIT discards the Moves the CH CH INS DEL 0 ENTER EXIT s new NAME I cursor one ENTR accepts the new NAME 7 SET gt EDIT EXIT character left or right Inserts anewa character at the Deletes a Toggle this key to cycle cursor location character at the through the range of cursor location numerals and available characters A Z5 0 9 amp 7 94 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 1 3 Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence The sequence can be set to repeat a certain number of times from 1 to 100 It can also be set to repeat indefinitely by inputting a zero 0 into the REPEAT COUNTER To set the REPEAT COUNTER press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mo
57. 3 3 Calibration Manifold Exhaust Vent Line The manifold s excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of the room The internal diameter of this vent should be large enough to avoid any appreciable pressure drop and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to ensure that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion 05622 REV B 173 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 3 4 PERFORMING AN EXTERNAL CALIBRATION OF THE PHOTOMETER The following procedure sets values held in the calibrators memory for zero point OFFSET and SLOPE 8 3 4 1 Photometer Zero Calibration To set the zero point offset for the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator s photometer press GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL 03 USER 03 GAS CONFIG MODE PHOT 03 GAS CONFIG BCAL DARK SYSTEM ENTER PASSWORD 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT iL Toggle these keys until PASSWORD 717 gt PHOTOMETER BENCH CAL CAL Press the ZERO key if BENCH CALXZRO using the Internal ZERO XZRO Generator o Press the XZRO Key if using an External Generator BCAL XZRO TEST FUNCTION Message Field The Message field displays the Test Function currently selected ZERO Allow zero air to enter the PHOTOMETER IN port at the rear o
58. 4 to confirm that the calibrator s vital functions are working power supplies CPU relay PCA keyboard etc e See Figure 3 3 and Figure 3 4 for general layout of components and sub assemblies in the calibrator e See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D 05622 REV B 237 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 1 1 FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES The most common and or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the front panel Table 11 1 lists warning messages along with their meaning and recommended corrective action It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time it is often an indication that some fundamental sub system power supply relay PCA motherboard has failed rather than indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings In this case it is recommended that proper operation of power supplies See Section 11 4 3 the relay PCA See Section 11 4 6 and the motherboard See Section11 4 10 be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages The M700E will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by displaying the keypad label MSG on the Front Panel In this case the Front panel display will look something like the following STANDBY SYSTEM RESET TEST
59. ACTION Submenu CHOOSE ACTION Submenu ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE PREV NEXT Use the NEXT until SETUP X X INSERT STEP GPTPS PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X GPTPS 0 0 PPB NO EXIT discards the new gas type amp Toggle these keys to 0 0 d PERS ENTE EXIT target concentration set the NO target E concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp MUST be at least 10 i Higher than the Target target concentration Concentration JW SETUP X X GPTPS 0 0 PPB 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new gas type amp Toggle these keys to l target concentration set the NO target Nr tate ENTR accepts the new gas type amp 8 target concentration concentration SETUP X X TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new flow rate Toggle these keys to set EE the target TOTAL FLOW ENTR accepts the Default 2 000 LPM new gas flow rate STANDBY LEVEL 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys until l LEVEL number the designation of the E existing defined level ENTR accepts the new program is reached LEVEL number 05622 REV B 137 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 11 5 4 Creating a MANUAL LEVEL To create a level using the M700E s MANUAL generation function press Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu CHOOSE ACTION Submenu ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE PREV N
60. ENTR EXIT keys to change for EXIT discards the new the 2nd gas Toggle this key to change the GAS NAME units of measure for the 2nd ERR Suse end GAS NAME gt SETUP XX PORT1 50 0 PPM Repeat until all of the PREV ADD DEL EDIT gases and concentrations Use this key to change this gas entry in the canister are entered Use this key to delete this gas entry 05622 REV B 41 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 3 9 SELECTING AN OPERATING MODE THE GENERATOR The generator can be set to operate in three different modes 3 3 9 1 CNST CONSTANT In this mode the output of the generator is based on a single constant drive voltage There is no Feedback loop control by the M700E s CPU in this mode 3 3 9 2 REF REFERENCE The O control loop will use the generator reference detector s UV lamp measurement as input This mode does not use the photometer to control the ozone generator This setting will be the default mode of the M700E calibrator and will be mused whenever the calibrator is using the GENERATE AUTO command or the GENERATE sequence step to create a calibration mixture When the GENERATE MAN command or the MANUAL sequence steps are active the local O3 generator mode chosen during when the command step is programmed will take precedence 3 3 9 3 BNCH BENCH The O concentration contro
61. FLOW the concentration accuracy of cal gas mixtures involving and GPT mixtures Check for Gas Flow problems Poor photometer temp control can cause instrument noise stability and drift Temperatures PHOTO LAMP TEMP outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 The pressure of the gas in the photometer s sample chamber is used to calculate the 5 concentration of O3 in the gas stream Incorrect sample pressure can cause inaccurate PHOTO SPRESS readings Check for Gas Flow problems See Section Table 11 1 table continued 05622 REV B 241 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual Table 11 2 Test Functions Indicated Failures cont TEST FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS The temperature of the gas in the photometer s sample chamber is used to calculate the concentration of Os in the gas stream Incorrect sample temperature can cause inaccurate readings Possible causes of faults are Bad bench lamp heater Failed sample temperature sensor Failed relay controlling the bench heater Failed Relay PCA IC Bus malfunction Hot Lamp Values outside range indicate Contamination of the Zero Air or Span Gas supply Instrument is miss cal
62. GE X XE 13 Sample Inlet Span Gas Inlet Zero Air Inlet Teledyne Instruments E Series Gas Analyzer DILUENT IN mc ou Calibrator ll U SPAN CAL MANIFOLD CAL Teledyne Instruments _ FLELFLELFLI SOURCE MODEL 701 diera ZERO CAL MANIFOLD GAS Zero Gas Generator If Gas flow on these lines is 2 5 SLPM the minimum O D must be 3 8 inch Figure 3 14 Set up for M700E Connecting the M700E to a Dual Span Gas Zero Air Manifold 05622 REV B 29 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual NOTES This set up is subject to the same notes and conditions as the single calibration manifold described in Section 3 2 5 2 except that The M700E total gas flow rate Cal Gas Flow Rate Diluent Flow Rate out should be greater than the Total Flow requirements of the entire system The manifolds as shown the above drawing are oriented to simplify the drawing Their actual orientation in your set up is with the ports facing upward All unused ports must be capped CALIBRATION MANIFOLD EXHAUST VENT LINES The span and zero air manifolds excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of the room This vent should be of large enough internal diameter to avoid any appreciable pressure drop and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to assure that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy cu
63. Green Heater Statue O3 GEN HEATER O3 GEN TEMP e Failed AC Relay e Faulty Connectors Wiring 1 Only applies on calibrators with photometer options installed 2 Only applies on calibrators with generator options installed 246 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 3 3 VALVE DRIVER PCA STATUS LEDS The Signal I O submenu also includes VARS that can be used to turn the various input gas valves on and off as part of a diagnostic investigation WATCHDOG INDICATOR CAL GAS VALVE 1 CAL GAS VALVE 2 CAL GAS VALVE 3 CAL GAS VALVE 4 J PURGE y DO DILUENT 7 ALVE po L ni L Figure 11 4 Valve Driver PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting Table 11 6 Valve Driver Board Watchdog LED Failure Indications LED Function Fault Status Indicated Failure s e Failed Halted CPU i Faulty Mother Board Keyboard or Relay PCA D1 C bus Health Continuously ON y E y y Red Watchdog Circuit _ Faulty Connectors Wiring between Mother Board Continuously OFF Keyboard or Relay PCA e Failed Faulty 5 VDC Power Supply PS1 Table 11 7 Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications ACTIVATED BY SIGNAL LED FUNCTION I O PARAMETER DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE D3 Cal G
64. INFORMATION ABOUT LEADS LEVELS The M700E calibrator can be equipped with a version of firmware that includes support for LEADS a data collection and analysis system LEADS specifically designed for handling meteorological and environmental data particularly when there is a need to integrate data and control instrumentation from several different manufacturers When an M70OE calibrator is equipped with the optional LEADS software used in conjunction with dataloggers located in the central data analysis facility it is possible to collect and buffer data between the various calibrators analyzers and metrological equipment remotely located at an air monitoring station Because LEADS was originally developed for use with TNRCC using Dasibi 5008 calibrators the LEADS version of the M7OOE includes support for Dasibi Dot serial data commands and operational LEVEL s It also includes a method for driving external devices via contact closure control outputs in conjunction with an optional bolt on valve driver assembly see Section 5 8 NOTE For more information on the LEADS system please go to http www meteostar com 6 11 2 DOT COMMANDS The Dasibi Dot commands form a text based ASCII data protocol that is transmitted between a control computer XENO data logger in this case and a calibrator or ambient gas analyzer over an RS 232 connection The details of the protocol are beyond the scope of this document but in its simplest
65. IP ADDRESS S disabled when address e g 192 168 76 1 that is the address of the DHCP is ON computer used by your LAN to access the Internet Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g 255 255 252 0 that defines that identifies the LAN to which the device is connected Configured by EDIT key All addressable devices and t LAN must SUBNET MASK disabled when addressable devices and computers on a mus DHCP DHCP is ON have the same subnet mask Any transmissions sent devices with different subnet masks are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are routed through a different gateway computer onto the Internet Editable but This number defines the terminal control port by which TCP PORT 3000 DO NOT the instrument is addressed by terminal emulation CHANGE software such as Internet or Teledyne API s APICOM The name by which your calibrator will appear when addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the HOST NAME M700E Editable Internet While the default setting for all Teledyne API s M700E calibrators is M700E the host name may be changed to fit customer needs not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne API s Customer Service personnel NOTE If the gateway IP instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes e g 0 0 0 0 the DCHP was not successful in which case you may have to configure the calibrator s Ethernet proper
66. MEASURE REFERENCE VALVE To check the function of the photometer s measure reference valve 1 2 Set the calibrator s front panel display to show the PHOTO REFERENCE test function see Section 6 1 Follow the instruction in Sections 8 3 3 and 8 3 4 1 for performing a zero point calibration of the photometer e Press XZRO and allow the calibrator to stabilize Before completing the calibration by pressing the ZERO key note of the displayed value Press the final Zero key then press NO when asked ARE YOU SURE Follow the instruction in Sections 8 3 4 2 for performing a span point calibration of the photometer e Press XSPN and allow the calibrator to stabilize Before completing the calibration by pressing the SPAN key note of the displayed value of PHOTO REFERENCE e Ifthe REF value has decreased by more than 2 mV from its value with Zero gas then there is a cross port leak in the M R valve Press the final Zero key then press NO when asked ARE YOU SURE 262 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 5 3 CHECKING THE UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY NOTE A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D WARNING Hazardous voltage present use caution It is not always possible to determine wit
67. MFC with the lowest flow rate that can accommodate the requested flow thereby affording the most precise flow control e If no single MFC can accommodate the requested flow rate multiple mass flow controllers are used Given this information the M700E calibrator determines the NO gas flow by the formula Equation 6 5 NO GAS ow Totalflow Cno WHERE target concentration for the output concentration of the NO gas input NO GAS ow NO source gas flow rate And the diluent zero air gas flow by the formula Equation 6 6 DlLiow Totalflow NO GA Siow Os WHERE GAS row source gas flow rate from Equation 6 1 Totalflow total gas flow requirements of the system O3 flow the flow rate set for the O generator a constant value typically about 0 105 LPM DILiow required diluent gas flow 05622 REV B 83 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 4 4 4 M700E Calibrator GPT Operation The following table and figures show the status of the M700E s internal pneumatic components and internal gas flow when the instrument is in GPT generating modes Table 6 5 Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE gt GPT Mode VALVES MFC s X Closed O Open PHOT PUMP ie TN xg unes DILUENT GPT EJ PHOT M R CAL1 CAL2 DILUENT Reference Only present if multiple
68. Manual 9 3 5 MOTHERBOARD This is the largest electronic assembly in the calibrator and is mounted to the rear panel as the base for the CPU board and all I O connectors This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A D conversion digital input output PC 104 to 2 translation temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS 232 and RS 485 signals 9 3 5 1 A to D Conversion Analog signals such as the voltages received from the calibrator s various sensors are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter A D Under the control of the CPU this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word The A D consists of a voltage to frequency V F converter a programmable logic device PLD three multiplexers several amplifiers and some other associated devices The V F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage The PLD counts the output of the V F during a specified time period and sends the result of that count in the form of a binary number to the CPU The A D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in uni polar mode with a 5V full scale The converter includes a 1 over and under range This allows signals from 0 05V to 5 05V to be fully converted For calibration purposes two reference voltages are supplie
69. Manual Table of Contents 6 5 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES sss eene en nente nennen nennen 92 6 5 1 SETUP gt SEQ Programming Calibration 92 6 5 1 1 Activating a Sequence from the M700E Front 93 0 5 12 NAMING a Sequence ees pee Pre o e HT Hr et iet ta P ER e 94 6 5 1 3 Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence sssssssssssssssessssseeeeeene eene nennen 95 6 5 1 4 Using the M700E s Internal Clock to Trigger Sequences sssseem 96 6 5 1 5 Setting Up Control Inputs for a 99 6 5 1 6 Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence sssssssssssssseeseeeeenemenenn 100 6 5 1 7 Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the 101 6 5 2 Adding Sequence Steps eee tt reed dent rne d e dann v rna e n ennt aane dee adeo aed n 102 6 5 2 4 The GENERATE Step 1i ceti seid calice id edi d t edd Rd od 103 0 5 2 2 The GPT Step Ladder edid iato edd did do t idi add dide eae 104 0 5 2 3 The GPTPS Step added Lett ced edid ead cedi tedio ct dd dte hdd id eae 105 0 5 2 4 The PURGE Step cedit eedl th edd dt iid edid d ce idi d eed ded 106 6 5 2
70. Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 7 SETUP gt CLK 6 7 1 SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S TIME AND DAY The M700E has a time of day clock that supports the DURATION step of the calibration sequence feature time of day TEST function and time stamps on most COMM port messages To set the clock s time and day press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK TIME DATE DATE 01 JAN 05 ENTR EXIT 5 ENTR EXIT Toggle these Toggle these keys MINUTE keys to enter to enter current day current hour gt month and year HOUR TIME 22 30 DATE 18 JUN 05 0 ENTR EXIT 0 5 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK EXIT returns to TIME DATE SETUP X X display gt 05622 REV B 113 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 7 2 ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S SPEED In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower you can adjust a variable called CLOCK_ADJ to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day To change this variable press STANDBY ACT CAL 0 000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER SETUP PASS 0 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X
71. Service personnel DO NOT CHANGE these settings unless specifically instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENL COMM FLOW VARS DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 1 amp ENTR C SETUP X X 0 03_PHOTO_LAMP 58 0 DegC NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 1 03 PHOT LAMP 58 0 DegC PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT 2 O3 CONC RANGE b00 0 PPB PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT In all cases EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting O3 CONC RANGE 500 0 PPB 0 0 0 3jO 3 PHOTO BENCH ONLY OFF 0 O ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the upper span point of the PHOTO CONC Test Channel signal gt O3 PHOTO BEMCH ONLY OFF PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT OFF 0 SETUP 4 STD_TEMP 25 0 DegC PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 5 STD PRESS 29 92 In Hg PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 6 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day EDIT ENTR EXIT SETUP 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle this key turn this mode ON OFF LC CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses 05622 REV B DCN 5169 131 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 11 SETUP gt LVL SETTING UP AND USING LEADS DASIBI OPERATING LEVELS 6 11 1 GENERAL
72. Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 gt Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR key will re appear How do make the RS 232 Interface Work See Section 7 1 When should change the sintered filter s in the calibrators critical flow orifice s and how do change them The sintered filters do not require regular replacement Should one require replacement as part of a troubleshooting or repair exercise see Section 11 7 1 o PFD Q How often should rebuild the photometer pump on my calibrator A The diaphragm of the photometer pump should be replaced approximately once a year How long do the UV lamps of the optional generator and photometer last A The typical lifetime is about 2 3 years 4 2 GLOSSARY Acronym A short form or abbreviation for a longer term Often artificially made up of the first letters of the phrase s words APICOM Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne API to its customers ASSY Acronym for Assembly cm metric abbreviation for Cubic Centimeter Same as the obsolete abbreviation cc Chemical formulas used in this document e CO carbon dioxide e C Hg propane 05622 REV B 45 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary M
73. TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP STANDBY mode STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO MAN PURG STANDBY GENERATE ZERO Toggle this key to scroll ZERO ENTR SETUP through the available gas types as programmed during initial setup Continue pressing this key until the desired gas type appears STANDBY GENERATE 0 0 PPB 0 0 0 01 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys Toggle this key to to set the target set the units of concentration LT measure STANDBY GENERATE 0 0 PPB O3 0 4 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT STANDBY TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM GENERATE ACT CAL 2 000 LPM lt SET SET gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP Press this key until the ACT test function is displayed STANDBY ACT 400 0 PPB 03 Wait ye ar A MINIMUM SET SET GEN STBY SEQ SETUP OF 10 MINUTES or until the ACT reading settles down Record concentration readings displayed by the ACT test function and by the external reference photometer Repeat this procedure for as many points along the performance range of the M700E as required NOTE The readings recorded from the M700E s ACT test function and the reference photometer should be within 1 of each other 05622 REV B 171 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 3 3 S
74. Totalflow total gas flow requirements of the system flow the flow rate set for the generator a constant value typically about 0 105 LPM required diluent gas flow EXAMPLE e Ifthe requirement of the system are 9 000 LPM e The source gas flow rate is set at 3 00 LPM e The required source gas flow rate would be 9 0 LPM 0 105 LPM 8 895 LPM NOTE It is not recommended to set any flow rate to lt 10 or gt 100 of the full scale rating of that associated mass flow controller FOR M700E S WITH MULTIPLE CALIBRATIONS MASS FLOW CONTROLLERS INSTALLED The combined flow potential of both mass flow controllers is available with the following limits The limits are lt 10 of the lowest rated MFC or gt 100 of the combined full scale ratings for both mass flow controllers The M700E will automatically select the MFC with the lowest flow rate that can accommodate the requested flow thereby affording the most precise flow control e If no single MFC can accommodate the requested flow rate multiple mass flow controllers are used 80 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 4 3 4 Setting the Source Gas and Diluent Flow Rates Using the GENERATE gt MAN Menu In the following demonstration we will be using the values from the examples given with Equations 6 1 an
75. Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 3 VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE M700E S OPTIONAL PHOTOMETER For calibrators equipped with the photometer the accuracy of calibration mixtures involving produced by the M700E depends entirely on the accuracy of the photometer therefore it is very important that the photometer is operating properly and accurately Setup for Verifying O3 Photometer Performance is shown in Section 8 3 1 8 3 1 SETUP FOR VERIFYING PHOTOMETER PERFORMANCE NOTE This operation requires an external reference photometer PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET PHOTOMETER ZERO IN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT Max Length 3 meters ar 10 feet EXHAUST Calibration Source Gas connections are If the gas flow on as shown in this line is Section 3 1 3 and M700E SOC xS minimum CL 6 DILUENT IN Mass Flow must be 3 8 inch Calibrator CAL OUT gas outlet REFERENCE connection to PHOTOMETER manifold instrument Figure 8 2 Set up for Verifying Optional O Photometer 170 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Calibration and Verification 8 3 2 VERIFYING O PHOTOMETER PERFORMANCE To verify the performance of the M700E s optional internal photometer perform the following steps STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM Make sure that the 7 is in lt TST
76. and Verification In the displays associated with the FLOW gt STAT submenu e The numbers after F are the flow e The first number is the target flow e The second is the actual flow e The number after P is pressure in PSIG e Ifan MFC is off its flows are displayed as OFF 8 2 CALIBRATING THE OUTPUT OF THE M700E S MFC S A table exists in the memory of the M700E s for each MFC that sets the output of the MFC at each of 20 equally spaced control points along its entire performance range This table may be accesses via the DIAG gt MFC CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 8 2 2 For each calibration point the following is displayed e drive voltage in 20 equal incremental steps from 0 mVDC to 5000 mVDC e The expected flow rate corresponding to each drive voltage point each equal to1 20th of the full scale for the selected mass flow controller This table can also be used to calibrate the output of the MFC s by adjusting either the control voltage of a point or its associated flow output value see Section 8 2 2 Table 8 1 Examples of MFC Calibration Points MFC FULL SCALE d MOFULLSCALE 22 POINT VOLTAGE 1 0 LPM 3 0 LPM 5 0 LPM 10 0 LPM MFC TARGET OUTPUT 6 iom 8 2000 9 250mv 05622 REV B 167 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 2 1 SETUP F
77. be within 1 of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 0 step which should be within OmV 2 to 3 mV Ensure you take into account any offset that may have been programmed into channel See Section 6 9 1 5 Table 11 11 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage Outputs FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE see Section 6 9 1 3 100MV 1V 5V 10V STEP NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 20 20 mV 0 2 1 2 3 40 40 mV 0 4 2 4 4 60 60 mV 0 6 3 6 5 80 80 mV 0 8 4 8 6 100 100 mV 1 0 5 10 If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges it is likely that there has been a failure of the either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard 11 4 10 3 Status Outputs To test the status output electronics 1 Connect a jumper between the D pin and the V pin on the status output connector 2 Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested 3 Connect a voltmeter between the V and the pin of the output being tested see table below 4 Under the DIAG gt SIGNAL I O menu See Section11 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question 5 Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter e t should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF Table 11 12
78. beam is only required to make one pass through the Absorption Tube Therefore no complex mirror system is needed to lengthen the effective path by bouncing the beam back and forth Finally the UV passes through a similar window at the other end of the absorption tube and is detected by a specially designed vacuum diode that only detects radiation at or very near a wavelength of 254nm The specificity of the detector is high enough that no extra optical filtering of the UV light is needed The detector reacts to the UV light and outputs a current signal that varies in direct relationship with the intensity of the light shining on it This current signal is amplified and converted to a 0 to 5 VDC voltage analog signal voltage sent to the instrument s motherboard where it is digitized The CPU to be uses this digital data in computing the concentration of in the absorption tube Window Window UV Detector ABSORPTION TUBE y ON 26 a UV Sample Gas IN Sample Gas OUT Source 14 Absorption Path Length 42 cm Analog current signal is output by Detector 0 5 VDC analog signal to Motherboard Photometer Pre amp PCA Figure 9 20 O Photometer Absorption Path 9 7 1 4 Interferent Rejection It should be noted that the UV absorption method for detecting ozone is subject to interference from a number of sources The M700E s photometer has been successfully tested for its ability to
79. between the V pin and the pin of the output being tested see Table 11 14 4 Under the DIAG gt SIGNAL I O menu See Section 11 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question 5 Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter e It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF 256 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator Table 11 14 Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions Check PIN LEFT TO RIGHT STATUS 1 CONTROL_OUT_1 CONTROL OUT 2 CONTROL OUT 3 CONTROL OUT 4 CONTROL OUT 5 CONTROL OUT 6 CONTROL OUT 7 CONTROL OUT 8 CONTROL OUT 9 CONTROL OUT 10 CONTROL OUT 11 CONTROL OUT 12 O OINI DO a AJOJN E N 11 4 11 CPU There are two major types of failures associated with the CPU board complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk On Chip on the CPU board If either of these failures occur contact the factory For complete failures assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact the CPU is bad if on the following occurs while powering up the instrument The vacuum fluorescent display shows a dash in the upper left hand corner The CPU Status LED DS5 is not flashing
80. bit 2 pragressing rightward to bit 12 see Figure 3 10 for connector pin assignments 100 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 1 7 Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the Sequences As sequences run the M700E calibrator reports progress by displaying a message the MODE field of the front panel display See Figure 3 1 There are several types of report modes available see Table 6 10 Table 6 10 Sequence Progress Reporting Mode MODE DESCRIPTION e Shows the progress as the sequence name and step number This is the traditional display Example SO2_Test 2 e Shows the progress as a percent 0 10096 of the total sequence duration Example SEQ 48 e Shows the progress as days hours minutes and seconds elapsed counting from 0 ELAP Example lt 1 day T 01 30 25 i e 1 hour 30 minutes 25 seconds elapsed Example gt 1 day T 1d30 25 i e 1 day 30 hours 25 minutes elapsed e Shows the progress as days hours minutes and seconds remaining counting down to 0 REM Example lt 1 day T 01 30 25 i e 1 hour 30 minutes 25 seconds remaining Example gt 1 day T 1d30 25 i e 1 day 30 hours 25 minutes remaining STEP PCT To select a PROGRESS report mode press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode L GEN STBY SE
81. circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control 9 3 6 INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA This PCA physically located to the just to the left of the MFC s houses two pressure sensors that measure the pressure of the incoming diluent gas zero air and calibration gases relative to ambient pressure Pneumatically both sensors measure their respective gases just upstream from the associated MFC This data is used in calculating the concentration of calibration mixtures The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument s front panel e CALPRESS the pressure of the selected calibration gas input reported in PSIG e DILPRESS the pressure of the diluent gas zero air input also reported in PSIG 05622 REV B 207 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 3 7 POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER The M70O0E calibrator operates in two main AC power ranges 100 120 VAC and 220 240 VAC both 10 between 47 and 63 Hz A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON OFF switch In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the calibrator NOTE The M700E calibrator is equipped with a universal power supply that allows it to accept any AC power configuration within the limits specified in Table 2 2 CAUTION Should the powe
82. e ee ae 9 3 GETTING STARTED 3 2 XXE RONDE 11 3 1 Unpacking and Initial Setup teet erc tee etse ta ice inq tsi debe ena ena 11 3 4 1 MZOOE GaliDr atot 5 ome Hua Ent Hi FERRE attese pras eamus 12 3 1 2 Electrical Connectians i o tet ioo eee ee elu a queue cesa ceti oes 16 2L 2 16 3 1 2 2 Analog Output t det 16 3 1 2 3 Connecting the Status Outputs 17 3 1 2 4 Connecting the Control Inputs cies 18 3 1 2 5 Connecting the Control Outputs dede 20 3 1 2 6 Connecting the Serial 21 3 1 2 7 Connecting to a LAN or the 21 3 1 2 8 Connecting to a Multi drop Network ssssssesseeeeeenene eene 21 3 2 Pnenumatic Connections 21 3 2 1 About Diluent Gas Zerr AN Jo 21 3 2 2 About Galibratior Gas eager OD n pete ea Roue teca saxea Roc deca ATE 2
83. each calibrator along with one 6 straight through DB9 male DB9 Female cable P N WRO0000101 5 6 4 ETHERNET OPT 63A The ETHERNET option allows the calibrator to be connected to any Ethernet local area network LAN running TCP IP The local area network must have routers capable of operating at 10BaseT If Internet access is available through the LAN this option also allows communication with the instrument over the public Internet Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS 232 port to 115 2 kBaud 05622 REV B 57 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software When installed this option is electronically connected to the instrument s COM2 serial port making that port no longer available for RS 232 RS 485 communications The option consists of a Teledyne API designed Ethernet card see figures below and a 7 foot long CAT 5 network cable terminated at both ends with standard RJ 45 connectors DC Power Connector Female RJ 45 Connector LNK LED ACT LED TxD LED RxD LED A RS 232 connector to the Motherboard Figure 5 7 M700E Ethernet Card ETHERNET OPTION Rear Panel eum Ethernet as seen from inside ar N Hewes Connector Analog Out Link Hoe LED Female na 9 onnector 4 CONDELEI Activity LED LNK LED pe ABCDEFAU ACT LED Tr
84. flow rate of diluent zero gas being output by the calibrator TARG DIL TARGDILFLOW LPM Target diluent zero gas flow rate for which the calibrator output is set O3GENREF mV The voltage being output by the O3 generator reference detector O3GENFLOW The gas flow rate for which the O3 generator is set O3GENDRIVE The drive voltage of the O3 generator UV lamp O3GENTEMP O3 generator UV lamp temperature CAL PRESSURE CALPRESS PSIG The gas pressure of the source gas being supplied to the calibrator DIL PRESSURE DILPRESS PSIG The gas pressure of the Diluent gas being supplied to the calibrator Diluent pressure REG PRESSURE REGPRESS PSIG The gas pressure at the pressure regulator on the O3 generator supply line Actual concentration and in some modes the actual flow ACT Message Varies depending on mode rate of the source gas in the calibration mixture being generated is displayed The Target concentration and in some modes the target TARG Message Varies depending on mode flow rate of the source gas in the calibration mixture being generated is displayed BOXTEMP Internal chassis temperature 2 The average UV Detector output during the SAMPLE PHOTOMEAS PORTION of the optional photometer s measurement cycle PHOTO REFERENCE PHOTOREF mV The average UV Detector output during the REFERENCE portion of the optional photometer s measurement cycle PHOTO FLOW PHOTOFLOW LPM The gas flow rate as measured by the flow sensor located between the
85. form the protocol is based on a two or three digit integer preceded by a control A and a period and then followed by a and a two digit checksum EXAMPLE A xxx nn For further information on dot commands please contact Teledyne API S Customer Service An M700E equipped with LEADS software can be simultaneously operated over the same COMM port using standard Teledyne serial data commands and is compatible with APICOM versions 3 7 3 and later which include an added feature that allows a user to edit upload and download level tables 132 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 11 3 LEVELS A LEVEL is a combination of several parameters An ID number for the LEVEL e An action e g GENERATE GPT GPTPS amp MANUAL e A target concentration value e An output flow rate if applicable e Configuration for one or both of two status output blocks Up to twenty levels can be defined and used with the M700E using a range of ID numbers from 0 98 Level 99 is reserved for standby The levels are not time based and do not include characteristics such as start time or duration therefore a single LEVEL can not switch between different concentration levels and flow rates Separate flow and concentration outputs must be programmed into separate LEVELs which are then individually started and stopped either by
86. in standby mode since the MFC s are turned OFF This prevents erroneous MASS FLOW WARNING messages from appearing NOTE The M700E calibrator should always be placed in STANDBY mode when not needed to produce calibration gas The last step of any calibration sequences should always be the STANDY instruction Table 6 3 shows the status of the M700E s various pneumatic components when the calibrator is in STANDBY mode Table 6 3 Status of Internal Pneumatics During STANDBY Mode VALVES X Closed O Open MECS CYL1 CYL2 CYL3 CYL4 al DILUENT pue CAL1 CAL2 DILUENT Reference Phase 1 Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed In instruments with optional generators installed airflow is maintained during STANDBY mode so that the generator can continue to operate at its most efficient temperature 05622 REV B 73 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M7DOE Chassis Flow Control 11 0 LPM PHOTOMETER BENCH Regulator GAB INPUT PRESSURE 3EMSOR YOSNIS 0 INLET V PHOTOMETER dim 63 1 EC o 9 PRESSURE SEPSOR WD 1 DOn Back Pane 1 3 Back Pane 2 S O GEN PHOTOMETER 5 PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA tx FHOTOMETER g
87. is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same communications channel such as when several calibrators are on the same Ethernet LAN See Section 7 4 in an RS 232 multi drop chain See Section 7 2 1 or operating over a RS 485 network See Section 7 3 If two calibrators of the same model type are used on one channel the ID codes of one or both of the instruments need to be changed To edit the instrument s ID code press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 MACHINE ID 700 ID EXIT discards the new setting ENTR EXIT Si e e e Toggle these keys to cycle through the ENTR accepts the available character new setting JF set 0 7 The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same communications channel e g a multi drop setup Different models of Teledyne API s calibrators have different default ID numbers but if two calibrators of the same model type are used on one channel for example two M700E s the ID of one instrument needs to be changed The ID can also be used for to identify any one of several calibrators attached to the same network but situated in different physical locations 148 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 1 7 TERMINAL OPE
88. minimum of 15 minutes for the calibrator to flood the entire sampling system with calibration gas 05622 REV B 27 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 2 5 3 Connecting the M700E Calibrator to a Calibration Manifold Using a calibration manifold provides a pneumatic interface between the calibration system and other devices or systems which use the calibrator s gas output Calibration manifolds usually have one or more ports for connections to other external devices such as an analyzer SAMPLING CANE FILTER SCREEN BLOWER PUMP SAMPLE MANIFOLD VENT TO OUTSIDE OF ROOM nnr Poo gt Sample Inlet Span Gas Inlet Zero Air Inlet Teledyne Instruments E Series Gas Analyzer Prin Sample Inlet Span Gas Inlet L Zero Air Inlet Teledyne Instruments E Series Gas Analyzer lf Mass Flow DILUENT IN Calibrator _ LLL L_ Teledyne Instruments MODEL 701 GAS Zero Gas Generator CALIBRATION MANIFOLD If Gas flow on this line is 2 5 SLPM the minimum t be 3 8 inch M7OOE output flaw rate must be greater than 5 SLPM S Minimum O D must be 3 8 inch Figure 3 13 Set up for M700E Connecting the M700E to a Calibration Manifold NOTES This method requires the analyzers connected to the calibration system have internal zero span val
89. of the Code of Federal Regulations Part 50 Appendix D 40 CFR Part 50 OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION OPT 95A Factory Calibration OPT 95B Calibration as a primary standard OPT 95C Calibration to NIST SRP 5 10 PERMEATION TUBE OVEN OPTION OPT 05 The permeation tube gas generator see Figure 5 11 is an alternative method for producing known concentrations of stable gas such as SO NO etc The generator consists of a temperature regulated permeation tube oven a flow restrictor an optional output desorber and a user supplied permeation tube The optional desorber can improve the response time of the calibrator especially when operating with NO tubes when operating with sulfur based gases it MUST be removed The permeation tube consists of a small container of a liquefied gas with a small window of PTFE which the gas slowly permeates through at a rate in the nanogram min range If the tube is kept at constant temperature usually about 50 C the device will provide a stable source of gas for a year or more A pneumatic schematic of the M700E with this option is shown in Figure 5 12 as well as an exploded view of the generator Desorber La Figure 5 11 Permeation Tube Gas Generator Option 05622 REV B 61 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Chassis PHOTOMETER BENCH Pressure Ragula
90. only if enabled character set with RS232 MODE variable Up to 100 Enclose value in double quotes characters when setting from the RS 232 long interface NONE O3 PHOTO MEAS PHOTO REF GEN REF REGULATO Diagnostic analog output ID Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface Pg A 14 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 PRESSURE PRESSURE SAMPLE SAMPLE LAMP TEMP LAMP CHASSIS PASS_ENABLE ON OFF ON ON enables passwords OFF disables them DEF_CC_OUTPUT 00000000000 Any string of Default contact closure output 0 exactly 12 pattern when not executing a characters sequence Enclose value in consisting of double quotes when setting the digits 0 and from the RS 232 interface 1 only PHOTO_LAMP_POWER 4500 0 5000 Photometer lamp power setting LAMP PWR ENABLE ON OFF ON ON enables photometer lamp power cycling OFF disables it LAMP PWR PERIOD Hours 24 0 01 1000 Photometer lamp power cycling period LAMP OFF DELAY Seconds 0 1 0 02 5 Length of time photometer lamp is turned off pes VALID DELAY Seconds 1 300 Delay until valid concentration is computed REF d LIMIT 0 1 100 Photometer reference standard deviation must be below this limit to switch out of startup mode PATH LENGTH RE 41 96 0 01 99 999 Photometer detec
91. optical bench and the internal pump PHOTOLTEMP The temperature of the UV lamp in the photometer bench The pressure of the gas inside the photometer s sample PHOTO SPRESS PHOTOSPRESS In hg A chamber as measured by a solid state pressure sensor located downstream of the photometer PHOTO STEMP PHOTOSTEMP C The temperature of the gas inside the sample chamber of the photometer PHOTO SLOPE PHOTOSLOPE 1 000 Photometer slope computed when the photometer was calibrated at the factory PHOTO OFFSET PHOTOOFFSET Photometer offset computed when the photometer was calibrated at the factory mV TEST TESTCHAN channel Only appears when the TEST channel has been activated CLOCKTIME HH MM SS Current time as determined by the calibrator s internal clock Only appears when the optional generator is installed Displays the analog signal level of the TEST analog output E Only appears when the optional O3 photometer is installed 05622 REV B 71 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 2 OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES The 7 calibrator software has a variety of operating modes The most common mode that the calibrator will be operating in is the STANDBY mode In this mode the calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive although TEST functions and WARNING messages are still updated and can be examined via the fron
92. or in GPT Pre Set mode the photometer pump is the primary creator of gas flow through the M700E Flow rates are controlled by critical flow orifice s located in the gas stream 52 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 2 GAS FLOW OPTIONS 5 2 1 FLOW RATE OPTIONS OPT 07A OPT 7B OPT 08A amp OPT 08B The standard M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is equipped with one calibration gas mass flow controller and one diluent gas mass flow controller Table 5 3 shows the flow rates for the standard 7 as well as various flow rate options Table 5 3 M700E Gas Flow Rate Options Affected Mass Flow Dues case 5 2 2 MULTIPLE CALIBRATION SOURCE GAS MFC This option adds an additional mass flow controller on the calibration gas stream When this option is installed the M700E has both calibration gas MFC s on the same gas stream installed in parallel see Figure 5 3 and Figure 5 4 The calibrator turns on the MFC with the lowest flow rate that can accommodate the requested flow and can therefore supply the most accurate flow control When a flow rate is requested that is higher than the highest rated MFC but lower than their combined maximum flow rating both controllers are activated EXAMPLE e Calibrator with one calibration gas MFC configured for 0 5 LPM Maximum gas flow 5 LPM Minimum gas
93. re eed t tnu dert Res eaaet een ech nad axe eeu eun Re dn e RR e EASTERN TS aaa 227 10 2 1 1 Eq ipment ReqUlred c eei nee en canted sa caved bund ceded ant c CREAREA 227 10 2 1 2 Set p Auto seii e tecta tee ka eh ota 227 05622 REVB vii DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Table of Contents M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 10 2 1 3 Performing the Auto Leak Check eene eene 230 10 2 1 4 Returning the M700E to Service after Performing an Auto Leak 230 10 2 2 Cleaning or Replacing the Absorption 231 10 2 3 UV Source Lamp Adjustment Ie EAR eor RR eb eU reed er REA HER a egg 232 10 2 4 UV Source Lamp Replacement eene rennen nennen ern nnne 233 10 2 5 Adjustment or Replacement of Ozone Generator UV Lamp sse 234 11 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR OF THE M700E CALIBRATOR 237 I11 l General Troubleshooting da pU ERRARE MR iig 237 11 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with WARNING Messagges ssseee eem ener nennen 238 11 1 2 Fault Diagnosis With Test Functions AO AS 240 11 1 3 Using the Diagnostic Signal I O Function esisin EA
94. required The MFC s consist of a shunt a sensor a solenoid valve and the electronic circuitry required to operate them The shunt divides the gas flow such that the flow through the sensor is a precise percentage of the flow through the valve The flow through the sensor is always laminar The MFC s internal sensor operates on a unique thermal electric principle A metallic capillary tube is heated uniformly by a resistance winding attached to the midpoint of the capillary Thermocouples are welded at equal distances from the midpoint of the tube At zero air flow the temperature of both thermocouples will be the same When flow occurs through the tubing heat is transferred from the tube to the gas on the inlet side and from the gas back to the tube on the outlet side creating an asymmetrical temperature distribution The thermocouples sense this decrease and increase of temperature in the capillary tube and produces a mvDC output signal proportional to that change that is proportional to the rate of flow through the MFC s valve The electronic circuitry reads the signal output by the thermal flow sensor measured through a capillary tube This signal is amplified so that it is varies between 0 00 VDC and 5 00 VDC A separate 0 to 5 VDC command voltage is also generated that is proportional to the target flow rate requested by the M700E s CPU The 0 5VDC command signal is electronically subtracted from the 0 5VDC flow signal The amount and direction o
95. the UV Sensor output and various other physical parameters of the calibrator and stores them in memory The CPU uses these calibration values the UV absorption measurements made on the sample gas in the absorption tube along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final concentration 05622 REV B 217 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 7 1 MEASUREMENT METHOD 9 7 1 1 Calculating Concentration The basic principle by which photometer works is called Beer s Law also referred to as the Beer Lambert equation It defines the how light of a specific wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a certain distance at a given temperature and pressure The mathematical relationship between these three parameters for gasses at Standard Temperature and Pressure STP is Equation 9 5 I Ige at STP Where is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption is the intensity with absorption L is the absorption path or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed is the concentration of the absorbing gas In the case of the M700E Ozone is the absorption coefficient that tells how well O3 absorbs light at the specific wavelength of interest To solve this equation for C the concentration of the absorbing Gas in this case O3 the applicati
96. the gas flow rates for the final mixing of gases is controlled directly by the calibrators MFC under direction of the CPU gas flow through is controlled n on dynamically by various flow control assemblies located in the gas stream s These orifices are not adjusted but maintain precise volumetric control as long as the a critical pressure ratio is maintained between the upstream and the downstream orifice M700E Chassis Flow me UN 1 a 4 Pron Sin Rogule ewer DILUENT 25 T 3 a5 m m E 9 g Fl Bu i e i ros Y bn bon EE 8 M 32 THLLIENT m CAL GAST 1 Mass Flom Camraller A INLET SD in SENSOR 43 ide ME Os oe TAL GAS Ka 2 EE Valve INLET EF LY ul e CAL GAS E PRESSURE ved CAL GAS J KD SENSOR NA INLET EI T x on NN TAL GARE LA INLET lt a Ve ved GAS IMPLIT MANIFOLD yel fon pandly Cal Sat Masa Flea Comraller 1 Volume ETN GPT he D eu GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSO PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR UOS GEN PHOTOMETER ne ac a9 ue PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR e PHOTOMETER BENCH 800 om FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLIES E PHOTOMETER ZERO aol re ZERO OUT
97. the gas in the tube The content of the gas is calculated based on the ratio the UV light intensity during the measure phase present and the reference phase present When the photometer option is installed a third more precise and stabile option called the BENCH feedback mode exists for controlling the output of the generator In BENCH mode the intensity of the generator s UV lamp is controlled and therefore the concentration of the created by the M700E s CPU based on the actual O3 concentration measurements made by the photometer See Section 9 7 for more details on the operation of the O4 photometer This option requires that the generator OPT 01A be installed 05622 REV B 51 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Chassis Flow Control 1 0 LPM PHOTOMETER BENCH 4 Pressure GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER M 3 _________ PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA YOSNAS 0 DILUENT INLET DILUENT Valve PHOTOMETER INLET YOLVYANAD to Flow Control REFIMEAS vio 800 cm jquiessy O
98. the power supply assembly for the UV source lamp and the lamp itself 11 6 1 CHECKING THE UV SOURCE LAMP POWER SUPPLY NOTE A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D WARNING Hazardous voltage present use caution It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply however the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply 1 Ensure that the calibrator is in STANDBY mode 2 Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that 15VDC is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector If this voltage is incorrect check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11 4 3 4 Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV lamp power supply PCA see Figure 9 21 e 800 mVDC 10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 grnd e If this voltage is incorrect either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the 2 bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA e 5VDC between and grnd e If this voltages is less than 4 8 or greater than 5 25 either the 5 VDC power supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty e lf the above voltages check out it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply e Re
99. the units of concentration D measure STANDBY GENERATE 0 0 PPB 0 4 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT STANDBY TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM 7 GENERATE ACT CAL 2 000 LPM lt SET SET gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP Record concentration from reference photometer NOTE The readings recorded from the M700E s ACT test function and the reference photometer should be within 1 of each other 05622 REV B 179 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 4 3 O GENERATOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The 7 calibrator s software includes a routine for automatically calibration the generator A table of drive voltages stored in the M700E s memory is the basis for this calibration For each point included in the table used by the M700E to calibrate the optional generator the user can set a drive voltage and a dwell time for that point Each point can also be individually turned OFF or ON 8 4 3 1 Viewing Generator Calibration Points To view these calibration points press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR Pd Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL
100. 00LPM TST TST GEN STBY SEQ SYSTEM RESET STANDBY NOTE AUTO MAN PURGE The actual flow rate of the cal mass flow controllers rises to the full scale In this case a M7OOE with ACT CAL 6 000 LPM two mass flow controllers MFC1 5 LPM MFC2 1 LPM the ACT CAL flow rate rises to 6 LPM GEN SIBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP The M700E will stay in PURGE mode until the STBY button is pressed CAUTION PROCESS THIS PURGE FEATURE DOES NOT STOP AUTOMATICALLY THE USER MUST MANUALLY PRESS THE STBY KEY TO STOP THE PURGING 90 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 4 7 GENERATE gt VIEWING CONCENTRATIONS GENERATED FROM MULTI GAS CYLINDERS When a concentration mixture is being generated using a multiple gas cylinder as a source the software uses the Diluent and Cal gas flow rates to calculate the actual concentration for each gas in the cylinder so that it is possible to see the concentrations of all of the gases being output by the M700E calibrator EXAMPLE For a cylinder containing a blend of CH4 NO and a common contaminant is present in small quantities in bottles containing NO This will display the actual concentration being generated for each gas in the multiple gas cylinder When generating a concentration of one of the two primary gases
101. 04 Bus Chip O3 Generator UV Lamp ki N 26 2 2 Temperature ES a Flash I 2 5 Chip a Generator gt Reference t Detector Bus Is E E RELAY PCA 19 Generator GPT 8 Valve staus Cay Valve A tap car se E J LED Figure 9 15 Generator Electronic Block Diagram 05622 REVB 215 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual UV Lamp Generator Heater Control UV Lamp Power Supply 200 VAC 30 kHz UV Lamp Power Supply Transformer Reference Detector Preamp Power Connector Reference Detector Signal Output to Motherboard UV Lamp Power Connector Generator Reference Detector O3 Generator Reference Detector UV Lamp PCA Connector Figure 9 16 O Generator Electronic Components Location 9 6 3 1 O5 Generator Temperature Control In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M700E s Os generator is maintained at a constant 48 C If the lamp temperature falls below 43 C or rises above 53 C a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA Section 9 3 3 The location of the thermistor and heater associated with the generator is shown in Figure 9 17 216 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 516
102. 11 5 1 1 Noisy or Unstable Readings at Zero emen 260 11 5 1 2 Noisy Unstable or Non Linear Span Readings 261 11 5 1 3 Slow Response to Changes in Concentration sssssssseee eene 261 11 5 1 4 The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings 261 11 25 15 Ganhot Z8rO ite tti nett i RR RM 261 T1 5 1 6 Gannot Span z Ei RI tI IMS Ce 261 11 5 2 Checking Measure Reference Valve sssssssssssesseeenene eee ennemi 262 11 5 3 Checking The UV Lamp Power Supply eene 263 11 6 Trouble Shooting the Optional generator eene nennen 264 11 6 1 Checking The UV Source Lamp Power Supply eee nennen 264 TlIz7 RepalrProcedUres nit rine een et de eo to nea dene 265 viii 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents 11 7 1 Disk On Chip Replacement Procedure cccccccceceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeteceaaaeceeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeeessesecaeeeeess 265 11 8 Technical Assistance 265 12 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC 5
103. 2 3 2 2 1 NIST Traceable Calibration Gas Standards ssssssssse eene eene 22 3 2 2 2 Minimum Calibration Gas Source Concentration sssssssseeee eee 25 3 2 3 Connecting Diluent Gas to the M700E Calibrator sseeeenn nemen 25 3 2 4 Connecting Calibration SOURCE GAS to the M70OE 25 3 2 5 Making Gas Output Connections from the M700E ssssssssssseeene enne nennen 26 3 2 5 1 Set up for Direct Connections to Other Instruments ssssssssssseseen 26 3 2 5 2 Connecting the M700E Calibrator to a Sample Gas Manifold 27 3 2 5 3 Connecting the M700E Calibrator to a Calibration Manifold 28 3 2 5 4 Connecting the M700E Calibrator to a Dual Span Gas Zero Air Calibration Manifold 29 3 2 6 Other PneumatiC ConneCtions sse eene nennen nennen ener 30 3 2 0 1 04 Generator Optlon e e en Wee abe Sa eck erede re eve ERE A ee REA E eed eve E e RETI S 30 3 2 6 2 Generator with Photometer Option ssssssseseeeenenenenenenenenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnns 30 3 3 Initial Operation oi ert e reete b ret IN Rer dete d Ide dore ewer bet ceto dus 31 3 31 Startups iieri Rte eo nr E aeu ends 31 Pde Ze Livers M
104. 2g TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION A Teledyne Technologies Company OPERATOR S MANUAL MODEL 700E DYNAMIC DILUTION CALIBRATOR TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION TAPI 9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE SAN DIEGO CALIFORNIA 92121 5201 USA Toll free Phone 800 324 5190 Phone 858 657 9800 Fax 858 657 9816 Email api sales teledyne com Website http www teledyne api com 05621 Rev B4 Copyright 2007 DCN 5497 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation 09 July 2009 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Safety Messages SAFETY MESSAGES Your safety and the safety of others are very important We have provided many important safety messages in this manual Please read these messages carefully A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol These symbols are found in the manual and inside the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator The definition of these symbols is described below GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Refer to the instructions for details on the specific hazard CAUTION Hot Surface Warning CAUTION Electrical Shock Hazard TECHNICIAN SYMBOL All operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only A AN A A CAUTION The M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator shoul
105. 5 The STANDBY Step istud aedi erai te Leid ete eddie o ks edi Rudd t eod ad und 106 6 5 2 6 The DURATION Step olei eed tcd edet edd tai ti cede eddie Landed chee 107 6 5 2 7 The EXEGSEQ Leto edid tado eed ttd did dtd eb edad eed ta edd bad en 107 6 5 2 8 The CC OU FEU T Step ce certe ceti rer de ten ted EE e De OM BED iv ded deeds 108 6 5 2 9 The MANUAL Gas Generation Step sssssssssssssssssseeseeenenmemenere nennen nennen 109 6 5 2 10 Deleting or Editing an Individual Step a Sequence 110 6 5 3 Deleting a SEQUENCE winter an ta a Ae eens Mate EP ea del eel 111 Moz elc 112 6 7 C SETUP TX CLK ro cut tie bad neds ctm tert eI Ne E 113 6 7 1 Setting the Internal Clock s Time and Day sss enne 113 6 7 2 Adjusting the Internal Clock s Speed eene nnne enne nennen enne nns 114 6 8 SETUP 3 BASS unu stets inue hilt eat ay utet e cerit sr eine tala 115 6 9 SETUP gt DIAG gt TEST CHAN OUTPUT Using the TEST Channel Analog 117 6 9 1 Configuring the TEST CHANNEL Analog Output sess ener 117 6 9 1 1 The Analog I O Configuration Submenu seen enm 117 6 9 1 2 Selecting a Test Channel Function to Output sssssssseeeee eem eene 119 6 9 1 3 TEST CHANNEL VOLTAGE RANGE Co
106. 50490000 ASSY GENERATOR W BRKT amp REG M700E 050500000 ASSY GENERATOR 5LPM M700E 050940000 GUARD RELAY BOARD OBS 052400000 ASSY BENCH UV LAMP BIR CR 052910200 ASSY OPTICAL BENCH M700E 054690000 PCA VALVE DRIVER M700E 055020000 ASSY INLET MANIFOLD W PCA 700E 055210000 OPTION PHOTOMETER M700E KB 055220000 ASSY VALVE PHOTOMETER 055240000 OPTION OZONE M700E KB 055270000 ASSY EXHAUST MANIFOLD M700E KB 055560000 ASSY VALVE VA59 W DIODE 5 LEADS 055580100 DOC w SOFTWARE M700E 056440000 ASSY VALVE VA23 05735H M700E Spare Parts List DCN5356 Page 1 of 3 04 15 09 M700E Spare Parts List 056450000 ASSY VALVE VA32 056970000 PCA EXT OUTPUT ADPTR LEADS M700E M703 057230000 PCA SINGLE VALVE DRIVER 057360000 ASSY 3 8 VENT ADAPTER M700E 057400001 FT41 FRONT FERRULE SS 1 4 SILCOSTEEL 057520001 FT19 FRONT FERRULE SS 1 8 SILCOSTEEL 057630000 ASSY DUAL OUTPUT VALVE M700E 058020400 PCA E SERIES MOTHERBOARD M700E GEN 5 058430001 FT 40 FITTING BODY SILCOSTEEL COATED 058440001 FT 36 FITTING BODY SILCOSTEEL COATED 060340001 FT 85 FITTING BODY SILCOSTEEL COATED 061630000 ASSY FILTER DFU DESORBER SOAKED 064130000 ASSY DC HEATER THERM PCA GEN CN0000073 POWER ENTRY 120 60 KB CN0000458 CONNECTOR REAR PANEL 12 PIN CN0000520 CON
107. 6 9 2 1 To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL MFC_DRIVE_1 This message appears when DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL DRIVE 2 AUTO CAL is J Turned OFF for q channel Analyzer automatically calibrates all channels for which AUTO CAL is turned AlO NOT AUTO CAL MFC_DRIVE_3 ON DIAG AUTO CALIBRATING TEST OUTPUT If any of the channels have not DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED YES been calibrated ot if atleast one channel has AUTO CAL turned SET gt CAL EXIF OFF this message will read NO SA NOTE Manual calibration should be used for the 0 1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device 05622 REV B 125 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual To initiate an automatic calibration from inside the TEST CHANNEL submenu press Fram the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V CONC2 NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG TEST_OUTPUT RANGE V SET gt EDIT
108. 622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Calibration and Verification 8 3 3 2 Setup Using a Calibration Manifold Figure 8 4 shows the external zero air and O3 sources as well as the reference photometer connected to the M70OE Calibrator via calibration manifolds for both zero air and External Zero Air External Source y Source Enclosure Wall REFERENCE PHOTOMETER TEL me Erie oo iTo other calibrators or 3 gt instruments ZERO AIR CALIBRATION MANIFOLD PHOTOMETER INLET Capped PHOTOMETER OUTLET Max Length 3 meters or 10 feet line PHOTOMETER ZERO IN lt Length 3 meters PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT or 10 feet EXHAUST Calibration Source Gas If the gas flow on connections are this line is as shown in 25 SLPM the Section 3 2 minimum O D M700E must be 3 8 inch DILUENT IN Calibrator CAL OUT gas outlet connections to manifolds instruments Figure 8 4 External Photometer Validation Setup with Calibration Manifolds NOTE The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the drawing The actual orientation in your setup is with the ports facing upward All unused ports should be capped A Minimum of 1 1 LPM is required for the external zero air source 8 3
109. 700E Calibration and Verification 8 3 6 PHOTOMETER GAS FLOW CALIBRATION NOTE A separate flow meter is required for the procedure To calibrate the flow of gas through the M700E calibrator s optional photometer bench ONS Make sure that the M DOE is in standby mode LT Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD 2 Toggle these keys to match the actual flow as measured by the external flow meter Turn OFF the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Attach the flow meter directly to the EXHAUST port of the M700E calibrator Turn the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator ON Perform the following steps GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU An external flow GAS SEQ MORE meter is needed to perform this operation SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD ENTR SIGNAL VO PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR WAITING FOR FLOW PREV NEXT ENTR ACTUAL FLOW 1 000 LPM 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT po il EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepis the new setting 77 05622 REV B DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 177 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 4 CALIBRATING THE GENERATOR 8 4 1 SETUP FOR VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION THE GENERATOR NOTE An external reference photometer is required for the procedure
110. 700E Calibrator Operator s Manual e CH methane e H20 water vapor e general abbreviation for hydrocarbon e HNOs nitric acid e H2S hydrogen sulfide e NOx nitrogen oxides here defined as the sum of NO and e NO nitric oxide e NO nitrogen dioxide e NOy nitrogen oxides often called odd nitrogen the sum of NO NOx plus other compounds such as HNO3 Definitions vary widely and may include nitrate PAN N20 and other compounds e ammonia e molecular oxygen e ozone e SO sulfur dioxide DAS Acronym for Data Acquisition System the old acronym of iDAS DIAG Acronym for Diagnostics the diagnostic menu or settings of the system DHCP Acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers that automatically sets up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network DOC Acronym for Disk on Chip the system s central storage area for system operating system firmware and data This is a solid state device without mechanical moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive under DOS with disk drive label DOC chips come with 8 mb space in the E series system standard configuration but are available in larger sizes DOS Acronym for Disk Operating System The E series systems use DR DOS EEPROM also referred to as a FLASH chip ESD Acronym for Electro S
111. 85 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 4 5 GENERATE gt GPTPS Performing a Gas Phase Titration Pre Set The GPT Pre Set feature simulates a GPT mixing operation in order to determine the exact output of the calibrators generator As described in Section 6 4 4 1 all other things being equal the concentration of the being generated using the GPT feature will be equal to the amount of used Therefore the more accurately the generator performs the more accurate the output will be When operating in GPTPS mode diluent gas Zero air is substituted for the NO gas that would be mixed with the in normal GPT mode The resulting unaffected output of the O5 generator is shunted through the M700E s internal photometer which measures the ACTUAL concentration in the gas Once the exact concentration being output by the generator is determined the calibrator s software adjusts the O drive voltage up or down so that the output of the generator matches as closely as possible the target concentration requested This adjusted generator setting will be used during any subsequent real GPT operation NOTE The M700E has a learning algorithm during the O generation see Section 6 4 or Gas Phase Titration Pre Set Mode GPTPS Sections 6 4 4 5 and 6 4 5 It may take up to one hour for eac
112. 858 657 9816 Email api sales teledyne com Website http www teledyne api com Before you contact customer service fill out the problem report form in Appendix C which is also available online for electronic submission at http www teledyne api com forms USER NOTES 05622 REV B 265 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 266 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 12 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE Teledyne API considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring 12 1 HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer are very small require very little power and operate very quickly Unfortunately the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity Controlling electrostatic discharge begins wi
113. 9 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation UV Lamp Generator Heater Control PCA Heater is located beneath Thermistor Figure 9 17 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations 9 6 3 2 Pneumatic Sensor for the O Generator A pressure sensor located on the O3 generator and photometer pressure flow sensor PCA see Figure 3 4 monitors the output gas pressure of the regulator on the generator s zero air supply The regulator is adjusted at the factory to maintain a pressure of 20 PSIG on this line If the pressure drops below 15 PSIG or rises above 25 PSIG a warning is issued 9 7 PHOTOMETER OPERATION The Model M700E calibrator s optional photometer determines the concentration of Ozone in a sample gas drawn through it Sample and calibration gasses must be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a stable gas flow through the absorption tube where the gas ability to absorb ultraviolet UV radiation of a certain wavelength in this case 254 nm is measured Gas bearing and zero air are alternately routed through the photometer s absorption tube Measurements of the UV light passing through the sample gas with and without present are made and recorded Calibration of the photometer is performed in software and does not require physical adjustment During calibration the CPU s microprocessor measures the current state of
114. ANALOG OUTPUT The M700E calibrator comes equipped with one analog output It can be set by the user to carry the current signal level of any one of the parameters listed in Table 6 13 and will output an analog VDC signal that rises and falls in relationship with the value of the parameter Pin outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are Figure 6 10 M700E the TEST CHANNEL Connector ANALOG OUT 6 9 1 CONFIGURING THE TEST CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT 6 9 1 1 The Analog I O Configuration Submenu Table 6 12 lists the analog I O functions that are available in the M700E calibrator Table 6 12 DIAG Analog I O Functions SUB MENU FUNCTION AOUTS Shows the status of the analog output calibration YES NO and initiates a calibration CALIBRATED of all analog output channels MEGCDRIVE 1 These channels are used by the M700E calibrator internally as drive voltages for MFC DRIVE 2 instruments with analog MFC s MFC DRIVE 3 DO NOT atter the settings for these channels OPTIONAL j TEST OUTPUT Configures the analog output RANGE Selects the signal type voltage or current loop and full scale value of the output OVERRANGE Turns the 5 over range feature ON OFF for this output channel REC_OFS Sets a voltage offset not available wnen RANGE is set to CURRent loop AUTO CAL Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration CALIBRATED Performs the same calibra
115. ANNA 56 5 5 2 M70OOE Spare Parts Kit 46B amp OPT 46 56 5 6 COMMUNICATION OPOS sosser ana ETE T AAA AAA AAA REOT 57 5 6 1 R5232 Modem Cables 60A amp OPT 60 57 5 6 2 ETHERNET Cable OPT gt 60 57 9 6 3 RO 232 Multicdrop 62 petet tue Pb cup inda adea 57 5 6 4 Ethernet OPT 63A oi hactenus 57 5 6 5 Ethernet Multi drop 630C ssssssssssseseee eene nenne ener 59 5 7 Additional Manual 70A amp OPT 59 5 8 External Valve Driver 48A amp OPT 48 59 5 9 NIST Traceable Primary Standard Certification 95 OPT 95B amp OPT 95 61 5 10 PERMEATION Tube OVEN OPTION OPT 05 61 5 10 1 Permeation Tube Setup for the M7OOE ssssssssssssesseeee eren enn m enne nn nnne n nennen 63 10 2 64 5 11 Extended Warranty 92B amp OPT 92C EAR
116. ANTY POLICY 02024D Prior to shipment Teledyne API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested Should equipment failure occur Teledyne API assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available COVERAGE After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime Teledyne API stands ready to provide on site or in plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer NON API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT Equipment provided but not manufactured by Teledyne API is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturers warranty GENERAL During the warranty period Teledyne API warrants each Product manufactured by Teledyne API to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service Expendable parts are excluded If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period API shall correct such defect by in API s discretion repairing or replacing such defective Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any Product i that has been altered or subjected to misuse negligence or accident or ii that has been used in any manner other than in accordance with the instr
117. ASSEMBLY The input gas pressure flow sensor PCA located at the front of the instrument to the left of the MFC s see Figure 3 4 can be checked with a Voltmeter The following procedure assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard as well as the power supplies is operating properly BASIC PCA OPERATION e Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad CAL GAS PRESSURE SENSOR 1 Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter 2 Measure the voltage across 4 and 1 e The expected value for this signal should be Pressure Expected mVDC X4250mv0c P 750m0c 10 34 18psig g EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 25 PSIG the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1 would be between 3470 mVDC and 4245 mVDC EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 30 PSIG the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1 would be between 4030 mVDC and 4930 mVDC e If this voltage is out of range then either pressure transducer S1 is bad the board is bad or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly DILUENT PRESSURE SENSOR 1 Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter 2 Measure the voltage across TP5 and 1 e Evaluate the reading in the same manner as for the cal gas pressure sensor 05622 REV B 252 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED D
118. BLED lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP CC INPUT ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT new setting Toggle this key ENTR accepts the turn the CC input ON OFF new setting 7 SETUP CC INPUT 0 00000000000 lt CH CH gt 0 ENTER EXIT EXIT discards the Moves the 34 new setting cursor one character left or ENTR accepts the right new setting I7 Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 or 1 Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control input pins located on the back of the M700E see Figure 3 2 The left most bit is Bit 1 the next bit to the right bit 2 progressing rightward to bit 12 see Figure 3 9 for connector pin assignments 05622 REV B 99 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 1 6 Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence The 7 calibrator s control outputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source This feature allows the calibrator to control devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLC s dataloggers or digital relays valve drivers They can be used as e 12 separate ON OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences or e 12 bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration sequenc
119. C EE 32 3 9 9 Warming MeSSaggs tae A pH e TUO SEU es er cr de EC i eet ee e Coe tec 32 3 9 4 Functional Clhieck tta o estt Reed uie eU ee eres es dp Det c eet ay 34 3 3 5 Setting Up the Calibration Gas Inlet Ports sssssssseeee nennen emere 35 3 9 6 Default Gas TYPOS cot rei b aee deba a eeu ed luted EA iene 35 Z3 User Defined Gas Types zin ee d eto Eee e DE LU dee ERE Dr ee ec estais 35 3 3 7 1 User Defined Gas Types 35 3 3 7 2 User Defined Gas Types Defining the Gas Name 36 3 3 7 3 User Defined Gas Types Setting the MOLAR 37 3 3 7 4 Enabling and Disabling Gas Types ssssssseseeeeeene ene meenenneneenen nnn 38 3 3 8 Defining Calibration Source Gas Cylinders sssssssesee eee enne 39 3 3 8 1 Setting Up the Ports with Single Gas 39 3 3 8 2 Setting Up the Ports with Multiple Gas Cylinders sss 41 3 3 9 Selecting an Operating Mode the Generator eene eene 42 319 91 CNS T GONS T AINE te e i PRODR ete duin aid 42 39 3 9 2 REF REEBRENGE ppc paene eu tud ient 42 BNGEDI BENGED DUE Ote iua n ite 42
120. C Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes sssssssee em emm nens 249 Table 11 9 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ssssssssssssssssssese eee nennen enn nnne 250 Table 11 10 Relay PCA Control Devices nemen nnn en nennen nennen nennen 251 Table 11 11 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Voltage 255 Table 11 12 Status Outputs Check 255 Table 11 13 M700E Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions 256 Table 11 14 Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I O Functions Check 257 Table 12 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities sssssssee mem 267 Table 12 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD sse eme 268 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION APPENDIX A 1 M700E Software Menu Trees Revision B 7 APPENDIX A 2 M700E Setup Variables Available Via Serial 1 0 Revision B 7 APPENDIX A 3 M700E Warnings and Test Measurements via Serial I O Revision B 7 APPENDIX A 4 M700E Signal I O Definitions Revision B 7 APPENDIX A 5 Model M700E Terminal Command Designators Revision B 7 APPENDIX B M700E SPARE PARTS LIST APPENDIX C RE
121. CN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 4 9 PHOTOMETER O GENERATOR PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY This assembly is only present in calibrators with O3 generator and or photometer options installed The pressure flow sensor PCA located at the rear of the instrument between the generator and the photometer pump see Figure 3 4 can be checked with a Voltmeter The following procedure assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard as well as the power supplies are operating properly BASIC PCA OPERATION e Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad e Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP1 C1 it should be 10 VDC 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR 1 Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter 2 Measure the voltage across TP4 and 1 e The expected value for this signal should be Pressure Expected mVDC X 4660mvoc 250moc 10 30 0in Hg A g EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 20 In Hg A the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1 would be between 2870 mVDC and 3510 mVDC EXAMPLE If the measured pressure is 25 In Hg A the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1 would be between 3533 mVDC and 4318 mVDC e If this voltage is out of range then either pressure transducer 51 is bad the board is b
122. Control Inputs Serial No Tag Connector Outlets Cal Gas Vent Switch Figure 3 2 M700E Rear Panel Layout 5622 REV B 12 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started Gas Inlets amp Outlets Power J b Motherboard gus 4 Back Panel CPU PCA Ethernet PCA installed here not Shown Relay PCA DC Power supplies u INPUT GAS Cal Gas PRESSURE Mass Flow Controller SENSOR Diluent Mass Flow Controller ON OFF Switch Front Panel Figure 3 3 M700E Internal Layout Top View Base Unit 05622 REV B 13 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Ethernet PCA Gas Inlets amp Outlets AC Power installed here Connector not Shown Photometer Pump Motherboard Back Panel CPU PCA Relay PCA O Generator amp Photometer Pressure Flow Sensor PCA O Generator Pressure Regulator Generator N Assembly DC Power Photometer supplies MIR Valve GPT O Generator Chamber Lamp Driver GPT Valve ON OFF Switch Front Panel Input Gas Optional 2nd Cal Gas Diluent Pressure Cal Gas Mass Flow Mass Flow Sensor Mass Flow Controller Controller PCA Controller Figure 3 4 M700E Internal Layout Top View with Optional Generator and Photometer 14 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169
123. D DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 2 5 2 Connecting the M700E Calibrator to a Sample Gas Manifold Use this setup when connecting the M700E calibrator to an analyzer network using a sample manifold In this case the sampling cane and the manifold itself act as the vent for the M700E SAMPLING CANE FILTER SCREEN BLOWER PUMP SAMPLE MANIFOLD ROOF VENT TO OUTSIDE OF ROOM ISLS TEE H20 TRAP M700E output flowrate 9 1m Hi Sample Inlet must be 10 SLPM or greater than the Total Flow requirements of the entire system Teledyne I nstruments whichever is higher E Series Gas Analyzer Minimum O D of this gas line must be 3 8inch Seer o gt I Sample Inlet Teledyne I nstruments E Series Gas Analyzer Mass Flow DILUENT IN Calibrator I VENT amp extra CAL OUT Teledyne Instruments gas outlets MODEL 701 MUST be capped Zero Gas Generator CAL SOURCE GAS Figure 3 12 Set up for M700E Connecting the M700E to a Sample Manifold NOTES This is the recommended method for connecting the M700E calibrator to a system with analyzers that DO NOT have internal zero span valves The manifolds as shown the above drawing are oriented to simplify the drawing Their actual orientation in your set up is with the ports facing upward All unused ports must be capped When initiating calibration wait a
124. D work area 2 Carry the still sealed ant ESD bag tube or bin to the anti ESD work area 3 Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12 4 2 3 above when opening the anti ESD container at the work station 4 Reserve the anti ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne API 272 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 12 4 2 5 Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API s Customer Service Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne API s Customer Service in anti ESD bins tubes or bags WARNING e DO NOT use pink poly bags NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic component assembly directly e This includes but is not limited to plastic bubble pack Styrofoam peanuts open cell foam closed cell foam and adhesive tape e DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer Use ONLY anti ESD tape 1 Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin 2 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate e f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In ei
125. DEL EDIT EXIT 05622 REV B DCN 5169 105 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 4 The PURGE Step This step places the M700E into PURGE mode At the end of the programming sequence the 7 firmware will automatically insert DURATION step that needs to be defined To insert a PURGE step into a sequence press Starling at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions INSERT STEP PURGE ENTR EXIT DURATION 1 0 MIN ENTR EXIT 0 0 1 0 4 Toggle these keys to set DURATION of this step 6 5 2 5 The STANDBY Step The STANDBY step places the M700E into STANDBY mode It is recommended but not required to follow this with a DURATION step To insert STANDBY step into a sequence press Starting at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP INSERT STEP GENERATE ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scrall though the list of available instructions INSERT STEP STANDBY ENTR EXIT 106 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 2 6 The DURATION S
126. DYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Chassis DILUENT INLET CAL GAS 1 ie INLET CAL GAS 2 INLET INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL GAS 3 INLET CAL GAS 4 INLET TT GAS IMPUT MANIFOLD fen beck pana PRESSURE SENSOR Prosa DILUENT Cal GAS FRESSURE SENSOR Cal Gat Mats Controllar d Flow Contirollar 1 E 00 55 YOLVYANAD Flow Control LPR PHOTOMETER BENCH Me GAS IMPUT PRESSURE SENSOR me or OTOMETER 92 PRESSURE SENSOR O GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR jquiessy O 1800 Flow m 1 INTE RHAL WENT 1 E ITA hic A NEC i gt PHOTOMETER 1 INLET RERMEAS W vi I 1 1 1 1 ZERO IM iver PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS oureuT 1 CAL GAS OUTPUT lt VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 6 8 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when in GPTPS Mode 05622 REV B DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 87 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s M
127. E M700E CALIBRATOR Information and instructions for interacting with the M7OOE calibrator via its several remote interface options e g via RS 232 Ethernet its built in digital control inputs outputs etc M700E VALIDATION AND VERIFICATION Methods and procedures for validating and verifying the correct operation of your M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator 4 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Introduction SECTION Ill TECHNICAL INFORMATION THEORY OF OPERATION An in depth look at the various principals by which your calibrator operates as well as a description of how the various electronic mechanical and pneumatic components of the calibrator work and interact with each other A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the calibrator s operation MAINTENANCE SHEDULE AND PROCEDURES Description of preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on your calibrator to assure good operating condition GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR OF THE M700E CALIBRATOR This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the calibrator and the Terminus as well as instructions on performing repairs on the Terminus A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is a significant concern and how to avoid it This section also describes how to a
128. ETUP FOR CALIBRATION OF THE O PHOTOMETER NOTE This procedure requires external sources for zero air and O as an external reference photometer Calibrating the M700E calibrator s optional internal photometer requires a different set up than that used during the normal operation of the calibrator There are two ways to make the connections between these instruments and the M700E calibrator 8 3 3 1 Setup Using Direct Connections Figure 8 3 shows the external zero air sources as well as the reference photometer connected directly to the fixtures on the back of the M700E Calibrator External Zero Air Source REFERENCE PHOTOMETER External Source Vent line Max Lengthez3 meters or 10 feet PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET Capped Vent line PHOTOMETER ZERO IN Max Length 3 meters or 10 feet PHOTOMETER ZERO canned Vent line EXHAUST Max Length 3 meters or 10 feet L Calibration e VENT L Source Gas CAL connections pi CAL GUT as shown in E If the gas flow on this Section 3 2 M700E line is 5 SLPM the minimum O D must be 3 8 inch LODILUENTIN Calibrator CAL OUT gas outlet connections to manifolds instruments Figure 8 3 External Photometer Validation Setup Direct Connections NOTE A Minimum of 1 1 LPM is required for the external zero air source 172 5
129. EXT Use the NEXT until SETUP Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types as programmed during initial setup INSERT STEP MANUAL ENTR EXIT CAL GAS TYPEZERO ENTR EXIT Continue pressing this key until the desired gas type appears SETUP X X CAL GAS 502 S02 ENTR EXIT SETUPX X GAL GAS FLOW 0 000 LPM 3 D ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to 5 set the target GAS row SETUP DILUENT GAS FLOW 0 000 LPM 8 n 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to setthe target concentration SETUP X X This Key Turns the the Generator 2 This key sets CONSTANT drive voltage for the Generator SETUP XX GEN SET POINT 0 0 MV 0 0 n D P Toggle these keys to setthe ENTR EXIT O3 GEN MODE OFF OFF CNST REF BNCH ENTR EXIT These keys set a target concentration for the Generator SETUP XX 0 0 Toggle these keys to set output CONCENTRATION of the generato EXIT discards the new flow rate ENTR accepts the new gas flow rater gt REF The concentration control loop will use the generator s reference detector as input BNCH The concentration control loop will use the photometer bench GEN SET POINT 000 0 PPB 0 0 aH ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new CONSTANT drive setting voltage of the generator ENTR accepts the STANDBY LEVEL 0 new
130. F SWITCH STATUS LED s Figure 9 10 M700E Front Panel Layout The most commonly used method for communicating with the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is via the instrument s front panel which includes a set of three status LEDs a vacuum florescent display and a keyboard with 8 context sensitive keys 9 4 1 1 Calibrator Status LEDs Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instruments basic operating status Table 9 2 Front Panel Status LEDs Name Bovio F Displays Warning niti N A messages Test initial start up the various warning messages will appear Function values ere Mode Field Instrument is in STANDBY mode STATUS LEDs Unit is operating in STANDBY mode Active Green OFF This LED glows green when the instrument is actively producing calibration gas This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems Fault BLINKING are not yet operating within their optimum ranges Various warning messages will appear 05622 REV B 209 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 4 1 2 Keyboard A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display see Figure 9 10 is the main method by which the user interacts with the calibrator As the software is operated labels appear on the bottom row of the di
131. G THE ETHERNET INTERFACE OPTION USING DHCP The Ethernet option for you M70OE uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to configure its interface with your LAN automatically This requires your network servers also be running DHCP The calibrator will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network Once the instrument is connected and turned on it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra set up steps or lengthy procedures NOTE It is a good idea to check the INET settings the first time you power up your calibrator after it has been physically connected to the LAN Internet to ensure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate information from you network server s The Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the calibrator s front panel 05622 REV B 159 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 7 5 LAN Internet Configuration Properties PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF DHCP STATUS On Editable EDIT key INSTRUMENT Configured by This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g IP ADDRESS DHCP 192 168 76 55 is the address of the calibrator itself DHCP is ON EDIT key A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument
132. GASrow source gas flow rate EXAMPLE e A target concentration of 200 ppm of SO is needed e The Concentration of the SO Source is 600 ppm e The requirement of the system are 9 000 LPM e The required source gas flow rate would be GAStow 200 ppm 9 000 LPM 600 ppm GAStow 1800 000 ppm LPM 600 ppm 3 000 LPM 05622 REV B 79 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 4 3 2 Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate To determine the required flow rate of the diluent gas use the following formula Equation 6 2 Totalflow GAS fow WHERE GASrow source gas flow rate from Equation 6 1 Totalflow total gas flow requirements of the system required diluent gas flow EXAMPLE e Ifthe requirement of the system is 9 000 LPM e The source gas flow rate is set at 3 00 LPM e The required source gas flow rate would be 9 0 LPM 3 0 LPM DiLiow 6 0 LPM 6 4 3 3 Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate with the Optional Generator Installed If the optional generator is installed and in use Equation 6 2 will be slightly different since the is a constant value and is displayed as a TEST function on the M700E s front panel A typical value for is 105 cm min Equation 6 3 DlLgo Totalflow WHERE GASrow source gas flow rate from Equation 6 1
133. GPT GPTPS amp MANUAL 134 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 11 5 1 Creating a GENERATE LEVEL To create a LEVEL using the M700E s AUTO generation function press Toggle these keys to set the target concentration Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM Toggle these keys until the designation of the existing defined level program is reached Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu CHOOSE ACTION Submenu ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR SETUP X X GENERATE ZERO ZEROENTR EXIT Continue pressing this key until the desired gas type appears SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB CO2 0 0 0 0 PPB CO2 ENTR EXIT Pd SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB CO2 0 0 0 0 PCT CO2 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new gas flow rate LEVEL 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types as programmed during initial setup Toggle this key to to scroll through the available units of measure EXIT discards the new flow rate EXIT discards the new LEVEL number ENTR accepts the new LEVEL number 05622 REV B DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 135 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 11 5 2 Creating a G
134. Hydrogen Sulfide in Nitrogen 2731 Hydrogen Sulfide in Nitrogen 20 ppm Table 3 7 NIST Standards for CH Substance Table 3 8 NIST Standards for O2 Description Nominal Amount of Substance 2657a Oxygen in Nitrogen 2 2658a Oxygen in Nitrogen 10 96 2659a Oxygen in Nitrogen 21 96 05622 REV B 23 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 3 9 NIST Standards for SO E Nominal Amount of Description substance 1661a Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen 500 1662a Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen 1000 ppm Table 3 10 NIST Standards for NO IER Substance Table 3 11 NIST Standards for Propane Description Nominal Amount of Substance 24 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 2 2 2 Minimum Calibration Gas Source Concentration Determining minimum Cal Gas Concentration to determine the minimum concentration of a calibration gas required by your system 1 Determine the Total Flow required by your system by adding the gas flow requirement of each of the analyzers in the system Multiply this by 1 5 Decide on a Calibration Gas flow rate Determine the Calibration Gas ratio by divide the Total Flow by the Calibration Gas Flow Rate Multiply the desired target calibration gas concentrat
135. I O deed e d WR tC E BE edge Pes 207 03 5 5 C Data BUS aco aos ooo os Sapa tiva tU dd dee ra tec 207 973 5 AN POWer Up cie d e ED et am Ada eee at erede dete ud 207 9 3 0 Input Gas Pressure Sensor PCA ce E aire edi e eee dee reda 207 9 3 7 Power Supply and Circuit Breaker ciiai ae erret en nn nnnm 208 9 4 Front Panel et pce tede tene ED E 209 9 4 1 1 Calibrator Status 05 nn iei 209 9 412 Keyboard rie e PROP eR DI EP 210 9 4 1 9 DISplay i Aem N E meine eina 210 9 4 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface Electronics sssssseeem emen 210 9 5 Software Operation dcc e ee ec es ep ep eeu edes ee ed bee atu He uie eee ed 212 9 6 03 rel rt reo nt re et 213 9 6 1 Principle of Photolitic Generation 213 9 6 2 Generator Pneumatic Operation cccccccccceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeeeeeeesesencaeaeeeeeeeeeeseccicaeeeeeeees 214 9 6 3 Og Generator Electronic Operation 215 9 6 3 1 Generator Temperature Control ccccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeeeeeeeneess 216 9 6 3 2 Pneumatic Sensor for the Generator ssse
136. ION Submenu information PREV 0 11 CONTROL IN 1 THRU 12 12 23 CONTROL_OUT_1 THRU 12 NONE 24 ST_SYSTEM_OK AOUTS CALIBRATED AIN CALIBRATED p ST CAL ACTIVE PHOTO MEAS 26 ST_DIAG_MODE CAL CAL PHOTO REF 27 ST_TEMP_ALARM GEN REF 28 ST PRESS ALARM 29 PERM VALVE 1 30 PERM HTR 1 31 VENT VALVE 32 RELAY WATCHDOG 33 GPT VALVE 34 PHOTO REF VALVE 35 O3 GEN VALVE 36 PUMP ON 37 OUTPUT VALVE A 38 OUTPUT VALVE B 39 PHOTO LAMP HEATER 40 GEN HEATER 41 VALVE WATCHDOG 42 VALVE 1 43 CYL VALVE 2 44 VALVE 3 45 CYL VALVE 4 46 PURGE VALVE 47 INPUT VALVE 48 MAINT MODE 49 LANG2 SELECT 50 SEQUENCE LED 51 AUTO TIMER LED 52 FAULT LED 53 AUDIBLE BEEPER SAMPLE PRESSURE zero and span points SAMPLE TEMP PHOTO LAMP TEMP O3 LAMP TEMP CHASSIS TEMP RANGE OVER REC AUTO CALIBRATED 03 PHOTO CONG RANGE OFFSET CAL Initiates auto calibration of all analog outputs EDIT ON Sets a voltage CAL offset for the OFF output 1 Auto Cal Manual Caf Initiates auto calibration 1V 5V 10V of the selected analog input U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 1 Only occurs if one of the voltage ranges is selected 54 INTERNAL ANALOG Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the AUTO CAL feature is OFF for the selected output or the RANGE is set for CURRent to VOLTAGE SIGNALS ON 3 Only appears if optional photometer bench is
137. IST D beteen Continue pressing SET until existing sequences STEPS Submenu SETUP X X STEPS 1 SET SET EDIT SETUP X X 1 STANDBY PREV NEXT INS DEL EXIT Deletes the Use these keys instruction to scroll though existing instructions p gt To add an isntruction press next until END OF STEPS PREV INS EXIT SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT shown in the message field 102 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 2 1 The GENERATE Step This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE gt AUTO At the end of the programming sequence the M700E firmware will automatically insert a DURATION step that needs to be defined To insert a GENERATE step into a sequence press Starting at the INSERT STEPS Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X GENERATE ZERO ZERO ENTR EXIT SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB 502 b b b 0 PPB 502 ENTR EXIT Continue pressing this key until the desired gas type appears SETUP X X GENERATE 0 0 PPB Coz D 0 D PPB 2 ENTR EXIT SETUP GENERATE 0 0 PPB 2 oO D D PCT CO2 ENTR EXIT wx Toggle these keys to set the target concentraten SETUP X X TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM D 2 D D ENTR EXIT Pd Toggle these keys to set EE the tar
138. IV 0 0 1 generator bench PID derivative coefficient DRIVE_STABIL mV 1 Os generator drive stability limit to update concentration cache l 2 2 LAMP CYCLE Seconds Os generator lamp temperature control cycle period O3 LAMP PROP 1 DegC 0 1 Os generator lamp temperature PID proportional coefficient LAMP INTEG Gain 0 1 Os generator lamp temperature PID integral coefficient LAMP DERIV Gain 0 10 Os generator lamp temperature PID derivative coefficient MFC PRESS LIMIT PSIG 5 pressure warning limits Set Warnings point not important 15 36 REG PRESS LIM PSIG 20 Regulator pressure warning Warnings limits Set point not important 15 25 PERM SET1 Permeation tube 1 temperature Warnings set point and warning limits 49 51 PERM SET2 Permeation tube 2 temperature set point and warning limits Warnings 49 51 TARGET_FLOW Lom 2 Default total output flow rate if actions or steps RS232_MODE BitFlag 0 65535 RS 232 COM1 mode flags Add values to combine flags 1 quiet mode 2 computer mode 4 enable security 8 enable hardware handshaking 32 enable multi drop 64 enable modem 128 ignore RS 232 line errors 256 disable XON XOFF support 512 disable hardware FIFOs 1024 enable RS 485 mode 2048 even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit 4096 enable command prompt 8192 even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 05623 Rev DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 13 CACHE_RESOL gen
139. In order to provide security for remote access of the M700E a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE Mode 4 Section 7 1 4 Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled the following items apply e password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands e fthe port is inactive for one hour it will automatically logoff which can also be achieved with the LOGOFF command e Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour even if the correct password is used e not logged on the only active command is the request for the help screen e The following messages will be returned at logon e LOGON SUCCESSFUL Correct password given e LOGON FAILED Password not given or incorrect e LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL Connection terminated successfully To log on to the M700E calibrator with SECURITY MODE feature enabled type LOGON 940331 940331 is the default password To change the default password use the variable RS8232 PASS issued as follows V RS232_PASS NNNNNN Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9 152 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 2 REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM The M700E can be connected to a modem for remote access This requires a cab
140. LED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 4 3 GENERATE gt MAN Generating Calibration Mixtures Manually This mode provides complete the user with more complete control of the gas mixture process Unlike the AUTO mode MAN mode requires the user set the both the component gas flow rate and diluent airflow rate This allows the user control over the mixing ratio and total calibration gas flow rate In addition if the M7OOE calibrator is equipped with the optional generator and to be included in the calibration mixture e g using the GPT or GPTPS features the user also needs to set the ozone generator mode and set point The TOTAL FLOW is defined by the user depending on system requirements NOTE e The minimum total flow should equal 150 of the flow requirements of all of the instruments to which the M700E will be supplying calibration gas e Example If the M700E is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures simultaneously to a system in composed of three analyzers each requiring 2 LPM the proper Total Flow output should be set at 2 2 2 x 1 5 9 000 LPM 6 4 3 1 Determining the Source Gas Flow Rate To determine the required flow rate of the component source gas use the following formula Equation 6 1 C x Totalflow GAS fow 1 WHERE C target concentration of diluted gas Cj concentration of the source gas
141. LEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E CN3 amp CN4 Located on CPU card CTS RXD GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 7 2 Default Pin Assignments for CPU COMM Port Connector RS 232 Teledyne API offers two mating cables one of which should be applicable for your use e P N WR000077 a DB 9 female to DB 9 female cable 6 feet long Allows connection of the serial ports of most personal computers Also available as Option 60B see Section 5 6 1 e P N WR000024 a DB 9 female to DB 25 male cable Allows connection to the most common styles of modems e g Hayes compatible and code activated switches Also available as Option 60A see Section 5 6 1 Both cables are configured with straight through wiring and should require no additional adapters NOTE Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin assignments before using To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem there are activity indicators just above the RS 232 port Once a cable is connected between the calibrator and a computer or modem both the red and green LEDs should be on If the lights are not lit use small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes If both LEDs are still not illum
142. LFLOW O3GENREF O3GENFLOW O3GENDRIVE O3GENTEMP CALPRESS DILPRESS REGPRESS ACTCONC TARGCONC BOXTEMP PERMTEMP1 PERMTEMP2 PERMFLOW PHOTOMEAS PHOTOREF PHOTOFLOW PHOTOLTEMP PHOTOSPRESS PHOTOSTEMP PHOTOSLOPE PHOTOOFFSET PHOTOSTABIL TESTCHAN CLOCKTIME FLOW 0 1050 LPM generator flow rate Note this is simply a constant specified by the GEN FLOW variable computed from real time inputs PERM FLOW 0 1050 LPM Permeation tube flow rate This is a property of the permeation tube SETUP GAS PERM Its value depends on which permeation tube is in use PHOTO STEMP 31 8 C Photometer sample temperature PHOTO SLOPE 1 000 Photometer slope computed during zero span bench calibration PHOTO OFFSET 0 0 PPB Photometer offset computed during zero span bench calibration PHOTO STABIL 0 1 PPB Photometer concentration stability standard deviation of 25 bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds apart TEST 2753 9 MV Value output to TEST OUTPUT analog output selected with TEST CHAN ID variable TIME 14 48 01 Current instrument time of day clock PHOTO SPRESS 29 9 IN HG A Photometer sample pressure The name is used to request a message via the RS 232 interface as in T BOXTEMP Os photometer stability measurement option Dual permeation tube option MFCs Pg A 20 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Funct
143. M 100 100 JFET 140 7000 SAW 150 500 Op AMP 190 2500 CMOS 200 3000 Schottky Diodes 300 2500 Film Resistors 300 3000 This Film Resistors 300 7000 ECL 500 500 SCR 500 1000 Schottky TTL 500 2500 Potentially damaging electro static discharges can occur e Anytime a charged surface including the human body discharges to a device Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage A similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object such as a metallic tool or fixture e When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface such as packaging materials work surfaces machine surfaces or other device In some cases charged device discharges can be the most destructive e Atypical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function If the assembly is carrying a static charge as itis connected to ground a discharge will occur e Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro static field a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferre
144. M700E Calibrator NOTE It is generally a good idea to end each calibration sequence with a PURGE instruction followed by an instruction to return the instrument to STANDBY mode Even if a PURGE is not included the last instruction in a sequence should always be an instruction placing the M700E into STANDBY mode To create a sequence use the instructions in the following sections to name the sequence set its associated parameters and define the steps to be included 6 5 1 1 Activating a Sequence from the M700E Front Panel To activate an already programmed sequence from the front panel press Make sure that STANDBY ACT CAL 0 000LPM the M7OOE is in TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP STANDBY mode STANDBY EXECUTE SEQUENCE A1 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use these keys to Sas scroll though the list of available sequences 1 M7TOOE begins to execute sequence Progress of sequence Progress Field ACT CAL 0 000LPM reported here in the format chosen during TST TST GEN STBY SEQ SETUP sequence entry E M7OOE returns to remains in mode set by last sequence instruction 05622 REV B 93 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 1 2 Naming a Sequence The first step of creating a calibration sequence is to assign ita name The name can be up to 10 characters and can be comprised of any alpha character A to
145. MEXT until Toggle these keys ta enter ihe correct PASSWORD gt CONFIGURATION PREY NEST ENTR LPM SET SET EDIT EXIT Toggle these keys ta 1 choose a mass flaw controller ta calibrate DILG CALA OR DILID DRV Q FLW 0 000 CAL2 PREV NEXT DRIV FLOW OFF EXIT LLL Ifthe MFG is OFF use this key to turn it OH P Toggle these keys scroll through the 20 calibratian points Take reading of MFC output with external flaw meter Flaw is within 125 of expected value ihe accuracy af the flow meters Move to next Yas Cal Point EXAMPLE No DILI DRV 1250 FLW 2 500 PREY NEXT DRM FLOW ON EXIT Press this key ta view edit the target flow rate fer this cal point E DIL FLOWT2 2 900 LPM E D ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys Ex setling to match the flow measured with the external meter ENTR accepts the setting 7 DILi S DRV 1250 FLW 2 650 PREV NEXT DRIV FLOW ON EXIT J Move to next Cal Paint Once all of Ihe cal points have been checked adjusted DILI DRV 1250 FLW 2 650 PREY NEXT DRIV FLOW ON EXIT SAVE CHANGES YER NO CANC YES saves all changes made cee returns to last cal point ignores all changes made displayed 05622 REV B 169 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and
146. MODE BAUD RATE TEST 2 O3_CONC_RANGE Value PPB Toggle these keys to set the M700E s ID code PORT 03 PHOTO 4 STD_TEMP Value DegC 5 STD_PRESS Value In Hg QUIET TEST 6 CLOCK_ADJ HH MM SS ENTER PASSWORD 818 COMPUTER SECURITY E 7 1 RS 485 MULTIDROP PROTOCOL ENABLE MODEM ERROR CHECKING XON XOFF HANDSHAKE See SECONDARY SETUP Menu DIAG Submenu P 24 31 PSIG SETUP DIL1 F 1 980 1 950 EXIT PREV NEXT HARDWARE HANDSHAKE Toggle these keys to cycle 1 DIAG Menu is inactive while through statistical displays for instrument Is In HARDWARE FIFO 9 play COMMAND PROMPT ON SETUP X X TARGET FLOW 2 000 Lpm OFF 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL gas flow output rate for the calibrator Figure A 6 SECONDARY SETUP Menu Basic Pg A 8 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 MAIN MENU SETUP MORE DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 818 PREV NEXT SIGNALVo ANALOG ANALOG I O FLOW MFG PRESSURE AUTO LEAK TEST CHAN OUTPUT CONFIGURATION CALIBRATION CALIBRATION CALIBRATION CALIBRATION CHECK OUTPUT ENTR m Initiates Internal leak check m ress lt SET SET gt See SECONDARY SETUP Menu See Chapter 11 for more PREV NEXT _ DIAG CALIBRAT
147. MSG CLR SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE SYSTEM PASSWORD ENABLE OFF Toggle this OFF ENTR EXIT button to enable disable password feasture 2 SETUP PASSWORD ENABLE ON EXIT discards the new ON ENTR EXIT setting ENTR accepts the new setting JF 05622 REV B 115 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Example If all passwords are enabled the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the VARS or DIAG submenus STANDBY ACT CAL 0 000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW VARS DIAG Press individual keys to set ENTR EXIT number ENTER SETUP PASS 0 EXAMPLE This password enables the 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP mode NOTE The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus even if passwords are disabled but it displays the default password 818 upon entering these menus The user only has to press ENTR to access the password protected menus but does not have to enter the required number code 5622 REV B 116 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 9 SETUP gt DIAG gt TEST CHAN OUTPUT USING THE TEST CHANNEL
148. NAME The HOSTNAME is the name by which the calibrator appears on your network The default name for all Teledyne API s M70OE calibrators is M700E To change this name particularly if you have more than one M700E calibrator on your network press e m m w lt wn rm o SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT FUNCTION Moves the cursor one character to the left Moves the cursor one character to the right Inserts a character before the cursor location Deletes a character at the cursor location Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion 0 9 A Z space amp _ lt gt 7 Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu Some keys only appear as needed SETUP X X INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORDCB18 amp 1 amp ENTR EXIT SETUP X X DHCP ON SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until SETUP X X HOSTNAME M7DDE SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X HOSTNAME M7DDE CH CH INS DEL 7 ENTR EXIT Use these key to editthe HOSTNAME SETUP X X HOSTNAME M7DDE Site 1 CH CH gt INS DEL 7 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting gt SETUP X X INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALI
149. NCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 4 3 5 Performing an Automatic Calibration of the Optional Generator NOTE This procedure requires that the M700E calibrator have an optional photometer installed To run the automatic generator calibration program press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR PC Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until GEN CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR GEN CALIBRATION CAL O3 GEN CAL 0 COMPLETE EXIT Test runs automatically O3 GEN CAL 100 COMPLETE PNTS EXIT aborts the calibration 184 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Calibration and Verification 8 5 M700E GAS PRESSURE SENSOR CALIBRATION NOTE The procedures described in this section require a separate pressure meter monitor The M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator has several sensors that monitor the pressure of the gases flowing through the instrument The data collected by these sensors is used to compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU s memory as various test functions Table 8 2 M700E Pre
150. NECTOR REAR PANEL 10 PIN CN0000640 CONNECTOR REAR PANEL 14 PIN DS0000025 DISPLAY E SERIES KB FM0000004 FLOWMETER KB FM0000007 REGULATOR PRESSURE 0 30PSI KB FT0000013 CONNECTOR M T 1 8 KB FT0000036 TEE TTT SS 1 4 HK FT0000040 UNION BULKHEAD SS 1 4 HK FT0000056 TEE TTT SS 1 8 HK FT0000085 PORT CONNECTOR SS 1 4 HK FT0000134 BLKHD UNION REDUCING SS 1 4 1 8 HK FT0000151 UNION CROSS TFE 2 1 4 2 1 8 KB FT0000192 ELBOW B 1 8 X 1 4 TUBING M400A FEMALE COUPLING 10 32 BRASS HEX EXTENSION B 10 32 M F PORT CONNECTOR SS 1 8 HK FITTING PHOTOMETER FLOW 13 MIL FT0000332 FITTING 9 MIL ZERO AIR FLOW FT0000364 003 ORIFICE 10 32 X 10 32 W ORING BRA HW0000005 FOOT HW0000120 SHOCKMOUNT GROMMET ISOLATOR GROMMET QUICK RELEASE PLUNGER QUICK RELEASE SEALING WASHER 10 CLAMP NYLON LOOP 5 8 WHITE HW0000327 HEATSINK CLIP TO 220 HW0000328 INSULATING THERMAL PAD TO 220 HW0000356 PAD THERMAL TO 220 W ADHV KIT000253 ASSY amp TEST SPARE PS37 E SERIES KIT UV LAMP P S PCA 041660100 KIT UV LAMP P S PCA 041660500 LAMP WINDOW OPTICAL BENCH WINDOW OPTICAL BENCH amp OZONE GEN FEEDBACK ORING SAMPLE FLOW amp OZONE GENERATOR 05735H M700E Spare Parts List DCN5356 Page 2 of 3 04 15 09 M700E Spare Parts List Part
151. Number ORING ABSORPTION TUBE ORING OPTICAL BENCH amp OZONE GEN FEEDBACK ORING 2 019V ORING OZONE GEN UV LAMP ORING 2 018V OR0000089 ORING OPTICAL BENCH PS0000039 PS SWITCHING 12V 7 5A KB PS0000040 PS EXT AC DC 90 264V 47 63HZ 12V 3 75A SW0000051 SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER WR0000008 POWER CORD 10A 05735H M700E Spare Parts List DCN5356 Page 3 of 3 04 15 09 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Model M700E Calibrator Warranty Repair oo TELEDYNE Operator s Manual Questionnaire anced Pollution Instrumentation od el 700 E A Teledyne Technologies Company CUSTOMER PHONE CONTACT NAME FAX NO SITE ADDRESS MODEL TYPE SERIAL NO FIRMWARE REVISION Are there any failure messages Continue on back if necessary PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE PARAMETER RECORDED VALUE ACCEPTABLE VALUE ACT CAL LPM TARG CAL x 196 TARG CAL LPM 0 001 0 100LPM ACT DIL LPM TARG DIL 196 TARG DIL LPM 0 01 10LPM GEN REF mV 0 5000mV FLOW LPM 0 100 0 025LPM GEN DRIVE nu 0 5000mV 03 LAMP TEMP 48 1 C CAL PRESSURE PSI 25 35PSI DIL PRESSURE PSI 25 35PSI REG PRESSURE PSI 20 1PSI ACT TARG x 196 TARG BOX TEMP AMBIENT 5 C PERM TUBE 1 TEMP 50 1 PERM FL
152. O output can be easily and reliably varied by simply changing the concentration EXAMPLE e Calibration values of NO from 200 ppb to 450 ppb will be needed e The NO gas input concentration should be no lower than 495 ppb and can be as high as 900 ppb 82 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 4 4 3 Determining the TOTAL FLOW for GPT Calibration Mixtures The total flow rate is defined by the user depending on system requirements The minimum total flow should equal 150 of the flow requirements of all of the instruments to which the M700E will be supplying calibration gas EXAMPLE e If the 7 is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures simultaneously to a system in composed of three analyzers each requiring 2 LPM the proper Total Flow output should be set at e 2 2 2 1 5 9 000 LPM It is not recommended to set any flow rate to lt 10 or gt 100 of the full scale rating of that associated mass flow controller FOR M700E S WITH MULTIPLE CALIBRATIONS MASS FLOW CONTROLLERS INSTALLED The full combined flow potential of both mass flow controllers is available to use with the following limits The limits are lt 10 of the lowest rated MFC or gt 100 of the combined full scale ratings for both mass flow controllers The M700E will automatically select the
153. O signal D ID LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests ENTER name Execute diagnostic test EXIT Exit diagnostic test RESET DATA CONFIG exitcode Reset instrument LIST Print setup variables name value warn low warn high Modify variable name value Modify enumerated variable V ID CONFIG Print instrument configuration MAINT ON OFF Enter exit maintenance mode MODE Print current instrument mode The command syntax follows the command type separated by a space character Strings in brackets are optional designators The following key assignments also apply Table A 6 Terminal Key Assignments Revision D 1 TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS ESC Abort line CR ENTER Execute command Ctrl C Switch to computer mode COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS LF line feed Execute command Ctrl T Switch to terminal mode 05623 Rev DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 25 APPENDIX A 5 Terminal Command Designators Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Pg A 26 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Model 700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX B M700E Spare Parts List APPENDIX B M700E Spare Parts List NOTE Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by API may result in non compliance with European standard EN 61010 1 e 05735 Spare Parts List M700E 05624 Rev A Pg B 1 APPENDIX M700E Spare Parts List Mo
154. OCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 10 Deleting or Editing an Individual Step in a Sequence To delete or edit an individual step in an existing Sequence press Make sure that the is in standby GEN STBY SEQ SETUP mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EBIT PRINT EXIT 1 SEQ NAME XT STEPS INS DEL EDIT Scrolls back and forth between existing sequences SETUP X X 0 SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until STEPS Submenu SETUP X X STEPS 12 SET SET EDIT SETUP X X 1 STANDBY PREV NEXT INS DEL EXIT Continue pressing NEXT or PREY until until step to be deleted appears SETUP T PURGE PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT Follow the instructions for the step being SETUP X X DELETE STEP edited YES NO SETUP T DURATION 10 0 MIN PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT If the step deleted was GENERATE MANUAL or PURGE delete the following duration step 110 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 3 DELETING A SEQUENCE To delete a sequence from the M700E calibrator s memory press Make sure that the M700E GEN STBY SEQ SETUP is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQ
155. OR VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION OF THE M700E S MFC S NOTE A separate flow meter is required for the procedure 1 Turn off the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator 2 Open the front panel to the M700E calibrator This is the easiest access to the MFC output ports e Alocking screw located at the top center of the front panel See Figure 3 1 must be removed before the panel can be opened 3 Attach the flow meter directly to the output port of the MFC to be checked tested GPT tG Chamber Pressure Sensor PCA GPT Valve Front Panel Outlet Port for Outlet Port for Outlet Port for Optional 2nd Cal Gas Cal Gas Diluent ON OFF Mass Flow Controller Mass Flow Controller Mass Flow Controller Switch Figure 8 1 Location of MFC Outlet Ports 4 Turn the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator ON 168 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Calibration and Verification 8 2 2 VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE M700E S MFC S Once the external flow meter is connected to the output of the MFC being verified calibrated perform the following steps Make sure that the is in standby mode GEM STBY SEQ An external flow PRIMARY SETUP MENU meter is needed to perform this operation MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD Continue pressing
156. OW CC MIN 0 100 0 025LPM PHOTO MEASURE mV 2500 4800mV PHOTO REFERENCE mV 2500 4800mV PHOTO FLOW CC MIN 0 720 0 880LPM PHOTO LAMP TEMP 58 1 C PHOTO SPRESS IN HG A AMBIENT x 1 IN HG A PHOTO STEMP AMBIENT 3 PHOTO SLOPE 0 85 1 15 PHOTO OFFSET PPB 10 PPB Depending on options installed not all test parameters shown below will be available in your calibrator If ozone generator option installed If photometer option installed 3 if permeation tube installed TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL api customerservice teledyne com PHONE 858 657 9800 TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 FAX 858 657 9816 05625 Rev A C 1 Model M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Warranty Repair Questionnaire Model 700E mm TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Advanced Pollution Instrumentation A Teledyne Technologies Company What is measured photometer flow rate What is measured O3 generator flow rate cc min cc min what is the pressure change during the AUTO LEAK CHECK procedure What are the failure symptoms psi What tests have you done trying to solve the problem Thank you for providing this information Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the problem that you are encountering OTHER NOTES 05625 Rev A TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL api custome
157. Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 4 REMOTE ACCESS VIA THE ETHERNET When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface the calibrator can be connected to any standard 10BaseT Ethernet network via low cost network hubs switches or routers The interface operates as a standard TCP IP device on port 3000 This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the calibrator using APICOM terminal emulators or other programs The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate 115 200 kBaud for the COM2 port Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated the COM2 submenu is replaced by a new submenu INET This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN or Internet Server s The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the calibrator indicating its current operating status Table 7 4 Ethernet Status Indicators LED FUNCTION LNK green ON when connection to the LAN is valid ACT yellow Flickers on any activity on the LAN TxD green Flickers when the RS 232 port is transmitting data RxD yellow Flickers when the RS 232 port is receiving data 7 4 1 ETHERNET CARD COM2 COMMUNICATION MODES AND BAUD RATE The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for the COM2 port The baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud 7 4 2 CONFIGURIN
158. PAIR QUESTIONNAIRE M700E APPENDIX D ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS USER NOTES xii 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Information SECTION GENERAL INFORMATION 05622 REV B 1 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Information M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 2 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 MODEL 700E CALIBRATOR OVERVIEW The Model 700E M700E is a microprocessor based calibrator for precision gas calibrators Using a combination of highly accurate mass flow controllers and compressed sources of standard gases calibration standards are provided for multipoint span and zero checks Up to four gas sources may be used The M700E can be equipped with an optional built in programmable ozone generator for accurate dependable ozone calibrations The M70OE also produces NO when blended with NO gas in the internal GPT chamber A multi point linearization curve is used to control the generator to assure repeatable ozone concentrations An optional photometer allows precise control of the ozone generator both during calibrations and during Gas Phase Titrations GPT To ensure accurate output the calibrator with photometer option measures the ozone concen
159. PERATION 9 3 1 OVERVIEW TEST Analog Outputs 1 CHANNEL nas EE OUTPUT Aout4 Status Outputs e 1 Aout 3 Optional MES Multidrop 2nd Cal Gas Aout 2 Card Optional ar 1 eee O EPk Aout 1 Control Inputs 1 2 1 12 Cal Gas Ee iona PT External Digital I O PIRE TEL MFC1 Card Diluent fe amp 5 232 or RS 485 Diluent Circuit EE de Pressure Sensor e4 gt RS 232 Cal Gas n x Pressure Sensor OQ 2 p NEA us Generator Input p gt lt PC 104 Pressure Sensor g Flash Photometer Sample Gas g Chi Pressure Sensor Box p Temperature CPU EP RN GPT Valve Optional 1 Thermistor Interface 1 Generator Valve Generator Keyboard Optional Reference qJ Jo amp Display Detector r Photometer MR EEIN J Valve Photometer Photometer Optional Sample Gas UVLamp pl Suus gp FT sd Temperature Temperature Photometer ETC TS i Lamp Heater OsGenerator UV Lamp Valve Driver ES 1 Temperature PCA Poel qu 2 Jacm Photometer L L Status 03 Generator
160. PHOTO OFFSET Va ue TIMES HE MM SS Only appears when warning messages are active Only appears when an one or more calibration sequences are programmed into the calibrator s memory Only appears if optional generator is installed 4 Only appears if optional O4 photometer bench is installed 3 If your calibrator has an Ethernet card Option 63 installed and your network is running a dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP software package the Ethernet option will automatically configure its interface with your LAN However it is a good idea to check these settings to ensure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings from your network server See Section 7 4 2 If your network is not running DHCP you will have to configure the calibrator s interface manually See Section 7 4 2 1 34 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 3 5 SETTING UP THE CALIBRATION GAS INLET PORTS The M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator generates calibration gases of various concentrations by precisely mixing component gases of known concentrations with diluent zero air When the instrument is equipped with the optional generator and photometer it can also use the gas phase titration method for generating very precise concentrations of In either case it is necessary to program the concentrati
161. PT LEVEL To create a LEVEL using the M700E s GPT function press Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu CHOOSE ACTION Submenu ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE PREV NEXT Use the NEXT until SETUP X X INSERT STEP GPT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT GPT GPT 0 0 PPB NO EXIT discards the new gas type amp Toggle these keys to 0 0 0 PRE ENTE EXIT target concentration set the NO target ee concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp MUST be at least 10 i Higher than the Target target concentration Concentration 77 GPT GPT 0 0 PPB 03 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new gas type amp Toggle these keys to target concentration set the NO target a concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp target concentration concentration GPT TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys to set i flow rate the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM ENTR accepts the new gas flow rate STANDBY LEVEL 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys until l LEVEL number the designation of the EN existing defined level ENTR accepts the new program is reached LEVEL number 136 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 11 5 3 Creating a GPTPS LEVEL To create a LEVEL using the M700E s GPTPS function press Starting at the CHOOSE
162. Points emen nennen nnne 167 Table 8 2 M700E Pressure Sensor Calibration Setup sss rene 185 Table 9 1 Reay PCA Status LEDS Intt lenit vad qaa educ atiende redactis 204 Table 9 2 Front Panel Status LEDS rea tn states aer ids Eel dete nete 209 Table 9 3 M700E Photometer Measurement Reference Cycle 219 Table 10 1 M700E Maintenance Schedule nennen nnn nennen 226 Table 11 1 Front Panel Warning Messages EE nemen nennen nemen nnn nennen 239 Table 11 2 Test Functions Indicated Failures ssssssssssssssesesseeenenemene eterne nennen rne 241 Table 11 3 Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools ssssssseeem emm ems 244 Table 11 4 Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications eem 245 Table 11 5 Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications ssssee memes 246 Table 11 6 Valve Driver Board Watchdog LED Failure Indications se em 247 05622 REV B xi DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Table of Contents M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 11 7 Relay PCA Status LED Failure eme emn 247 Table 11 8 D
163. Q SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences current programmed into the M700E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 11 SEQ NAME AS STEPS INS DEL EDIT SETUP XX SET EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field perolsipac ando Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences STEPS Submenu SETUP XX PROGRESS MODE REM SET EDIT EXIT SETUP XX PROGRESS MODE REM STEP PCT ELAP REM EXIT Use these keys to choose a PROGRESS MODE gt SETUP X X PROGRESS MODE ELAP SET EDIT 05622 REV B 101 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 ADDING SEQUENCE STEPS To insert an instruction step into a sequence navigate to the INSERT STEP submenu by pressing Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M700E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT SETUP XX 0 SET EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field gaol pack INS
164. QUENCES The M700E calibrator can be set up to perform automatic calibration sequences of multiple steps These sequences can perform all of the calibration mixture operations available for manual operation and can be set up to be triggered by using the front panel buttons of the M700E s internal timer the external digital control inputs the RS 232 interface via the optional Ethernet interface or even as sub processes in another sequence 6 5 1 SETUP gt SEQ PROGRAMMING CALIBRATION SEQUENCES A sequence is a database of single or multiple steps where each single step is an instruction that causes the instrument to perform an operation These steps are grouped under a user defined SEQUENCE NAME For each sequence there are seven attributes that must be programmed They attributes are listed in Table 6 8 Table 6 8 Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up Attributes ATTRIBUTE NAME DESCRIPTION NAME Allows the user to create a text string of up to 10 characters identifying the sequence REPEAT COUNT Number of times between 0 and 100 to execute the same sequence A value of 0 zero causes the sequence to execute indefinitely CC INPUT Specifies which of the M700E s Digital Control Inputs will initiate the sequence CC OUTPUT Specifies which of the M700E s Digital Control Outputs will be set when the sequence is active TIMER ENABLE Enables or disables an internal automatic timer that can initiate sequences using the M700E s built in c
165. R REPLACEMENT OF OZONE GENERATOR UV LAMP This procedure details the steps for replacement and initial adjustment of the ozone generator lamp If you are adjusting an existing lamp skip to Step 8 1 Turn off the calibrator 2 Remove the cover from the calibrator 3 Locate the generator see Figure 3 4 Set Screws Lamp O ring O Generator Body e Figure 10 6 O Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations 4 Remove the two setscrews on the top of the O5 generator and gently pull out the old lamp Inspect the o ring beneath the nut and replace if damaged Install the new lamp in generator housing e Do not fully tighten the setscrews e The lamp should be able to be rotated in the assembly by grasping the lamp cable 7 Turn on calibrator and allow it to stabilize for at least 30 minutes Locate the potentiometer used to adjust the generator UV output Generator Adjustment Generator Reference Detector PCA Figure 10 7 Location of O Generator Reference Detector Adjustment Pot 234 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 9 Perform the following procedure Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ 10 Tighten the two setscrews PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL O3 USER
166. RA PAEA EEANN EE Er FAREA RAES 65 5 12 Dual Gas Output NO Special OPT 73 00 eee 65 OPERATINGAINSTRUCTIONS cnziceaccatwsvecnaisivncnssenaeastaceasestasmecasticcmnastameacesttaamnaanis 67 6 OPERATING THE M700E CALIBRATOR s sssssssessessesessessessssessessesecsessesscsesseesesseseeneenes 69 6 1 Test FUNCIONS tm eet n ee a M a eet a tie ae ras 69 6 2 Overview of Operating modes nennen ten inneren inneren 72 6 3 SPAND BY MO DE test nde tcd d a ea riis etes tete oe 73 6 4 GENERATE MODE hh eap tore edd epa neta rd erie eter aes 75 6 4 1 General Information about the GENERATE 75 6 4 2 GENERATE gt AUTO Basic Generation of Calibration 6 4 3 GENERATE gt MAN Generating Calibration Mixtures 79 6 4 3 1 Determining the Source Gas Flow 79 6 4 3 2 Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate ssesssseeeeeeeene ene 80 6 4 3 3 Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate with the Optional Generator Installed 80 6 4 3 4 Setting the Source Gas and Diluent Flow Rates
167. RATING MODES The M700E can be remotely configured calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports As terminals and computers use different communication schemes the calibrator supports two communicate modes specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices e Computer mode is used when the calibrator is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program e Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a dumb computer terminal The commands that are used to operate the calibrator in this mode are listed in Table 7 2 7 1 7 1 Help Commands in Terminal Mode Table 7 2 Terminal Mode Software Commands Control T Switches the calibrator to terminal mode echo edit If mode flags 1 amp 2 are OFF the interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program Control C Switches the calibrator to computer mode no echo no edit CR A carriage return is required after each carriage return command line is typed into the terminal computer The command will not be sent to the calibrator to be executed until this is done On personal computers this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key BS Erases one character to the left of the backspace cursor location ESC Erases the entire command line escape ID CR This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the disp
168. ROGRESS 50 ___ The revision level of the firmware installed in your analyzer is briefly displayed SOFTWARE REVISION B 2 BOOT PROGRESS XXXXXXXX 80 STANDBY SYSTEM RESET Firmware fully TEST GEN STBY SEQ MSG SETUP booted Press CLR to clear initial warning messages The calibrator should automatically switch to STANDBY mode after completing the boot up sequence 05622 REV B 31 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 3 2 WARM UP The M700E dynamic dilution calibrator requires a minimum of 30 minutes for all of its internal components to reach a stable operating temperature During that time various portions of the instrument s front panel will behave as follows See Figure 3 1 for locations Table 3 12 Front Panel Display during System Warm Up Mame Main Message Displays Warning messages and Test Field Function values At initial start up the various warning messages will appear here see Section 3 3 3 below Displays Mode Field EE STANDBY Instrument is in STANDBY mode STATUS LEDs Unit is operating in STANDBY mode Active Green OFF This LED glows green when the instrument is actively producing calibration gas Yellow OFF This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic calibration sequence The calibrator is warm
169. ROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 6 2 GENERATOR PNEUMATIC OPERATION Pneumatic flow through the Os generator is created by supplying zero air diluent to it under pressure The zero air source must be capable of maintaining a continuous flow rate of at least 100 cm min unless the optional photometer is also installed in which case the minimum continuous flow rate must be at least 1 1 LPM Input and output gas flow is directed by two valves both of which must be open e The diluent inlet valve This valve is located on the back panel and allows diluent zero air into the calibrator e The generation valve This valve is located on the body of the generator is downstream from the generator chamber itself and directs the output of the generator to either the GPT mixing chamber or the exhaust vent at the back of the calibrator The rate of flow through the generator is controlled by a 100 cm min flow control assembly positioned between the generation chamber and the generation valve A self adjusting pressure regulator on the zero air diluent supply gas line maintains the required 2 1 pressure ration across the critical flow orifice of the flow control assembly see Section 9 2 1 3 O3 Generator Gas Inlet Photometer Vent Flow Control Assembly O Generator Heater Control PCA 1 0 LPM O Outlet to Outlet to GPT Va
170. S 167 8 2 1 Setup for Verification and Calibration of the M700E s MFC s ssssssseeeeeee 168 8 2 2 Verifying and Calibrating the M700E s MFC S sssssssssseseeeeneeene nme enne nns 169 8 3 Verifying and Calibrating the M700E s Optional Photometer sssssssseeee ee 170 8 3 1 Setup for Verifying Photometer 170 8 3 2 Verifying Photometer Performance eene nennen rennen 171 8 3 3 Setup for Calibration of the Photometer sssssssssssssssseeeeenenee emere 172 8 3 3 1 Setup Using Direct Connections sssssseses eee nennen mener ennemis 172 8 3 3 2 Setup Using a Calibration Manifold mmm ens 173 8 3 3 3 Calibration Manifold Exhaust Vent Line ssssssssssssseeeenemeeenn nennen 173 8 3 4 Performing an External Calibration of the Photometer ssssssssssseem 174 8 3 4 1 Photometer Zero Calibration 174 8 3 4 2 Photometer Span Calibration ssssssssssssessesssseseeneneee enne nennen 175 8 3 5 Photometer Dark Calibration llsssssseesessssseseeeen nenne nennen nnn nnn n nnns nennen 176 8 3 6 Photometer Gas Flow
171. S 190 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Technical information SECTION TECHNICAL INFORMATION 05622 REV B 191 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Technical information M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 192 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9 1 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMIC DILUTION CALIBRATION The M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator generates calibration gas mixtures by mixing bottled source gases of known concentrations with a diluent gas Zero air Using several Mass Flow Controllers MFC s the M700E calibrator creates exact ratios of diluent and source gas by controlling the relative rates of flow of the various gases under conditions where the temperature and pressure of the gasses being mixed is known and therefore the density of the gases The CPU calculates both the required source gas and diluent gas flow rates and controls the corresponding mass flow controllers by the following equation Equation 9 1 CAStow Cr Ui Totalfiow WHERE C final concentration of diluted gas Cj7 source gas concentration GA Siow source gas flow rate Totalflow the total gas flow through the calibrator Totalflow is determined as TOTALFLOW
172. S 485 MODE OFF PREV NEXT OFF EXIT COM1 RS 485 MODE ON PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT PREV and NEXT Keys to continue selecting other COM modes you want to enable or disable Combined Mode ID displayed here EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting J 146 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 1 5 COMM PORT TESTING The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu This test sends a string of 256 w characters to the selected COMM port While the test is running the red LED on the rear panel of the calibrator should flicker To initiate the test press the following key sequence GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID 1 272 COM1 MODE 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT HEN Continue pressing SET or SET until COM1 TEST PORT lt SET SET gt TEST Test Runs TRANSMITTING TO COM1 Automatically COM1 TEST PORT PREY NEXT OFF 05622 REV B 147 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 6 MACHINE ID Each type of Teledyne API s calibrator is configured with a default ID code The default ID code for all M700E calibrators is 700 The ID number
173. S 485 port can be configured with or without a 150 O termination resistor To include the resistor install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board see Figure 7 7 To configure COM2 as an un terminated RS 485 port leave JP3 open CN4 JP3 COM2 RS 232 CN3 NE COM1 RS 232 2 RS 485 IN A og 2 a D 14133112 a b rr PHARMA MM m m s EE LE x 4 ud eda Ex Figure 7 5 CPU Card Locations of RS 232 485 Switches Connectors and Jumpers 05622 REV B 157 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual When COM is configured for RS 485 operation the port uses the same female DB 9 connector on the back of the instrument as when COM2 is configured for RS 232 operation however the pin assignments are different Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer GND Figure 7 6 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 Mode The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6 pin connector on the CPU card CN5 CN5 Located on CPU card RX TX RX TX GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 7 7 CPU Connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 Mode 5622 REV B 158 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator
174. S ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 9 1 3 TEST CHANNEL VOLTAGE RANGE Configuration In its standard configuration the analog outputs is set to output a 0 5 VDC signals Several other output ranges are available see Table 6 14 Each range is usable from 5 to 5 of the rated span Table 6 14 Analog Output Voltage Range Min Max RANGE SPAN MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 100 mVDC 5 mVDC 105 mVDC 0 1 VDC 0 05 VDC 1 05 VDC 0 5 VDC 0 25 VDC 5 25 VDC 0 10 VDC 0 5 VDC 10 5 VDC The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC To change the output range press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL Pressing ENTR records lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT the new setting and These keys set returns pee EE R Pressing EXIT ignores the and DIAG AIO OUTPUT RANGE 5V neu seting and 1V 10V ENTR EXIT the previous menu gar Pd 05622 REV B 121 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 9 1 4 Turning the TEST CHANNEL Over Range Feature ON OFF In its default configuration a 5 over range is available on
175. SCRIPTION Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the calibrator such as warning messages to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a QUIET 1 computer program where such intermittent messages might cause communication problems Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is COMPUTER 2 communicating with a computer operated control program SECURITY 4 When enabled the serial port requires a password before it will respond The only command that is active is the help screen CR When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings from E 7 1 2048 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit to Even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit RS 485 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS 485 communication RS 485 mode has precedence over multi drop mode if both are enabled MULTI DROP 32 Multi drop protocol allows a multi instrument configuration on a single communications PROTOCOL channel Multi drop requires the use of instrument IDs ENABLE 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power up Asserts certain lines in the MODEM RS 232 port to enable the modem to communicate ERROR 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations CHECKING XON XOFF Disables XON XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking HANDSHAKE 256 HARDWARE Enables CTS RTS style hardwired tr
176. ST OUTPUT PHOTO LAMP DRIVE 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 23 APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual O3_GEN_DRIVE Os generator lamp drive 0 5 Must be enabled with a factory option bit Dual permeation tube option 1 Triple MFC option Dual diluent option Pg A 24 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 5 Terminal Command Designators Revision D 1 APPENDIX A 5 Terminal Command Designators Revision D 1 COMMAND ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX DESCRIPTION Table A 5 Terminal Command Designators Revision D 1 ID Display help screen and commands list LOGON ID password Establish connection to instrument LOGOFF ID Terminate connection to instrument SET ALL name hexmask Display test s T ID LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print test s to screen name Print single test CLEAR ALL name hexmask Disable test s SET ALL name hexmask Display warning s W ID LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print warning s name Clear single warning CLEAR ALL name hexmask Clear warning s ZERO LOWSPAN SPAN 12 Enter calibration mode ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence C ID COMPUTE ZERO SPAN Compute new slope offset EXIT Exit calibration mode ABORT Abort calibration sequence LIST Print all I O signals name value Examine or set I
177. SURE INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL GAS 3 SENSOR ES IMLET EXHAUST CAL GAS 4 PHOTOMETER IALET OUTLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD Lee Lid di or back panel yet CAL GAS Cal Get OUTPUT 1 Mtt Fhive Controllar 1 s N CAL GAS GPT zu blu Qureur 2 Volume Y VENT CX th Ea GAS OUTPUT MANIFDLO Figure 3 6 M700E Pneumatic Diagram with O Generator and Photometer 05622 REV B 15 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 1 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 3 1 2 1 Power Connection Attach the power cord to the calibrator and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE CALIBRATORS CASE POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND CONNECTION DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG TURN OFF CALIBRATOR POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES DO NOT OPERATE WITH COVER OFF CAUTION DO NOT LOOK AT THE PHOTOMETER UV LAMP UV LIGHT CAN CAUSE EYE DAMAGE ALWAYS WEAR GLASSES MADE FROM SAFETY UV FILTERRING GLASS PLASTIC GLASSES WILL NOT DO NOTE The M700E calibrator is equipped with a universal power supply that allow
178. T CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN lt SET EDIT SET gt CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN 0 5 0 SSS Toggle these keys to set the dwell time for the point gt SET SHT EDIT NOTE When a point is added to the table its default condition is ON SET SET EDIT enabled CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN 0 5 0 Toggle these keys to set the dwell time for the point gt CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN EXIT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT CAL POINT DURATION 0 0 MIN EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts ENTR EXIT Ld the new setting 05622 REV B DCN 5169 181 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 4 3 3 Deleting Generator Calibration Points To delete an existing calibration point press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until GEN CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR GEN CALIBRATION CAL PNTS 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Continue pressing PREV amp NEXT until your reach the poi
179. T calibration MANUAL In this mode the instrument is engaged in producing calibration gas mixtures The calibrator is using diluent zero air to purge its internal pneumatics of all Source gas and previously created calibration mixtures SETUP SETUP mode is being used to configure the calibrator STANDBY The calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive This mode is not available in units without Os generators installed This mode is not available in units without internal photometers installed 3 The revision of the Teledyne API software installed in this calibrator will be displayed following the word SETUP E g SETUP G 4 72 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 3 STANDBY MODE When the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is in standby mode it is at rest All internal valves are closed except the diluent inlet valve The mass flow controllers are turned off On units with generator and photometer options installed these subsystems are inactive e The SETUP gt GAS submenu is only available when the instrument is in STANDBY mode e Some functions under the SETUP gt MORE gt DIAG submenu those which conflict with accurate creation of calibration gas mixtures e g ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST automatically place the calibrator into STANDBY mode when activated e The MFC pressures are not monitored
180. THE ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL The signals available for output over the M700E s analog output channel can also be used as diagnostic tools See Section 6 9 for instruction on activating the analog output and selecting a function Table 11 3 Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools TEST FULL CAUSES OF EXTREMELY CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ZERO SCALE HIGH LOW READINGS TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF If the value displayed is 25000 mV The UV source has become brighter adjust the UV Detector Gain potentiometer 03 PHOTO The raw output of the lt 100mV Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply MEAS photometer during its 5000 mV 2000mV Lamp output has dropped adjust UV Preamp measure cycle Board or replace lamp If the value displayed is constantly changing BadUV lamp Defective UV lamp power supply 2 The raw output of the pale Te Bus 03 PHOTO ne REF photometer during its 5000 mV If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than reference cycle 10mV between zero and span gas Defective leaking M R switching valve O3 GEN o aei ofthe 5000 mv Possible causes of faults are the same as GEN REFERENCE REF 39 WARNING from Table 11 1 reference detector SAMPLE The pressure of gas in the photometer 0 Hg 40 Hg In A Check for Gas Flow problems PRESSURE absorption tube SAMPLE The gas flow rate 3p 3 FLOW through the photometer 0 cm min 1000 cm m Check for Gas Flow problems N
181. THE INSTRUMENT TO NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY NOTE THAT IF THERE IS AN ACCIDENTAL CHANGE TO A SETUP PRESS EXIT TO DISCARD THE CHANGES MADE 4 Enter the password 929 and press ENTR 05622 REV B 65 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 5 Press NEXT until you get to the next screen 6 Press ENTR 7 Press NEXT until you get to the next screen 8 Press OFF to turn ON the DUAL GAS OUTPUT 9 Press ENTR This step will return to the FACTORY OPTIONS screen g PHOTOMETER BENCH Figure 5 13 Internal Pneumatics for M700E Calibrator with Optional Dual Gas Output NO Special USER NOTES 66 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SECTION OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 05622 REV B 67 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 68 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 OPERATING THE M700E CALIBRATOR The M700E calibrator is a computer controlled calibrator with a dynamic menu interface for easy and yet powerful and flexible operation All major operations are controlled from t
182. TS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started Table 3 13 Possible Warning Messages at Start Up MESSAGE MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The calibrators A D converter or at least one analog input channel has not been calibrated CONFIG INITIALIZED Stored Configuration information has been reset to the factory settings or has been erased DATA INITIALIZED The calibrator s data storage was erased FRONT PANEL WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel 1 2 The firmware is unable to communicate with either the O3 generator or LAMP DRIVERWARN photometer lamp C driver chips E The flow setting for one of the calibrator s mass flow controllers is less than 1096 CALIBRATIONIWARNING or greater than 100 of the flow rating for that controller MES ARI s Firmware is unable to communicate with any MFC MFC FLOW WARNING One of the calibrator s mass flow controllers is being driven at less than 1096 of full scale or greater than full scale MFC PRESSURE WARNING One of the calibrator s mass flow controllers internal gas pressure is outside of allowable limits O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING The Os generator lamp temperature is outside of allowable limits 1 The generator s reference detector has dropped below the minimum allowable PUMP WARNING The pump associated with the O3 photometer has failed to turn on PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING The ph
183. UBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL AIN CALIBRATED NO CAL CALIBRATING A D ZERO CALIBRATING A D SPAN AIN CALIBRATED YES CAL 05622 REV B 129 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 10 SETUP gt MORE gt VARS INTERNAL VARIABLES VARS The M700E has several user adjustable software variables which define certain operational parameters Usually these variables are automatically set by the instrument s firmware but can be manually redefined using the VARS menu The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level See Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of all of the M700E variables that are accessible through the remote interface Table 6 16 Variable Names VARS ALLOWED DEFAULT DESCRIPTION VALUES VALUES 58 C PHOTO_LAMP DS temperature set and 100 C Waring limits 56 61 48 1 O3 GEN LAMP UR Ps bes aor ramp temperature Sef oec and 100 C Waming limits 43 C 53 C Set the upper span point of the O3 O3 CONC RANGE concentration range for TEST CHANNEL 0 1 20000 ppb 500 ppb analog signal O3 PHOTO CONC Os bench control flag 2 ON turns on the photometer pump and ON OFF 3 O3 PHOTO BENCH ONLY switches measure refere
184. UENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT 3 SEQ NAME X STEPS PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT Scrolls back and forth between existing sequences SEQUENCES YES NO SEQUENCE DELETED END OF SEQUENCES INS 05622 REV B DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 111 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 6 SETUP gt CFG Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument s configuration information This display lists the calibrator model serial number firmware revision software library revision CPU type and other information Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here Press NEXT of PREV to move back and forth through the following list of Configuration information MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER PART NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION Only appears if INET option is installed CPU TYPE amp OS REVISION DATE FACTORY ie d SAVED ACT CAL 0 000 LPM STANDBY lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP SETUP X X SETUP MENU GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE SETUP X X M700E Cailbrator PREV NEXT Press exit at any time to return to the SETUP menu 112 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual
185. Up Attributes 92 Table 6 9 Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction ssssssssssseeeeneeeeeneeen nennen nnne nnn nnns 92 Table 6 10 Sequence Progress Reporting Mode sssssessssseeeeeenen menn nnnm nnn nnne 101 Table 6o 11 Password Levels ore tr etd tee ede pide scandal des ey Da ee de aa dde PL Deed ane PM ox e d aa 115 Table 6 12 DIAG Analog I O Functions ssssssssesseeenn nennen 117 Table 6 13 Test Channels Functions available on the M700E s Analog 119 Table 6 14 Analog Output Voltage Range Min Max ssseseeee nem menenmemennennemeenennenrnnnnnnrein 121 Table 6 15 Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration 127 Table 6 16 Variable Names VARS 3 icisiiei ct oed e gate ERR PUR aedes 130 Table 7 1 COMM Port Communication Modes sse eene menn 145 Table 7 2 Terminal Mode Software Commands ssssssssssssesee een 149 Table 7 3 Teledyne API Serial Command Types ssssssseeeeeenm enm eene enne 150 Table 7 4 Ethernet Status IndiCators Ic tet Rot tete cd eee eg ee chr dee badd abere 159 Table 7 5 LAN Internet Configuration Properties emm ennemis 160 Table 8 1 Examples of MFC Calibration
186. Using the GENERATE gt MAN Menu 81 6 4 4 GENERATE gt GPT Performing a Gas Phase Titration Calibration 82 GA AACR AL Dheotyz teet ien oett eiu mild ciment mco d ntn der e ecce rebas 82 6 4 4 2 Choosing an Input Concentration for the eene 82 6 4 4 3 Determining the TOTAL FLOW for GPT Calibration Mixtures 83 6 4 4 4 M700E Calibrator GPT Operation ssssssssseeeeeeeemeenen 84 6 4 4 5 Initiating GPT Calibration Gas Generation sssssseee eene 85 6 4 5 GENERATE GPTPS Performing a Gas Phase Titration 5 86 6 4 5 1 M700E Calibrator GPTPS Operation eene nennen nnne 86 0 4 5 2 Initiating a GPT ie ese td etae ead eee pd se vd ee sea ee kd e Dec 88 6 4 6 GENERATE gt PURGE Activating the M700E s Purge 89 6 4 7 GENERATE gt ACT gt VIEWING CONCENTRATIONS Generated from Multi Gas Cylinders 91 6 4 7 1 Using the M700E Calibrator as a 91 iv 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s
187. X 0 CONC PRECISION 1 PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until SETUP X X 6 CLOCK ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X 6 CLOCK ADJUST 0 Sec Day 0 0 EDIT ENTR EXIT OCZ Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses gt SETUP 1 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting J gt 114 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 8 SETUP gt PASS The M700E provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized adjustments When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password protected function is requested There are three levels of password protection which correspond to operator maintenance and configuration functions Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level Table 6 11 Password Levels PASSWORD LEVEL MENU ACCESS ALLOWED All functions of the MAIN menu TEST GEN initiate SEQ MSG CLR Access to Primary and Secondary Setup Menus except for VARS and DIAG Configuration Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG To enable or disable passwords press STANDBY ACT CAL 0 000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ
188. Y 1 etc 36 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started NOTE If you have the same type of gas but two different concentrations for example two concentrations of CO assign the second concentration to one of the user defined gases e g CO2 default name and CO2B user defined 3 3 7 3 User Defined Gas Types Setting the MOLAR MASS The molar mass of a substance is the mass expressed in grams of 1 mole of that specific substance Conversely one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance EXAMPLE The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 011 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 011 grams conversely one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 011 grams Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements To determine the Molar mass of a gas add together the atomic weights of the elements that make up the gas EXAMPLE The chemical formula for Propane is Therefore the molecular mass of propane is 12 011 x 2 1 008 x 8 24 022 8 064 32 086 TO SET THE MOLAR MASS OF A USER DEFINED GAS PRESS 05622 REV B 37 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Make sure that the M700E is in standby mo
189. ZATION process proceeds automatically SETUP X X INITIALIZATION FAILED COMMUNICATIONS MENU SETUP X X Contact your IT Network ID ADDR INET EXIT Administrator 164 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 5 APICOM REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAM APICOM is an easy to use yet powerful interface program that allows the user to access and control any of Teledyne API s main line of ambient and stack gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable modem or Ethernet Running APICOM a user can e Establish a link from a remote location to the M700E through direct cable connection via RS 232 modem or Ethernet e View the instrument s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when standing in front of the instrument e Remotely edit system parameters and set points e Download view graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis e Check on system parameters for trouble shooting and quality control APICOM is very helpful for initial setup data analysis maintenance and trouble shooting Figure 7 8 shows an example of APICOM s main interface which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front panel 1 APIcom N Projects APIcom Scripts and data Engineering lab cfg File View Settings Help COM1 Direct Cable COM2 Connected
190. achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer Table 7 3 Teledyne API Serial I O Command Types COMMAND COMMAND TYPE Calibration Diagnostic Logon Test measurement Variable S lt al rjojo Warning 7 1 7 3 Data Types Data types consist of integers hexadecimal integers floating point numbers Boolean expressions and text strings e Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records a filter length etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by one or more digits For example 7 12 123 are all valid integers e Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers They consist of the two characters Ox followed by one or more hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f which is the C programming language convention No plus or minus sign is permitted For example 0x1 0x12 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers 150 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E e Floating point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points time intervals warning limits voltages etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by zero or more digits an optional decimal point and zero or more digits At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal po
191. ad or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly GENERATOR PRESSURE SENSOR 1 Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter 2 Measure the voltage across TP5 and 1 e Evaluate the reading in the same manner as for the cal gas pressure sensor see Section 11 4 8 PHOTOMETER FLOW SENSOR e Measure the voltage across and 1 e With proper flow 800 em min through the photometer this should be approximately 4 5V this voltage will vary with altitude e With flow stopped photometer inlet disconnected or pump turned OFF the voltage should be approximately 1V e If the voltage is incorrect the flow sensor S3 is bad the board is bad or there is a leak upstream of the sensor 05622 REV B 253 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 4 10 MOTHERBOARD 11 4 10 1 A D Functions The simplest method to check the operation of the A to D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter 1 Use the Signal I O function See Section 11 1 3 and Appendix A to view the value of REF 4096 MV and REF GND If both are within mV of nominal 4096 and 0 and are sta
192. alibration of TEST CHANNEL can be initiated with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command 6 9 2 1 Enabling or disabling the TEST CHANNEL Auto Cal Feature To enable or disable the Auto Cal feature for the TEST CHANNEL press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AOUTS CALIBRATED SET gt CAL EXIT NOTE TEST CHANNELS Continue pressing SET until you reach the configured for 0 1V full output to be configured scale should always be calibrated manually DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT AUTO CAL ON SET SET EDIT ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting 7 Toggle this key to DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT AUTO CAL ON turn AUTO CAL z ON ENTR EXIT ON or OFF OFF manual calibration mode DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT AUTO CAL OFF OFF ENTR EXIT 124 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 9 2 2 Automatic TEST CHANNEL Calibration NOTE Before performing this procedure ensure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned OFF for MFC_DRIVE_1 MFC_DRIVE_2 and MFC_DRIVE_3 9 if installed Ensure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned_ON for the TEST CHANNEL See Section
193. alibrator Final Test and Validation Data Sheet shipped with the instrument Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the calibrator s subsystems Functions whose values are still within acceptable ranges but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these Test Functions Table 11 2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range 05622 REV B DCN 5169 240 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator Table 11 2 Test Functions Indicated Failures TEST FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS Particularly important in calibrators without the optional photometer since the reference GEN detector is the primary input for controlling concentration Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING from Table 11 1 Gas flow problems directly affect the concentration accuracy of the M700E s calibration gas 03 FLOW mixtures Check for Gas Flow problems 4 Check generator heater and temperature sensors GEN DRIVE Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 Incorrect Lamp temperature can affect the effi
194. amber are low enough to give a residence time of the reactants in the mixing chamber of gt 2 75 ppm min Given the above conditions the amount of being output by the M700E will be equal to at a 1 1 ratio to the amount of added Since the O flow rate of the M700E s O generator is a set fixed value typically about 0 105 LPM and the GPT chamber s volume is known once the TOTAL GAS FLOW requirements the source concentration of NO and the target concentration for the generator are entered into the calibrator s software The M700E adjusts the NO flow rate and diluent zero air flow rate to create the appropriate concentration at the output 6 4 4 2 Choosing an Input Concentration for the NO It is important to ensure that there is enough NO in the GPT chamber to use up all of the O3 Excess Os will react with the resulting to produce NO3 Since is undetectable by most NO analyzers this will result in false low readings The EPA requires that the NO content of a GPT mixture be at least 10 higher than the content Since there is no negative effect to having too much NO in the GPT chamber Teledyne API recommends that the NO concentration be chosen to be some value higher as much as twice as high as the highest intended target NO value and kept constant As long as the flow rate is also kept constant three of the four conditions listed in Section 6 4 4 1 above are therefore constant and the N
195. amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual If D1 is blinking then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu Signal I O to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the Relay 11 3 2 2 Option Status LEDs D9 Green Photometer Pump Status D8 Green O Generator Valve Status D7 Green Photometer Meas Ref Valve 7 D145 Yellow D16 Yellow 41 PTE i 0 000 LE 080007 D6 Tam n Valve Photometer Lamp Heater Generator Lamp Heater D1 RED Watchdog Indicator 0 n Figure 11 3 Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting Table 11 5 Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications SIGNAL I O PARAMETER LED FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE ACTIVATED BY VIEW RESULT D7 Photometer Green Mea Ret PHOTO REF VAEVE NA Valve should audibly change states Valve If not 2 D8 Generator O3 GEN VALVE N A e Failed Valve Valve Status e Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay PCA D9 Photometer Failed Relay PCA Green Pump Status pier tae NA e Faulty 12 VDC Supply PS2 12 e Faulty Connectors Wiring De GET Valve GPT_VALVE N A Yellow Status 1 Voltage displayed should change pis Photometer pHOTO_LAMP_HEATER PHOTO LAMP TEMP root 27 9 Yellow Heater Status not e Failed Heater D16 Generator e Faulty Temperature Sensor
196. an operator at the calibrator s front panel or through a serial data operation over the RS 232 or Ethernet ports 6 11 4 ACTIVATING AN EXISTING LEVEL To activate an existing defined LEVEL press STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM MARS SUTE ME MTOE TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ SETUP is in standby mode STANDBY SYSTEM RESET LVL AUTO MAN PURG GPT GPTS EXIT STANDBY LEVEL 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT x Toggle these keys until the designation of the existing defined level program is reached MANUAL ACT CAL 3 000 LPM The M70OOE will continue lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SETUP generrating calibration gas at the LEVEL chosen until the STBY button is pressed 05622 REVB 133 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 11 5 PROGRAMMING NEW LEVELS To begin programming a new LEVEL find the LVL submenu by pressing Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN BIBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU SEQ This display only appears if there are no LEVELs currently programmed into the M700E OTHERWISE END OF LEVELS INS LEVEL ID Gas Conc Status Block Set INS DEL EDIT ACTION TO PERFORM GENERATE Deletes the LEVEL shown Edits the LEVEL shown in in the message field the message field Scrolls back and forth between existing LEVELS PREV NEXT Use these keys to scroll though the available instructions GENERATE
197. ansmission handshaking This style of data HANDSHAKE 8 transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument s APICOM software HARDWARE 512 Disables the HARDWARE FIFO First In First Out When FIFO is enabled it FIFO improves data transfer rate for that COMM port COMMAND 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode PROMPT 1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt CON 1 OR 2 gt MODE menu The default setting for this feature is ON Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API s Customer Service personnel Note Communication Modes for each COMM port must be configured independently 05622 REV B 145 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Press the following keys to select communication modes for a one of the COMM Ports such as the following example where RS 485 mode is enabled Use the PREV and NEXT Keys to between the available modes Activate Deactivate the Selected mode by toggling the ON OFF key GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 COM1 MODE 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT COM1 QUIET MODE OFF PREV NEXT OFF EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until COM1 R
198. ansmit LED TxD LED RxD LED Receive LED ETT pp IEEE Interior View Exterior View Figure 5 8 M700E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed For more information on setting up and using this option see Section 7 4 5622 REV B DCN 5169 58 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 6 5 ETHERNET MULTI DROP OPT 63C This option allows the instrument to communicate on both RS 232 and ETHERNET networks simultaneously It includes the following e RS232 MODEM CABLES 60A or OPT 60B e ETHERNET CABLE OPT 60C e RS 232 MULTI DROP OPT 62 e ETHERNET OPT 63A 5 7 ADDITIONAL MANUAL OPT 70A amp OPT 70B Additional copies of the printed user s manual can be purchased from the factory as Option 70A Please specify the serial number of your calibrator so that we can match the manual version This operator s manual is also available on CD as option 70B The electronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc Portable Document Format PDF and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader software which can be downloaded for free at http www adobe com The electronic version of this manual can also be downloaded for free at http Awww teledyne api com manuals Note that the online version is optimized for fast downloading and may not print with the same quality as the manual on CD 5 8 EXTERNAL VALVE DRIVER OPT 48A amp OPT 48B An externa
199. anual 6 4 5 2 Initiating a GPT Pre Set To activate the GPTPS feature you will need to know e The TOTAL GAS FLOW for the mixture output e The Target Os concentration equal to the target NO concentration being simulated and e The NO source gas concentration Then press STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM Make sure that lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ the M7OOE is in Continue pressing lt TST or TST gt until STANDBY STANDBY ACT STANDBY mode lt TST TST GEN STBY SEQ STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO MAN PURG GPT GPTPS STANDBY GPTPS 0 0 PPB NO EXIT discards the new gas type amp Toggle these keys to 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT target concentration set the NO target LL concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp MUST be at least 10 i Higher than the Target target concentration Os Concentration 7 STANDBY GPTPS 0 0 PPB O3 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new gas type amp Taggle these keys to target concentration set ihe NO target ENTR accepts the new gas type amp target concentration concentration STANDBY TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new EE Toggle these keys to set flowrate the target TOTAL FLOW ENTR accepts the Default 2 000 LPM 198 3 PPB NO 94 5 PPB O3 Keep the 7 in GPTPS mode until ihe ACT value for is within 1 PPB of the target value entered above
200. appears if optional generator is installed Only appears if optional photometer bench is installed Pg A 4 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 MAIN MENU SETUP i SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE l _ See PRIMARY SETUP Menu ON N See PTAS Submenu PREV NEXT a See SECONDARY SETUP Menu See PRIMARY SETUP Menu e SEQUENCE Submenu DATE MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER PART NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION Only appears if INET option is installed SETUP X X TIME 21 29M D Dj MON Y ENTR EXIT SETUP X X TIME 21 29M H H ENTR EXIT CPU amp OS REVISION DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED Toggle these keys to set the Toggle these keys to set Toggle this 2 digit year Toggle these Toggle these the day of the month keys to set the PES keys to set the keys to set the month Only appears when the calibrator is in STANDBY mode hour minutes Only appears when the calibrator is NOT running a 24 hr clock programmed sequence Figure A 3 PRIMARY SETUP MENU Basics 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 5 APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual MAIN MENU SETUP
201. aracter left or right Y DHCP OFF Deletes a character at the cursor location Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu SET ENTR Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu INST IP 000 000 000 000 Some keys only appear as needed lt SET SET gt EDIT Cursor location is indicated by brackets INST IP 0 00 000 000 lt CH CH gt DEL 0 ENTR EXIT GATEWAY IP 000 000 000 000 lt SET SET gt EDIT GATEWAY IP 0 00 000 000 lt CH CH gt DEL ENTR EXIT SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT SUBNET 2 55 255 255 0 TCP PORT 3000 lt CH CH gt DEL 2 ENTR EXIT Y SET The PORT number needs to remain at 3000 Do not change this setting unless instructed to by Pressing EXIT from any of the above display menus causes the Ethernet option to reinitialize its internal interface INITIALIZING INET 0 firmware aac INITIALIZING INET 100 INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel SETUP COMMUNI CATI ONS MENU Contact your IT Network Administrator ID INET 05622 REV B 163 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 4 3 CHANGING THE CALIBRATOR S HOST
202. as CYL1 CYL_VALVE_1 Valve should audibly change states and D4 Cal Gas CYL2 CYL_VALVE_2 BW D5 Cal Gas CYL3 CYL VALVE 3 1 e Failed Valve CER VALVE e Failed Valve Driver IC on Relay PCA D9 a se PURGE_VALVE e Failed Valve Driver Board e Faulty 12 VDC Supply PS2 pig Diluent Valve INPUT_VALVE Status e Faulty Connectors Wiring 05622 REV B 247 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 4 SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the M700E calibrator In most cases this included a list of possible components or subsystems that might be the source of the problem This section describes how to check individual components or subsystems to determine if which is actually the cause of the problem being investigated 11 4 1 VERIFY SUBSYSTEM CALIBRATION A good first step when troubleshooting the operation of the M7OOE calibrator is to verify that its major subsystems are properly calibrated These are e The mass flow controllers see Section 8 2 e Test Channel D A conversion see Section 6 9 2 e pressure calibration see Section 8 5 When optional O4 components are installed you should also check e Photometer calibration see Section 8 3 e Os gener
203. as library and will appear as choices during the various calibrator operations along with the default gas names listed in Section 3 3 6 05622 REV B 35 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual In its default state the M700E s four user defined gases are named USR1 USR2 USR3 and USR4 each with a default MOLAR MASS of 28 890 the MOLAR MASS of ambient air All four are ENABLED Defining a USER GAS is a 2 step process 4 Define the GAS NAME 5 Set the MOLAR MASS 3 3 7 2 User Defined Gas Types Defining the Gas Name In this example we will be using PROPANE C2Hs Press Make sure that the M70OE is in standby GEN STBY SEQ mode o m c PRIMARY SETUP MENU SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL USER gt o 0 GAS NONE MASS 28 890 GM NEXT Continue pressing next until 28 890 is the Molar Mass of ambient air 14 GAS USR1 MASS 28 890 GM This number is used as a default value for all user NEXT EDIT gasses until reset by the operator GAS USR1 MASS 28 890 GM NAME MASS GAS NAME USR1 EXIT discards the new GAS NAME Toggle these keys to 5 R p E ENTR EXIT zi change the GAS NAME ENTR accepts the new NUS NEGET GAS NAME 7 vallable characters are A Z 0 9 and GAS PROP MASS 28 890 GM NAME MASS Alternatively one could chose use the chemical formula for this gas C2Hg or any other 4 letter name e g PRPN M
204. assy O PHOTOMETER ZERO IN Diluent Mass Flow Controller 001 Jo 3uo2 CAL GAS 1 INLET CAL GAS 2 gt INLET CAL GAS 3 INLET PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL GAS PRESSURE SENSOR INTERNAL bik VENT lk EXHAUST CAL GAS 4 INLET PHOTOMETER OUTLET 1 1 ye GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel on back panel l CAL GAS Cal Gas 1 OUTPUT 1 Mass Flow Controller 1 d NC CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 blu GPT 1 Volume K pi VENT kunat blu 1 GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 6 6 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when Generating O 76 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 4 2 GENERATE gt AUTO Basic Generation of Calibration Mixtures This is the simplest procedure for generating calibration gas mixtures In this mode the user makes three choices e type of component gas to be used from the list of gases input during initial set up see Section 3 3 8 e The target concentration and e The TOTAL FLOW to be output by the M7OOE Using this information the M7OOE calibrator automatically calculates and sets the individual flow rates for the Dilue
205. ator calibration see Section 8 4 11 4 2 AC MAIN POWER The M700E calibrator s electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes As long as System is connected to 100 120 VAC or 220 240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display e Internally the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA Motherboard and CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied e If they do not check the circuit breaker built into the ON OFF switch on the instruments front panel CAUTION SHOULD THE AC POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP INVESTIGATE AND CORRECT THE CONDITION CAUSING THIS SITUATION BEFORE TURNING THE CALIBRATOR BACK ON 248 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 4 3 POWER SUPPLY If you have determined that the calibrator s AC mains power is working but the unit is still not operating properly there may be a problem with one of the instrument s switching power supplies The supplies can have two faults namely no DC output and noisy output To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay PCA follow a standard color coding scheme as defined in Figure 11 5 and Table 11 8 F
206. b E ENTR EXIT b E ENTR EXIT eee Toggle these keys ta nl set output CONCENTRATION Toggle these keys of Ihe generator to set the CONSTANT drive voltage of the O generator EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the MANUAL ACT CA amp L 3 000 LPM new setting 7 The M7ODE will lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SETUP stay in MANUAL mode until the STBY button is pressed 05622 REV B 81 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 4 4 GENERATE gt GPT Performing a Gas Phase Titration Calibration 6 4 4 1 GPT Theory The principle of GPT is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and Os which produces quantities of as shown by the following equation Equation 6 4 NO O4 gt NO It has been empirically determined that under controlled circumstances the NO O reaction is very efficient lt 1 residual therefore the concentration of NO resulting from the mixing of NO and can be precisely predicted and controlled as long as the following conditions are met a The amount of O used in the mixture is known b The amount of NO used in the mixture is AT LEAST 10 greater than the amount in the mixture O The volume of the mixing chamber is known d The NO and O flow rates from which the time the two gases are in the mixing ch
207. ble 0 5 mV then the basic A D is functioning properly If not then the motherboard is bad 2 Choose a parameter in the Signal I O function such as DIL PRESS FLOW 1 or SAMPLE FLOW e Compare these voltages at their origin see the interconnect drawing and interconnect list in Appendix D with the voltage displayed through the signal I O function e If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage 10 mV then the motherboard is bad 11 4 10 2 Test Channel Analog Outputs Voltage To verify that the analog output is working properly connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog output step test as follows Make sure that GEN STBY SEQ SETUP the M7ODE is in standby mode 7 PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD ENTR a a a Toggle these keys to enter the Correct PASSWORD SIGNAL VO PREY NEXT ANALOG OUTPUT Performs analog output step test 20 O ta 100 ANALOG OUTPUT Pressing the key under 095 pause the 2095 EXIT test Brackets will appear around the value EXAMPLE 20 Pressing the same key again will resume the test 254 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator For each of the steps the output should
208. cal gas MFC option is installed The valve associated with the cylinder containing NO source gas is open 3 In instrument with multiple MFC s the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested M700E Chassis Flow Control 1 0 LPM PHOTOMETER BENCH Pressure Regulator O GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA DILUENT INLET MOSN3S DILUENT Valve PHOTOMETER INLET Flow Control 800 J PHOTOMETER ZERO IN 1 1 E PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT INTERNAL 1 VENT CAL GAS 3 INLET ON Valve em P D mi yel GAS INPUT MANIFOLD E Ee on back panel yel Cal Gas Mass Flow Controller 1 jquiessy Joje1euec O 001 Jo13uo2 CAL GAS 1 INLET E CAL GAS 2 INLET INPUT GAS EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 6 7 Gas Flow through M700E with O Options when in GPT Mode 84 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator
209. centration of the calibrator output for this gas EXAMPLE MANUAL 0 0 0 CAL GAS FLOW 0 0000 LPM 0 ENTR EXIT TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM Toggle these keys to set the 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT calibration gas flow rate ENTR accepts the new settings and Returns to the MAIN Menu Toggle these keys to set the target concentration of the calibrator output for this gas MANUAL 0 DILUENT FLOW 0 000 LPM 0 0 0 Toggle these keys to set the calibration gas flow rate MANUAL GEN SET POINT 000 0 MV 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the CONSTANT drive voltage of the O3 generator Figure A 2 MANUAL 0 0 0 GEN SET POINT 000 0 PPB 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set output concentration of the generator Only Appears when the O3 Generator Option is installed MAIN Menu GENERATE Submenu STANDBY GP7 GPTPS PPB 000 0 PPB 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the This key sets target concentration of gas the O Units of Measure STANDBY TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 Toggle these keys to set the NO amp O ombined flow rate Only appears when warning messages are active 2 Only appears when an one or moew calibration Sequences are programmed into the calibrator s memory Only
210. changing the gas type for a single gas cylinder Table 3 15 M700E Units of Measure List UGM micrograms per cubic meter 000 0 PPT parts per thousand 00 00 Repeat the above steps for each of the M700E calibrator s four gas inlet port If no gas is present on a particular port leave it set for the default setting of NONE 40 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 3 8 2 Setting Up the Ports with Multiple Gas Cylinders Some applications utilize canisters of source gas that contain more than one component gas To program a cylinder containing multiple gases press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode f PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL USER CYLINDER GAS CONFIG PRTI 1 NONE PORT1 NONE NONE The label for this key will change dynamically Continue pressing this key until the desired as the available gas list gas type is reached is cycled PORT1 0 0 PPM H23 Toggle these Q 2 5 n0 PPM ENTR EXIT keys to change LER for EXIT discards the new the Ist gas Toggle this key to change the GAS NAME units of measure for 1st gas 1 ENTR accepts the new GAS J gt SETUP XX 25 0 PPM H23 PREV ADD DEL EDIT Continue pressing this key until the desired gas type is reached SETUP X X PORT1 0 0 PPM CO Toggle these 0 5 o D PPM
211. ciency and durability of the O3 generators UV LAMP TEMP lamp Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11 1 Affects proper flow rate of Cal gas MFC s CAL PRESSURE Possible causes of faults are the same as MFC PRESSURE WARNING from Table 11 1 Affects proper flow rate of Diluent gas MFC s DIL PRESSURE Possible causes of faults are the same as MFC PRESSURE WARNING from Table 11 1 Same as REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING from Table 11 1 If the Box Temperature is out of range ensure that the Box Temperature typically runs 7 C warmer than ambient temperature BOX TEMP The Exhaust Fan is running Ensure there is sufficient ventilation area to the side and rear of instrument to allow adequate ventilation If the value displayed is too high the UV Source has become brighter Adjust the variable gain potentiometer on the UV Preamp Board in the optical bench If the value displayed is too low lt 200mV Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply lt 2500mV Lamp output has dropped adjust UV Preamp Board or replace lamp PHOTO MEASURE amp PHOTO REFERENCE If the value displayed is constantly changing Bad UV lamp Defective UV lamp power supply Failed lC Bus If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than 10mV between zero and span gas Defective leaking switching valve Gas flow problems directly affect the accuracy of the photometer measurements and therefore PHOTO
212. d 6 2 above and assume a M700E calibrator with at least one source gas mass flow controller capable of 3 0 LPM output Using the example from Equations 6 1 and 6 2 above press STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ is in standby mode STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO MAN PURGE STANDBY CAL GAS TYPE ZERD ZERO ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types as programmed during initial setup Continue pressing this key until the desired gas type appears STANDBY CAL GAS 502 502 ENTR EXIT STANDBY CAL GAS FLOW 0 000 LPM 3 Bb ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Loo Loi flow rate ENTR accepts the new gas flow rates Toggle these keys to set the target Srow STANDBY DILUENT GAS FLOW 0 000 LPM b amp ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys flow rate to set the target concentration ENTR accepts the STANDBY OG GEN MODE OFF new gas flow rates This Key OFF CNST REF BNCH ENTR EXIT Turns the the O4 Generator OFF ON 7 a REF The concentration control loop will use the generators reference detector as input These keys sel a target BNCH The concentration cancentralien for the O Generator control loop will use the photemeter bench This key sets a CONSTANT drive voltage for the Cx Generator STANDBY G3 GEM SET POINT 0 0 MV STANDBY 3 GEN SET POINT 000 0 PPB
213. d from the device to ground 268 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 12 3 COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE I didn t feel a shock so there was no electro static discharge The human nervous system isn t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that I didn t touch it so there was no electro static discharge Electro Static charges are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge It still works so there was no damage Sometimes the damaged caused by electro static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately More likely the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse weakening the trace This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time but even the very low voltage and current levels of the device s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged device is installed causes down time lost data lost productivity as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equ
214. d only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual If you use the M700E in a manner other than that for which it was intended unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences NOTE Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the M700E or any other Teledyne API products can be obtained by contacting Teledyne API s Customer Service Department at 800 324 5190 or Via the internet at http www teledyne api com 05622 REV B i DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Safety Messages M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES ii 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL 1 LIN miss 3 1 1 Model 700E Calibrator emere ennemi nennen nennen inen 3 1 2 Using 5 t 4 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS AND WARRANTY 7 2 1 Sp6GifiCatioris t es Reet 7 2 2 CE Mark ComplianGe DRE rep iubet bibe tes be 8 2 3 EE bed T ote ete eee dud eed ive pv
215. d to the A D converter Reference ground and 4 096 VDC During calibration the device measures these two voltages and outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU The CPU uses these values to compute the converter s offset and slope then uses these factors for subsequent calculations 9 3 5 2 Sensor Inputs The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A D converter through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard Terminating resistors 100 kQ on each of the inputs prevent crosstalk between the sensor signals The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A D through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard 100K terminating resistors on each of the inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals 9 3 5 3 Thermistor Interface This circuit provides excitation termination and signal selection for several negative coefficient thermistor temperature sensors located inside the calibrator 9 3 5 4 Analog Outputs The M700E calibrator comes equipped with one analog output It can be set by the user to output a signal level representing any one of the test parameters see Table 6 13 and will output an analog VDC signal that rises and falls in relationship with the value of the chosen parameter 206 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 3 5 5 External Digital I O The
216. de PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M700E OTHERWISE ENO OF SEQUENCES INS SEQ MAME X STEPS INS DEL EDIT SETUP X X 0 SET EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Scrolls back and forth between Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences SETUP X X REPEAT COUNT 1 lt SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X REPEAT COUNT 0 0 0 1 ENTER EXIT EXIT discards the new REPEAT COUNT ENTR accepts the new REPEAT Toggle these keys to set the repeat count from 1 to 100 Enter 0 to cause the sequence to loop indefinitely a 05622 REV B 95 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 1 4 Using the M700E s Internal Clock to Trigger Sequences Sequences can be set to trigger based on the M700E s internal clock The sequence can be set up to start at a predetermined date and time It can also be set to repeat after a predetermined delay time So activate and sequence timer press Make sure that the M700E GEN STBY SEQ SETUP is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currentl programmed inte t
217. de GEN ST8Y SEQ SETUP LI PRIMARY SETUP MENU SOURCE GAS CONFIG D CYL USER 6 GAS NONE 55 28 890 GM NEXT Continue pressing next until 14 GAS PROP MAS8 28 890 GM NEXT EDIT 28 890 ts the Molar Mass of ambient air GAS PROP MASS 28 850 GM This number is used as a default value for all user NAME MASS gasses until reset by the operator GAS NAME PROP EXIT discards the new 0 3 2 Q 8 6 ENTR EXIT MOLAR MASS Toggle these keys ENTR accepts the new MOLAR MASS 2 to change the MOLAR MASS GAS PROP 55 32 086 GM NAME MASS NOTE If the contents of the bottle are predominantly use the molar mass of N 28 01 3 3 7 4 Enabling and Disabling Gas Types By default all of the gases listed in Section 3 3 6 and the four undefined USER gases are ENABLED Any of these can be disabled Disabling a gas type means that it does not appear in certain prompts during portions of the M700E s operation e g setting up sequences and is not figured into the calibrators calculating when determining calibration mixtures 38 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started To disable a gas type press Make sure that the M7OOE is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ 2 PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL USER 0 GAS NONE 5 28 890 GM NEXT Continue pressing next u
218. del 700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Pg B 2 05624 Rev A M700E Spare Parts List Part Number 000940100 ORIFICE 3 MIL 03 GEN 003290000 THERMISTOR BASIC VENDOR ASSY KB 006120100 ASSY UV LAMP OZONE GENERATOR 014540300 CONTROLLER MFC HFC 212 100SCCM 014550300 CONTROLLER HFC 212 10 SLM 014570100 ASSY INLET MANIFOLD M700A E KB 014900000 ASSY GPT M700 016590100 ASSY GPT VALVE M700E 022710000 ABSORPTION TUBE QUARTZ M400A E KB 024710000 ASSY TUBING CLEAR FEP 1 8 TU1 6FT 024720000 ASSY TUBING B F TU0000002 6FT 024730000 ASSY TUBING TU0000005 6FT 024750000 ASSY TYGON TUBING B F TU0000009 6FT 039530700 MASK FRONT PANEL M700E OBS 040010000 ASSY FAN REAR PANEL E SERIES 040030500 PCA PRESS SENSORS 2X 700E KB 040030600 PCA PRESS SENSORS 1X 700E OZONE OPT 041200000 PCA DET PREAMP w OP20 M400E M700E M703 041200200 PCA DET PREAMP w OP20 M700E M400E M703 041240001 MANIFOLD DETECTOR M400E KB 041270000 LAMP BLOCK M400E KB 041280000 LAMP SPACER M400E KB 041300000 EXAUST MANIFOLD M400E KB 041440000 PCA DC HEATER TEMP SENSOR OPTICAL BENCH 041710000 ASSY CPU CONFIGURATION E SERIES 042010000 ASSY SAMPLE THERMISTOR M400E 042580000 PCA KEYBOARD E SERIES W V DETECT 042900100 PROGRAMMED FLASH E SERIES 045230100 PCA RELAY CARD E SERIES 046740000 ASSY PUMP 12VDC M460M M700E 048190300 ASSY RELAY PS M700E 049290000 CLIP THERMISTOR HOLDER 0
219. distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the calibrator The relay PCA communicates with the motherboard over the 1 bus and can be used for detailed trouble shooting of power problems and valve or heater functionality Generally the relay PCA is located in the right rear quadrant of the calibrator and is mounted vertically on the back of the same bracket as the instrument s DC power supplies however the exact location of the relay PCA may differ from model to model see Figure 3 3 or Figure 3 4 Status LED s Watchdog DC Power Supply D2 through D16 Status LED D1 Test Points Connector Power Connections for DC Heaters DC Valve Control Drivers Valve Option Control AC Power Connector IN DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE DC Power Distribution Connectors Figure 9 5 Relay PCA This is the base version of the Relay PCA It does not include the AC relays and is used in instruments where there are no AC powered components requiring control A plastic insulating safety shield covers the empty AC Relay sockets CAUTION NEVER REMOVE THIS SAFETY SHIELD WHILE THE INSTRUMENT IS PLUGGED IN AND TURNED ON THE CONTACTS OF THE AC RELAY SOCKETS BENEATH THE SHIELD CARRY HIGH AC VOLTAGES EVEN WHEN NO RELAYS ARE PRESENT 202 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 3 3 1 Val
220. e e e Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD gt SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until AUTO LEAK CHECK Test Runs Automatically PREV NEXT ENTR At 17 of elapsed time the program shuts the DILUENT IN and CYL1 port valves Then measures the total ELT drop in internal gas pressure if any 17 for the duration of the test A drop of 2 2 PSIG causes the test to FAIL Run time is approximately 5 minutes Pressure displayed is the actual pressure read by the instruments internal sensors DIAG LEAK LEAK CHECK 30 0 PSIG At the beginning of the test this should equal the pressure of the Diluent Gas Zero Air bottle 7 DIAG LEAK LEAK CHECK PASSED 29 8 PSIG EXIT 10 2 1 4 Returning the M700E to Service after Performing an Auto Leak Check 1 Remove all of the caps from the EXHAUST CAL GAS OUTPUTS 2 and the VENT port and from the internal vent 2 Oninstruments with an optional photometer reconnect the internal gas lines so that the Sensor PCA and pump are functional Remove the tee from the DILUENT IN and CYL 1 Reconnect the ZERO AIR SOURCE to the DILUENT IN Reconnect Cal Gas bottle to CYL 1 and open the bottles outlet port Replace the calibrator s top cover amp The calibrator is now ready to be used 230 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Main
221. e Relay PCA can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the status LEDs on the Relay PCA see Section 11 3 2 and using the SIGNAL I O submenu under the DIAG menu see Section 11 1 3 to toggle each LED ON or OFF If D1 on the Relay PCA is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question Heater power Valve Drive etc toggles properly using the Signal I O function then the associated control device on the Relay PCA is bad Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced Table 11 10 lists the control device associated with a particular function Table 11 10 Relay PCA Control Devices CONTROL FUNCTION DEVICE IN SOCKET UV Lamp Heater Q2 No Gen Heater Q3 No All Valves U5 Yes 11 4 7 VALVE DRIVER PCA Like the Relay PCA the valve driver PCA is checked by observing the condition of the its status LEDs on the Relay Board see Section 11 3 2 and using the SIGNAL I O submenu under the DIAG menu see Section 11 1 3 to toggle each LED ON or OFF If D2 on the valve driver board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question Gas Cyl 1 Purge Valve etc toggles properly using the Signal I O function then the control IC is bad 05622 REV B 251 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 4 8 INPUT GAS PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR
222. e end of an already existing chain do not forget to remove JP2 pins 21 lt 22 on the multi drop PCA on the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain Close the instrument Using straight through DB9 male gt DB9 Female cables interconnect the host and the calibrators as shown in Figure 7 4 NOTE Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link between the Host and the first instrument and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain KEY Gy Female DB9 Male DB9 Host RS 232 port CALIBRATOR CALIBRATOR TAPI Analyzer Last INSTRUMENT COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 Make Sure Jumper between JP2 pins 21 lt 22 is installed Figure 7 4 RS 232 Multi drop PCA Host Calibrator Interconnect Diagram 156 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 3 RS 485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2 As delivered from the factory COM2 is configured for RS 232 communications This port can be reconfigured for operation as a non isolated half duplex RS 485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet If you require full duplex or isolated operation please contact Teledyne API s Customer Service To reconfigure COM2 as an RS 285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position see Figure 7 7 e The R
223. e keys to set the 1 Only appears when the calibrator is in STANDBY mode Toggle these keys to edit molar mass of the gas Only appears when the calibrator is NOT running a programmed sequence create a 4 character name There are four user definable gases available in the M700E default names USR1 for the selected gas See Chapter 3 for more USR2 USR3 amp USR4 information Only appears if optional photometer bench is installed Figure A 4 PRIMARY SETUP Menu SOURCE GAS CONFIGURATION Submenu Pg A 6 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 MAIN MENU SETUP SEQ EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV NEXT INS DEL T PRNT EXIT Inserts a new sequence YES NO Edits existing sequence Cycles through list of already programmed calibration sequences SET SET gt NAME Create edit the name of the channel N f ti h umber of times to execute the same sequence I REPEAT COUNT repeatedly 1 100 or 0 to execute indefinitely CC INPUT Enables or Disables the calibrator s CC OUTPUT Enables or Disables the calibrator s digital contact closure inputs that can be used to initiate the sequences remotely digital contact closure outputs TIMER ENABLE Enables or Disables the calibrator s timer feature that allows the calibrator to
224. e new flow rate ENTR accepts the new gas flow rate SETUP DILUENT GAS FLOW 0 000 LPM 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new flow rate 0 6 0 ENTR accepts the new gas flow rater GEN MODE OFF SETUP XX OFF CNST REF BWCH ENTR EXIT REF The concentration control loop will use he generators reference detector as input This key sels a CONSTANT drive voltage for the Generator BNCH The concentration control loop will use the photometer bench These keys set larget concentration for the O Generator SETUP 03 GEN SET POINT 0 0 MV SETUP POINT 000 0 PPB 0 ENTR EXIT 0 0 0 9 n ENTR EXIT Gee Toggle these keys to Toggle these keys to set the CONSTANT dive voltage of ine Oy generatar set output CONCENTRATION of the C generator EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the SETUP DURATION 4 0 MIN new setting gt 0 0 1 D ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new lt lt lt s setting Toggle these keys to set DURATION ENTR accepts the of this step new setting SETUP 3 DURATION 10 0 MIN 7 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT NOTE If the user attempts to generate a source gas type that has not been entered into the M700E s gas library the sequence will freeze and after a certain time out period stop running 05622 REV B DCN 5169 109 PRINTED D
225. e of the Sample gas in the absorption tube reported in C 05622 REV B 223 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 9 7 4 2 Pneumatic Sensors for the O5 Photometer The sensors located on the pneumatic sensor just to the left rear of the generator assembly measure the absolute pressure and the flow rate of gas inside the photometer s absorption tube This information is used by the CPU to calculate the concentration of the sample gas See Equation 9 7 Both of these measurements are made downstream from the absorption tube but upstream of the pump A critical flow orifice located between the flow sensor and the pump maintains the gas flow through the photometer at 800 cm min The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument s front panel e PHOTOFLOW The flow rate of gas through the photometer measured in LPM e PHOTOSPRESS the pressure of the gas inside the absorption tube This pressure is reported in inches of mercury absolute in Hg A i e referenced to a vacuum zero absolute pressure This is not the same as PSIG USER NOTES 224 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 10 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp PROCEDURES Predictive diagnostic functions including failure warnings and alarms built into
226. e valve in question Electronic connections should be made as follows e Valves should be connected between one of the Valve Drive outputs and one of the Return pins e The external power supply must be connected to the Valve Driver Interface using the 12V coaxial input connector on the top right hand side of the assembly e The external supply in turn must be connected to 85 264V 47 63Hz mains The Valve Driver Outputs are mapped one for one to the Control Outputs 1 through 8 and can be manually actuated for troubleshooting using the Signal I O diagnostic function in the 7 software see Section 11 4 10 5 However the drive outputs are mapped in reverse to the status control bits such that Bit O LSB is valve drive 8 and Bit 7 is valve drive 1 60 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 9 NIST TRACEABLE PRIMARY STANDARD CERTIFICATION OPT 95A OPT 95B amp OPT 95C The Model M700E calibrator can be used as a Primary Ozone Standard if purchased with the O3 generator OPT 01A and photometer OPT 02A options For this application the performance of the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator calibrated to Standard Reference Photometer SRP Calibrators ordered with this option are verified and validated in accordance with the procedures prescribed by the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA under Title 40
227. each of the M700E s TEST CHANNEL output This over range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current To turn the over range feature on or off press From the AlO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT OVERRANGE ON lt SET SET EDIT EXIT Toggle this key DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT OVERRANGE ON to turn the Over Range ON ENTR EXIT feature lt ON OFF DIAG AIO TEST_OUTPUT OVERRANGE OFF OFF ENTR EXIT 122 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 9 1 5 Adding a Recorder Offset to the TEST CHANNEL Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point This can be achieved in the M700E by defining a zero offset a small voltage e g 10 of span To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until
228. ect Connections to Other Instruments Use this setup if you are connecting the M700E calibrator directly to other instruments without the use of any shared manifolds If the gas flow on this line is gt 5 SLPM the minimum O D must be 3 8 inch Sample Inlet CAL OUT M700E Mass Flow Calibrator Teledyne I nstruments E Series Gas Analyzer DILUENT IN s ar een Teledyne Instruments m m Sample Inlet SOURCE MODEL 701 9 GAS Zero Gas Generator Teledyne I nstruments 2 E Series Gas Analyzer If no second Instrument is connected to this outlet it MUST be capped Figure 3 11 Set up for M700E Connecting the Basic M700E to a Sample Manifold To determine if the gas flow on the vent line is 2 5 SLPM subtract the gas flow for each instrument connected to the outlets of the M700E from the TOTAL FLOW setting for the calibrator see Section 3 3 10 If the M7OOE has the optional photometer installed remember that this option requires 800 cc min 0 8 LPM of additional flow see Section 3 2 6 2 or Figure 5 2 EXAMPLE Your system has two analyzers each requiring 2SLPM of cal gas flow and the M700E includes the photometer If the TOTAL FLOW rate for the calibrator is set at 10 SLPM 10LPM 2LPM 2LPM 0 8 LPM 5 2LPM Therefore the vent would require a gas line with an O D 3 8 inch 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLE
229. ed about the permeation tube Once the M700E has stabilized the response to the permeation tube is not expected to change more than 5 if the zero air is provided for Teledyne API s M701 or other dry zero air source Teledyne API recommends that you purchase replacement permeation tubes from VICI METRONICS 2991 Corvin Drive Santa Clara CA 95051 USA Phone 408 737 0550 Fax 408 737 0346 5 10 1 PERMEATION TUBE SETUP FOR THE M700E 1 Press SETUP and GAS 2 Press PERM 3 Enter the elution rate for the permeation tube and Select the type of gas by pressing the gas button until the desired gas is shown NOTE The name of the gas produced by the permeation tube generator MUST be different than the name of any bottle connected to the calibrator 05622 REV B 63 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 4 Then enter the gas flow through the permeation tube This should be done with the flow standard connected at the outlet of the perm tube oven 5 10 2 PERMEATION TUBE CALCULATION The permeation tube concentration is determined by the permeation tube s specific output or elution rate which is normally stated in ng min the permeation tube temperature C and the air flow across it slpm The elution rate of the tube is normally stated at an operating temperature of 50 C and is usually printed on the tube s ship
230. ed the measure reference valve physically located on front left corner of the generator assembly see Figure 3 4 and Figure 9 14 alternates the gas stream flowing to the photometer between zero air diluent gas and the output from the generator This cycle takes about 6 seconds Table 9 3 M700E Photometer Measurement Reference Cycle TIME INDEX STATUS 0 sec Measure Reference Valve Opens to the Measure Path 0 2 sec Wait Period Ensures that the absorption tube has been adequately flushed of any previously present gasses 2 3 Seconds Calibrator measures the average UV light intensity of bearing Sample Gas I during this period 3 sec Measure Reference Valve Opens to the Reference Path 3 5 sec Wait Period Ensures that the absorption tube has been adequately flushed of O3 bearing gas 5 6 Seconds Calibrator measures the average UV light intensity of Non O3 bearing Sample Gas lo during this period CYCLE REPEAT EVERY 6 SECONDS 05622 REV B 219 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual DILUENT INLET DILUENT M700E Chassis Pressure Regulator Diluent Flow Control 1 0 LPM PHOTOMETER BENCH
231. ee Section 7 1 3 e If a modem is being used additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed See Section 7 2 e Incorrect setting of the DTE DCE Switch is set correctly See Section 7 1 1 e Verify that the cable P N 03596 that connects the serial COMM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is properly seated 11 4 12 2 Troubleshooting Calibrator Modem or Terminal Operation These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne API calibrator 1 Check cables for proper connection to the modem terminal or computer 2 Checkto ensure the DTE DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 7 1 1 3 Check to ensure the set up command is correct See Section 7 2 1 4 Verify that the Ready to Send RTS signal is at logic high The M700E sets pin 7 RTS to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission 5 Ensure the BAUD rate word length and stop bit settings between modem and calibrator match See Section 7 1 3 6 Use the RS 232 test function to send w characters to the modem terminal or computer See Section 7 1 5 7 Get your terminal modem or computer to transmit data to the calibrator holding down the space bar is one way the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data 8 Ensure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly NOTE Further help with serial communications is available i
232. egulator Relay PCA WARNING gt 15 PSIG or gt 25 PSIG Leak or blockage exists in the M700E s internal pneumatics Failed Generator Input pressure sensor The CPU cannot Bus failure RELAY BOARD WARN communicate with the Failed relay PCA Loose connectors wiring SYSTEM RESET The computer has rebooted This message occurs at power on If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted Failed 5 VDC power Fatal error caused software to restart Loose connector wiring VALVE BOARD WARN The CPU is unable to communicate with the valve board Bus failure Failed valve driver PCA Loose connectors wiring Only applicable for calibrators with the optional the generator installed 2 Only applicable for calibrators with the optional photometer installed 3 On instrument with multiple Cal Gas MFC s installed the MFC FLOW WARNING occurs when the flow rate requested is lt 10 of the range of the lowest rated MFC i e all of the cal gas MFC are turned off 11 1 2 FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools the test functions viewable from the calibrators front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the calibrators Theory of Operation see Chapter 9 The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the Nominal Range column of the c
233. en 32 Table 3 13 Possible Warning Messages at Start Up 33 Table 3 14 M7OOE Default Gas Ty Pes aca renti ael a eed RED RO REP RO c tfc a eic bet 35 Table 3 15 M70OE Units of Measure 5 trennen nennen 40 Table 5 1 Operating Mode Valve States for M700E Calibrator with Optional Generator 50 Table 5 2 Operating Mode Valve States for M700E Calibrator with Optional Generator and Photometer 52 Table 5 3 M700E Gas Flow Rate 53 Table 6 1 Test Functions Defined 71 Table 6 2 Calibrator Operating 72 Table 6 3 Status of Internal Pneumatics During STANDBY Mode sese 73 Table 6 4 Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE Mode sse emen 75 Table 6 5 Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE gt GPT 84 Table 6 6 Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE gt GPTPS 86 Table 6 7 Internal Pneumatics During Purge Mode sssssessseeeneeene nennen enne ener nenne 89 Table 6 8 Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set
234. ent accordingly NOTE e The minimum total flow should equal 150 of the flow requirements of all of the instruments to which the M700E will be supplying calibration gas e Example If the M700E is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures simultaneously to a system in composed of three analyzers each requiring 2 LPM the proper Total Flow output should be set at 2 2 2 x 1 5 7 500 LPM To set the TOTAL FLOW of the of the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP IL PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW FLOW MENU TARG STAT TARGET FLOW 2 000 Lpm Toggle these 0 2 0 0 0 NTR EXIT keys to change EXIT discards the new the target GAS NAME TOTAL FLOW rate ENTR accepts the new GAS NAME J gt FLOW MENU TARG STAT 05622 REV B 43 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual NOTE It is not recommended that your set the TOTAL FLOW rate to be lt 10 or gt 100 of the full scale rating For M700E s with multiple calibration mass flow controllers the limits are lt 10 of the lowest rated MFC or gt 100 of the combined full scale ratings for both mass flow controllers The TOTAL FLOW is also affected by the following e The GENERATE gt AUTO menu see Section 6 4 2 or e As part of a GENERATE ste
235. ent the input will draw When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature external resistors must be used to limit the current through the individual transistor outputs to lt 50mA 120 for 5V supply The pin assignments for the control outputs are Table 3 3 M700E Control Input Pin Assignments PIN STATUS DEFINITION CONDITION Outputs 1 through 12 respectively Closed if the sequence or sequence step activating output is operating Emitter BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together Digital Ground The ground level from the calibrator s internal DC power supplies 20 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 1 2 6 Connecting the Serial Ports If you wish to utilize either of the calibrator s two serial interface COMM ports refer to Chapter 7 of this manual for instructions on their configuration and usage 3 1 2 7 Connecting to a LAN or the Internet If your unit has a Teledyne API s Ethernet card Option 63 plug one end into the 7 CAT5 cable supplied with the option into the appropriate place on the back of the calibrator and the other end into any nearby Ethernet access port NOTE The M700E firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP If your network also supports DHCP the calibrator will automatically configure its LAN connection appropriately If your
236. er 5 D1 RED Watchdog Indicator Figure 9 7 Status LED Locations Relay PCA Table 9 1 Relay PCA Status LEDs LED COLOR DESCRIPTION FUNCTION Watchdog Circuit 1 bus 2 D1 Red operation Blinks when bus is operating properly D2 6 SPARE D7 Green Photometer Meas Ref Valve When lit the valve REFERENCE gas path D8 Green Os generator Valve status When lit the valve open to Os generator gas path D9 Green Photometer Pump status When lit the pump is turner on De Yellow GPT Valve status When lit the valve open to GT Chamber D10 14 SPARE D15 Yellow Photometer Heater Status n ramp heater 0162 Yellow Generator Heater Status generator Uv lamp fester is on Only applies calibrators with photometer options installed Only applies on calibrators with generator options installed 9 3 3 4 Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator D1 The most important of the status LEDs on the relay PCA is the red lC Bus watchdog LED It is controlled directly by the calibrator s CPU over the l C bus Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1 Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds indicating that the CPU or l C bus has stopped functioning this Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turns off all heaters and lamps 204 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169
237. erator cache un normalized concentration resolution 0 2 D 0 2 01 2 5 0 0 flow not specified in individual APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 700 Calibrator Operator s Manual B E ui 19200 AT YO amp DO amp HO amp 10 S0 2 amp BO amp N6 amp MO E0 Q1 8 0 AT YO amp DO amp HO amp 10 S0 2 amp BO amp N6 amp MO E0 Q1 amp wo 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Any character in the allowed character set Up to 100 characters long 0 65535 RS 232 COM baud rate Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface RS 232 COM1 modem initialization string Sent verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up or manually RS 232 COM mode flags Same settings as HS232 MODE 300 RS 232 COM baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Any character in the allowed character set Up to 100 characters long RS 232 COM2 modem initialization string Sent verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up or manually RS232 PASS 940331 0 999999 RS 232 log on password LINE DELAY MACHINE ID COMMAND PROMPT TEST CHAN ID 7 0 1000 RS 232 inter line transmit delay O disabled 0 9999 Unique ID number for instrument Any character RS 232 interface command in the allowed prompt Displayed
238. eries analyzers to be connected the same I O port of the host computer Because both of the DB9 connectors on the calibrator s back panel are needed to construct the multi drop chain COM2 is no longer available for separate RS 232 or RS 485 operation however with the addition of an Ethernet Option option 63 See Section 5 6 4 and 7 4 the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT LAN JP2 Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Cable to Ethernet Card Multidrop PCA Cable to Motherboard Figure 7 3 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multi drop PCA Option 62 Each calibrator or analyzer in the multi drop chain must have e One Teledyne API s Option 62 installed e One 6 straight through DB9 male gt DB9 Female cable Teledyne API s P N WR0000101 is required for each calibrator To set up the network for each instrument 1 Turn the instrument on and change its MACHINE ID code to a unique 4 digit number 2 Remove the top cover of the instrument and locate JP2 on the multi drop PCA 7 4 3 Ensure that the jumpers in place connecting pins 9 lt 10 and 11 lt 12 4 fthe instrument is to be the last instrument on the chain ensure that a jumper is in place connecting pins 21 lt 22 05622 REV B 155 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 5 If you are adding an instrument to th
239. es They can be set to e active whenever a particular calibration sequence is operating or e Activate deactivate as individual steps within a calibration sequence are run see Section 6 5 2 8 To assign a CC OUTPUT pattern code to a particular sequence press Make sure that M7ODE is in standby mode LC GEM STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M DOE OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ Xj STEPS 1 SETUPX X SET gt EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field ER eee Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences SETUP X X CC OUTPUT DISABLED SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP XX OUTPUT ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the ENTER EXIT new setting Toggle this Key ENTR accepts the to turn the CC output ON OFF new setting 7 7 SETUP CC GUTPUT O 00000090000 ENTER EXIT EXIT discards the on peu LL wee Cursor one character left or ENTR accepts the right new setting 7 Toggle this key ta turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 or 1 Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control pins located on the back of the M7ODE see Figure 3 2 The left most bit is Bit 1 the next bit ta the right
240. es for external shipping damage If damaged please advise the shipper first then Teledyne API 2 Included with your calibrator is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory This record titled Final Test and Validation Data Sheet P N 05731 is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument It should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument 3 Carefully remove the top cover of the calibrator and check for internal shipping damage e Remove the locking screw located in the top center of the Front panel e Remove the two screws fastening the top cover to the unit one per side towards the rear e Slide the cover backwards until it clears the calibrator s front bezel e Lift the cover straight up NOTE Printed Circuit Assemblies PCAs are sensitive to Electro Static Discharges ESD too small to be felt by the human nervous system Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage CAUTION NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS WIRING HARNESSES OR ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER 4 Inspect the interior of the instrument to ensure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and properly seated 5 Check the connectors of the various internal w
241. et 1 500V 35 000V Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12 000V Worker at bench 100V 6 000V Poly bag picked up from bench 1 200V 20 000V Moving around in a chair padded 1 500V 18 000V with urethane foam 05622 REV B 267 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS A Primer on Electro Static Discharge M700E Operator s Manual 12 2 HOW ELECTRO STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits melting them or even vaporizing parts of them When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component s circuitry A quick comparison of the values in Table 12 1 with the those shown in the Table 12 2 listing device susceptibility levels shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60 of device failures are the result of damage due to electro static discharge Table 12 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE DEVICE DANSE DAMAGE BEGINS CATASTROPHIC OCCURRING AT DAMAGE AT MOSFET 10 100 VMOS 30 1800 NMOS 60 100 GaAsFET 60 2000 EPRO
242. etween 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active VENT_VALVE 1 0 vent valve open 1 close PERM HTR 2 0 permeation tube 2 heater on 1 off 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 21 APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual GPT_VALVE 0 open GPT bypass valve 1 close 0 photometer valve in reference position 1 measure position GEN VALVE 7 0 open Os generator valve O3 PUMP ON 0 pump on for photometer to measure Hors NN OUTPUT VALVE A 0 open output shut off valve A p 0 open output shut off valve B 1 close 0 open permeation tube 1 valve 1 close 0 open permeation tube 2 valve 10 PERM_VALVE_1 11 PERM VALVE 2 12 1 close PERM HTR 1 13 0 permeation tube 1 heater on 1 off PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER 14 0 photometer lamp heater on 5 1 off O3 GEN HEATER 1 0 Os generator lamp heater on 1 off Valve board digital output PCA9557 write default address hex valve board active 1 open cylinder gas valve 1 0 close 1 open cylinder gas valve 2 VALVE WATCHDOG CYL VALVE 1 CYL VALVE 2 CYL VALVE 3 3 1 open cylinder gas valve 3 0 close CYL VALVE 4 4 1 open cylinder gas valve 4 0 close PURGE VALVE 5 1 open purge valve 0 close INPUT VALVE 1 open input zero air shut off valve 0 close DIL VALVE 2 1 open diluent valve 2 0 open diluent valve 1 Front
243. external digital I O performs two functions The STATUS outputs carry logic level 5V signals through an optically isolated 8 pin connector on the rear panel of the calibrator These outputs convey on off information about certain calibrator conditions such as CONC VALID They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices The CONTROL outputs can be used to initiate actions by external peripheral devices in conjunction with individual steps of a calibration sequence see Section 6 5 2 8 The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source such as a PLC or data logger Section 6 5 1 5 Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel 9 3 5 6 I C Data Bus C is a two wire clocked digital serial I O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC 104 bus to 2 The data are then fed to the keyboard display interface and finally onto the relay PCA Interface circuits on the keyboard display interface and relay PCA convert the lC data to parallel inputs and outputs An additional interrupt line from the keyboard to the motherboard allows the CPU to recognize and service key strokes on the keyboard 9 3 5 7 Power up Circuit This circuit monitors the 5V power supply during calibrator start up and sets the analog outputs external digital I O ports and c
244. eys to scroll thaugh the list of available instructions SETUP X X INSERT STEP EXECSEG ENTR EXIT SETUP X X EXECUTE SEQUENCE A1 STANDBY EXECUTE SEQUENCE PREY NEXT ENTR EXIT PREY NEXT ENTR EXIT COC This message appears if there are no other sequences already programmed inte the gt SETUP X X 33 GURATION 10 0 MIN PREY NEXT IM amp DEL EDIT EXIT 05622 REV B DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 107 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 8 The CC OUTPUT Step This instruction causes the sequence to set or reset the M70OE s digital control outputs It is very useful in situations where the control outputs are being used to trigger other devices that need to be turned off and on in synch with the operation of the calibrator as it progress through the sequence To insert a CC OUTPUT step into a sequence press Starting at the STEPS Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions SETUP X X INSERT STEP PURGE ENTR EXIT SETUP X X CC OUTPUT DISABLED SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP XX CC OUTPUT ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT new Setting Toggle ENTR accepts the to turn the CC output ON OFF new Setting 7 SETUP X X CC 0100000000000 CH CH gt ENTER EXIT Moves the
245. f the movement is dependent upon the value and the sign of the differential signal 05622 REV B 195 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual The MFC s valve is an automatic metering solenoid type its height off the seat is controlled by the voltage in its coil The controller s circuitry amplifies and the differential signal obtained by comparing the control voltage to the flow sensor output and uses it to drive the solenoid valve The entire control loop is set up so that as solenoid valve opens and closes to vary the flow of gas through the shunt valve and sensor in an attempt to minimize the differential between the control voltage for the target flow rate and the flow sensor output voltage generated by the actual flow rate of gas through the controller This process is heavily dependant on the capacity of the gas to heat and cool Since the heat capacity of many gases is relatively constant over wide ranges of temperature and pressure the flowmeter is calibrated directly in molar mass units for known gases see Section Error Reference source not found Changes in gas composition usually only require application of a simple multiplier to the air calibration to account for the difference in heat capacity and thus the flowmeter is capable of measuring a wide variety of gases 9 2 1 2 Flow Control Assemblies for Optional O Components Whereas
246. f the calibrator Wait A MINIMUM OF 10 MINUTES BCAL XZRO TEST FUNCTION Message Field ZERO BCAL XZRO ARE YOU SURE Press YES to changes the YES NO OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the measurement Press NO to leave the photometer calibration values unchanged 174 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification 8 3 4 2 Photometer Span Calibration To set the response SLOPE for the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator s photometer press Toggle these keys until PASSWORD 717 Press the SPAN key if using the Internal Generator Press the XSPN Key if using an External Ch Generator Wait MINIMUM OF 10 MINUTES Toggle these keys to enter the exacl span cal value as measured by the reference phetometer see figures 8 3 and 8 4 GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE O3 GAS CONFIG MODE PHOT O3 GAS CONFIG BCAL DARK SYSTEM ENTER PASSWORD 0 0 0 ENT a BENCH CAL XSPN SPAN 2RO XSPN ENTR BCALXSPN TEST FUNCTION Message ZERO Allow calibration gas to gas to enter the PHOTOMETER IN at the rear of the calibrator XSPN J TEST FUNCTION Message ZERO SPAN XSPM ACTUAL CONC 400 0 PPB 0 0 4 0 XSPN ARE YOU SURE SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL 03 USER EXIT 0 40 ENTR EXIT T
247. flow 500 cm min e Calibrator with two calibration gas MFC s configured for 0 1 LPM and 0 5 LPM Calibration gas flow rates 5 001 to 6 000 LPM both MFC s active 1 001 LPM 5 000 LPM High MFC active 10 cm min 1 000 LPM Low MFC active When this option is installed the test measurements that show the MFC actual and target flows e g ACT CAL TARG CAL show the sum of the flows of all the active MFC s On the other hand the pressure test measurements show the pressure for only one MFC not the sum as it is assumed that gas pressure is the same for all MFC s 05622 REV B 53 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Chassis DILUENT Back Panel INLET O PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER Diluent ZERO IN Mass Flow Controller PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT Cal Gas CAL GAS 1 Mass Flow Controller 1 INLET EXHAUST CAL GAS 2 PHOTOMETER INLET CAL GAS OUTLET PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS 3 INLET CAL GAS Cal Gas OUTPUT 2 Mass Flow Controller 2 CAL GAS 4 INLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD on back panel GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 5 3 Basic M700E with Multiple Ca
248. found in normal oxygen O2 that is essential for life Because of its relatively short half life ozone cannot be bottled and stored for later use and there fore must always be generated on site by an ozone generator The two main principles of ozone generation are UV light and corona discharge While the corona discharge method is most common because of its ability to generate very high concentrations up to 50 it is inappropriate for calibration needs since the level of fine control over the concentration is poor Also the corona discharge method produces a small amount of as a byproduct which also may be undesirable in a calibration application The UV light method is most feasible in calibration applications where production of low accurate concentrations of ozone desired This method mimics the radiation method that occurs naturally from the sun in the upper atmosphere producing the ozone layer An ultra violet lamp inside the generator emits a precise wavelength of UV Light 185 nm Ambient air is passed over an ultraviolet lamp which splits some of the molecular oxygen O5 in the gas into individual oxygen atoms that attach to other existing oxygen molecules O forming ozone Inlet from Diluent Source Valve Reference Detector To GPT Chamber Control Assembly Exhaust Figure 9 13 Generator Internal Pneumatics 05622 REV B 213 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONT
249. g fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields e Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device 6 Once you have arrived at your destination allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate e Connect your wrist strap to ground e If you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e If you are at a anti ESD work bench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds 7 Open the container 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from Teledyne API s Customer Service Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric charges To prevent damage from ESD Teledyne API ships all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed anti ESD containers Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti ESD container during shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped ensure that you Always unpack shipments from Teledyne API s Customer Service by 1 Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti ES
250. get concentration Should be equal to the expected NO concentration Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM Toggle these keys ta set DURATION of this step SETUP PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions SETUP INSERT STEP GPT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT GPT GPT 0 0 PPB NO 0 0 0 0 PPB EXIT GPT GPT 0 0 PPB 0 0 0 0 PPB EXIT GPT TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT DURATION 10 0 MIN 0 1 0 0 COZ ENTR EXIT SETUP PREY NEXT 3 DURATION 10 0 MIN INS DEL EDIT EXIT EXIT discards the new gas type amp target concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp target concentration EXIT discards the new gas type amp target concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp target concentration 22 EXIT discards the new flow rate ENTR accepts the new gas flow rate 77 EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 7 104 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 2 3 The GPTPS Step This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE gt GPTPS see Section 6 4 5 for information on choosing the correct input values for this step At the end of the programming seq
251. get TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM SETUP DURATION 1 0 MIN D 0 1 D ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set DURATION of this step Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types as programmed during initial setup Toggle this key to to scroll through the available units of measure EXIT discards the new gas type amp target concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp target concentration EXIT discards the new flow rate ENTR accepts the NOTE If the user attempts to generate a source gas type that has not been entered into the M700E s gas library the sequence will freeze and after a certain time out period stop running 05622 REV B DCN 5169 103 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 2 2 The GPT Step This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE GPT see Section 6 4 4 for information on choosing the correct input values for this step At the end of the programming sequence the M700E firmware will automatically insert a DURATION step that needs to be defined To insert a GPT step into a sequence press Starting at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu INSERT STEP GENERATE Toggle these keys to set the NO target concentration MUST be at least 10 Higher than the Target Concentration 77 Toggle these keys to set ihe NO tar
252. going commands for the various devices such as the photometer pump the UV lamp power supply or the UV Lamp heater are issued via the 1 bus to circuitry on the relay PCA which turns them ON OFF The CPU also issues commands over the C bus that cause the relay PCA to cycle the measure reference valve back and forth Incoming data from the UV light detector is amplified locally then converted to digital information by the motherboard Output from the photometers temperature sensors is also amplified and converted to digital data by the motherboard The concentration of the sample gas is computed by the CPU using this data along with gas pressure and flow data received from the M700E s pressure sensors 9 7 4 1 Photometer Temperature Control In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M700E s photometer is maintained at a constant 58 C This is intentionally set at a temperature higher than the ambient temperature of the M700E s operating environment to ensure that local changes in temperature do not affect the UV Lamp If the lamp temperature falls below 56 C or rises above 61 C a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA Section 9 3 3 2 The following TEST functions report these temperatures and are viewable from the instrument s front panel e PHOTOLTEMP The temperature of the UV Lamp reported in C e PHOTOSTEMP The temperatur
253. h certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply However the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply 1 Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that 15VDC is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector 2 If this voltage is incorrect check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11 4 3 3 Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV lamp power supply PCA see Figure 9 21 e 4500 mVDC 10 mVDC between TP1 and grnd lf this voltage is incorrect either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the C bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA e 5VDC between TP3 and TP4 grnd e If this voltages is less than 4 8 or greater than 5 25 either the 5 VDC power supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty e Ifthe above voltages check out it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply e Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists replace the Lamp Power Supply 05622 REV B 263 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 6 TROUBLE SHOOTING THE OPTIONAL O GENERATOR The only significant components of the O3 generator that might reasonable malfunction is
254. h mter die eee de alae 150 1103 Data Types heiter HERI eder d UD de t HG e eee 150 TASCA Status ioter Reo ente EG ode ete die e 151 7 1 7 5 COMM Port Password Security enne nnne nennen nens 152 7 2 Remote Access by sinn snnt rennen 153 7 2 1 Multi drop RS 232 Set Up i Lee el ui ae cones omit an here ea aree dr ud dd e 155 7 3 RS 485 Configuration of GOMD tenia bra ite eene benc Libre dd 157 7 4 Remote Access via the Ethernet enne nns 159 7 4 1 Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud 159 7 4 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP sssssssseeee een 159 7 4 2 1 Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses sssssseee emen 162 7 4 3 Changing the Calibrators HOSTNAME ssssseeeeeneneeeneenen nne 164 7 5 APICOM Remote Control 165 8 M700E CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION esses nnne nennen nnn nnn 166 8 1 Viewing the Performance Statistics for the M700E s MFC S sssssssssssseeeeeme enne 166 8 2 Calibrating the Output of the M700E s MFC
255. h new concentration flow point that is entered into the instrument Once the instrument has several points memorized in its cache any new point that is entered will automatically be estimated within 1 error with photometer and 10 error with O3 generator and GPTPS NOTE This adjustment is only valid for the concentration used during the Pre Set operation GPT Presets must be re run for each different target value In order to keep the resulting concentration of O3 consistent with the GPT mixture being simulated the instrument s software adjust the flow rate of the diluent gas to substitutes an amount of diluent gas equal to the amount of NO gas that would normally be used 6 4 5 1 M700E Calibrator GPTPS Operation The following table and figures show the status of the M700E s internal pneumatic components and internal gas flow when the instrument is in GPTPS generating modes Table 6 6 Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE gt GPTPS Mode VALVES X Closed Open errs 0 OFF 1 Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed The valve associated with the cylinder containing NO source gas is open 3 In instrument with multiple MFC s the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested 86 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELE
256. he M7OOE OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS ail SETUPX X 0 SET gt EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits Ihe sequence shown in the message field in the message field Scrolls back and forth between 2 SETUP XX TIMER ENABLE DISABLED SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X TIMER ENABLE OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT new seltin peu turn the TIMER ENTR accepts the ENABLE ON OFF new selting 7 SETUP XX TIMER ENABLE ENABLED SET EDIT EXIT 96 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator To specify a starting time for the sequence press Make sure that the M700E n rm GEN STBY SEQ SETUP r is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEG MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M700E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ X STEPS INS DEL EDIT SETUP SET EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field ias rs elfe ostiis Continue pressing SET until existing sequences SETUP XX TIMER ENABLE ENABLED SET SET EDIT SETUP XX TIMER START 01 06 00 00 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X IMER START 01 JAN 06 00 00 x a EXIT di
257. he Message field displays the Test Function currently selected It is recommended that you use an Span concentration of 400 PPB EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting j Press YES to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the measurement Press NO to leave the photorneter calibration values unchanged 05622 REV B DCN 5169 175 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 8 3 5 PHOTOMETER DARK CALIBRATION The Dark Calibration Test turns off the Photometer UV Lamp and records any offset signal level of the UV Detector Preamp Voltage to Frequency Converter circuitry This allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the Photometer detection circuit that might affect the output of the detector circuitry and therefore the calculation of O3 concentration To activate the Dark Calibration feature GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEG MORE SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL O3 USER GAS CONFIG MODE PHOT GAS CONFIG CAL DARK CALIBRATING DARK OFFSET DARK CAL 34 COMPLETE The DARK CAL procedure progresses automatically until DARK CAL Successful No INVALID DARK CAL OFFSZXXXX X MV 176 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M
258. he front panel display and keyboard through these user friendly menus To assist in navigating the system s software a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this manual NOTE The flowcharts in this chapter depict the manner in which the front panel display keyboard interface is used to operate the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator They depict typical representations of the display during the various operations being described They are not intended to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your system NOTE The ENTR key may disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR key will reappear 6 1 TEST FUNCTIONS A variety of TEST functions are available for viewing at the front panel whenever the calibrator is at the MAIN MENU These functions provide information about the present operating status of the calibrator and are useful during troubleshooting see Chapter 11 Table 6 1 lists the available TEST functions To view these TEST functions press 05622 REV B 69 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual STANDBY ACT CAL 0 000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP e ACT CAL Vai
259. ibrated PHOTO SLOPE Blocked Gas Flow Faulty Sample Pressure Sensor or circuitry Bad incorrect Span Gas concentration PHOTO OFFSET Values outside range indicate Contamination of the Zero Air supply Time of Day clock is too fast or slow TIME To adjust see Section 6 7 Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead Only appears when the optional generator is installed Only appears when the optional photometer is installed 242 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 1 3 USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I O FUNCTION The Signal I O parameters found under the DIAG Menu combined with a thorough understanding of the instruments Theory of Operation found in Chapter 9 are useful for troubleshooting in three ways e The technician can view the raw unprocessed signal level of the calibrator s critical inputs and outputs e Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be manually exercised e The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these signals on the operation of the calibrator Figure 11 1 is an example of how to use the Signal I O menu to view the raw voltage of an input s
260. ignal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM Make sure that lt TST TST GEM STBY SEG the M7OOE is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM WARS FLOW DIAG EXIT SETUP XX ENTER PASSWORD B18 amp 1 amp ENTR EXIT Taggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD DIAG SIGNAL LO NEXT ENTR EXIT coz 0 CONTROL IN 1 OFF PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to cycle through the VARS 2 1 CONTROL IN 2 OFF Use the JUMP key to go directly to a specific signal see Appendix A for list PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT JUMPTO of all FO SIGNALS gt b b JUMP ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set No of the VAR to JUMP to EXAMPLE 42 4 2 JUMP ENTR EXIT co 42 VALVE 1 OFF PREV MEXT JUMP OFF PRAT EXI On status signals this Pressing the PRNT key will send a key toggles the signal formatted printout to the serial port ON OFF gt and can be captured with computer or other output device Figure 11 1 Example of Signal I O Function 05622 REVB 243 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 2 USING
261. igure 11 5 Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA Table 11 8 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes NAME TEST POINT TP AND WIRE COLOR Dgnd 1 Black 5V 2 Red Agnd 3 Green 15V 4 Blue 15V 5 Yellow 12R 6 Purple 12V 7 Orange 05622 REV B 249 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in Table 11 9 and an oscilloscope in AC mode with band limiting turned on can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise gt 100 mV p p Table 11 9 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels POWER CHECK RELAY PCA TEST POINTS 11 4 4 C BUS Operation of the IC bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA amp D2 on the Valve Driver PCA in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly the lC bus is operating properly if e D1 onthe relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA is flashing or e Pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display There is a problem with the I C bus if e Both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA are ON OFF Constantly and pressing a key on the front panel DOES NOT result in a change to the display If the keyboard i
262. in 2 and transmit data on pin 3 e DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2 A switch located below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to switch between DTE for use with data terminals or DCE for use with modems Since computers can be either DTE or DCE check your computer to determine which mode to use 05622 REV B 141 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 2 COMM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS AND CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS Received from the factory the calibrator is set up to emulate an RS 232 DCE device e RS 232 COM1 RS 232 fixed DB 9 male connector o Baud rate 19200 bits per second baud o Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit o Parity None e 2 RS 232 configurable to RS 485 DB 9 female connector o Baud rate 115000 bits per second baud o Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit o Parity None Male DB 9 RS 232 Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer As seen from outside analyzer GND GND DTE mode GND DCE mode Figure 7 1 Default Pin Assignments for Back Panel COMM Port Connectors RS 232 DCE amp DTE The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10 pin connectors on the CPU card CN3 COM1 and CN4 COM2 142 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TE
263. in the cylinder e g NO or CH4 using the GEN AUTO GEN MANUAL buttons or a preprogrammed calibration SEQUENCE press ACT CAL 3 000 LPM The M7OOE is actively MANUAL generating a lt TST TST gt GEN STBY ACT calibration mixture using a multi gas bottle _ Do not get the Continue pressing TST or TST gt until the and ACT CAL test ACT test function appears functions confused MANUAL lt TST TST GEN STBY ACT ACT 150 0 PPB NO Cycles through as many gasses as MANUAL were recorded for lt TST TST GEN STBY ACT this Cylinder during initial setup fo the MTOOE ACT 785 0 PPB CH4 MANUAL lt TST TST GEN STBY ACT ACT 1 2 PPB NO2 NOTE If the ACT gt button only appears if the M700E is generating gas from a multiple gas cylinder For NO cylinders the instrument will only display the amount of NO in the calibration mixture if the concentration of NO present in the bottle is known and was programmed into the bottle s definition see Section 3 3 8 6 4 7 1 Using the M700E Calibrator as a O3 Photometer If the M700E calibrator is equipped with the optional photometer the ACT test function allows it to be used as an Os photometer to measure external sources of O3 05622 REV B 91 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 5 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SE
264. inated ensure the cable properly connected 05622 REV B 143 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 3 COMM PORT BAUD RATE To select the baud rate of either one of the COMM Ports press GEN STBY SEQ o m U PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 SETUP X X COM1 MODE 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 SET SET EDIT EXIT Toggle these keys to cycle through the COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 available Baud rates 300 PREV NEXT EXIT 4800 9600 19200 1 BAUD RATE 19200 2 PREV NEXT ENTR Exm EXIT ges the new ENTR accepts the new setting JF 144 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 1 4 COMM PORT COMMUNICATION MODES Each of the calibrator s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes listed in Table 7 1 As modes are selected the calibrator sums the Mode ID numbers and displays this combined number on the front panel display For example if quiet mode 01 computer mode 02 and Multi Drop enabled mode 32 are selected the Calibrator would display a combined MODE ID of 35 Table 7 1 COMM Port Communication Modes ID DE
265. ing abilities of the pink poly bags but also when properly sealed create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon usually black in color are also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti ESD bag The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape such as Scotch tape from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away 270 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 12 4 2 BASIC ANTI ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument Rack When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power supply 1 Attach your anti ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else e Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument chassis e This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its com
266. ing up and therefore many of its subsystems Fault BLINKING are not yet operating within their optimum ranges Various warning messages will appear 3 3 3 WARNING MESSAGES Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside be specified limits during the calibrator s warm up period the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up If warning messages persist after the 30 minutes warm up period is over investigate their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Chapter 11 of this manual To view and clear warning messages press SYSTEM RESET Suppresses the c FS GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP warning messages SYSTEM RESET MSG returns the active warnings to the message field GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP SYSTEM RESET Press CLR to clear the current message If more than one warning is active the next message will take its place GEN STBY SEQ MSG GLR SETUP SYSTEM ANALOG CAL WARNING TEST CLR SETUP Once the last warning has been cleared the ACT CAL function returns wil be NOTE If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it the message may indicate a real problem and notan ACT CAL 0 000 LPM displayed in the calibrator s Mali MESSAGE FIELD GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP artifact of the warm up period Table 3 13 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up 32 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMEN
267. inlet ports these valves are used to select the gas type to be used by opening and closing off gas flow from the various bottles upstream of the MFC s NOTE Each valve is rated for up to 40 PSI zero air pressure and the source gas pressure should be between 25 to 30 PSI and never more than 35 PSI Exceeding 35 PSI may cause leakage that could cause unwanted gases to be included in the calibration mixture By closing all of the four source gas input valves so that only zero air is allowed into the calibrator the entire pneumatic system can be purges with zero air without having to manipulate the MFC s For instrument in which the generator GPT pneumatics are installed a glass volume carefully selected per the U S E P A guidelines is used to optimize NO creation See Figure 3 5 and Figure 3 6 for descriptions of the internal pneumatics for the M700E calibrator 9 2 1 GAS FLOW CONTROL The precision of gas flow through the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is centrally critical to its ability to mix calibration gases accurately This control is established in several ways 9 2 1 1 Diluent and Source Gas Flow Control Diluent and source gas flow in the M700E calibrator is a directly and dynamically controlled buy using highly accurate Mass Flow Controller These MFC s include internal sensors that determine the actual flow of gas though each and feedback control circuitry that uses this data to adjust the flow as
268. installed 4 Only appears if optional Os generator is installed 72 see Appendix A L Only appears if optional 2nd Cal Gas MFC is installed 5 DIAG Menu is inactive while instrument is in GENERATE mode OFF 7DO NOT Edit the settings for the MFC drives Figure A 7 SECONDARY SETUP Menu DIAG Submenu Basics 05623 Rev DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 9 APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual MAIN MENU gt SETUP gt MORE 3J DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 818 PREV NEXT SIGNAL I O PREV ANALOG OUTPUT Press ENTR to start test 0 11 CONTROL IN 1 THRU 12 12 23 CONTROL OUT 1 THRU 12 24 ST SYSTEM OK 25 ST CAL ACTIVE 26 ST DIAG MODE 27 ST TEMP ALARM 28 ST PRESS ALARM 29 PERM VALVE 1 30 PERM HTR 1 31 VENT VALVE 32 RELAY WATCHDOG 33 VALVE 34 PHOTO_REF_VALVE 35 O3 GEN VALVE 36 O3 PUMP ON 37 OUTPUT VALVE A 38 OUTPUT VALVE B 39 PHOTO LAMP HEATER 40 O3 GEN HEATER 41 VALVE WATCHDOG 42 CYL VALVE 1 43 CYL VALVE 2 44 VALVE 3 45 CYL VALVE 4 46 PURGE VALVE 47 INPUT VALVE 48 MAINT MODE 49 LANG2 SELECT 50 SEQUENCE LED 51 AUTO TIMER LED 52 FAULT LED 53 AUDIBLE BEEPER 54 INTERNAL ANALOG to VOLTAGE SIGNALS 72 see Appendix A ON OFF Figure A 8 AOUTS CALIBRATED ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION lt SET SET gt CAL I
269. int Scientific notation is not permitted For example 1 0 1234 5678 0 1 1 are all valid floating point numbers e Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I O signals that may assume only two values They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF e Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types such as data channel names which may contain letters and numbers They consist of a quotation mark followed by one or more printable characters including spaces letters numbers and symbols and a final quotation mark For example 1 123abc and lt gt are all valid text strings It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string e Some commands allow you to access variables messages and other items When using these commands you must type the entire name of the item you cannot abbreviate any names 7 1 7 4 Status Reporting Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS 232 interface the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode Section 7 1 4 Table 7 1 Status reports include warning messages calibration and diagnostic status messages Refer to Appendix A 3 for a list of the possible messages a
270. inted Circuit Assembly this is the gt PCB with electronic components installed and ready to use PCB Acronym for Printed Circuit Board the bare circuit board without components PLC Acronym for Programmable Logic Controller a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the system PFA Acronym for Per Fluoro Alkoxy an inert polymer One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon along with FEP and PTFE PTFE Acronym for Poly Tetra Fluoro Ethylene a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may react on other surfaces One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon along with FEP and PFA PVC Acronym for Poly Vinyl Chloride RS 232 An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port RS 485 An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port SLPM Acronym for standard liters per minute liters per minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure TCP IP Acronym for Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices and the Internet VARS Acronym for Variables the variables menu or settings of the system 05622 REV B 47 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 48 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169
271. iod PHOTO_PROP PHOTO_INTEG PHOTO_FLOW_SLOPE Po O3 PUMP MIN FLOW LPM 0 1 Minimum flow rate that indicates pump is on Photometer lamp temperature PID proportional coefficient Photometer lamp temperature PID integral coefficient 2 0 10 Photometer lamp temperature PID derivative coefficient 0 001 100 Slope term to correct photometer sample flow rate 0 5000 Os generator default drive setting 0 001 1 000 Os generator nominal flow rate Os generator control mode Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 0 5 0 05 0 1 800 O3 GEN FLOW O3 GEN MODE O3 MIN CONC REF FREQ Seconds 1 1 60 generator reference adjustment frequency REF_FSIZE 4 generator reference filter size 25 generator minimum reliable concentration Less than this is treated as zero generator reference feedback control delay 0 1 0 2 REF_INTEG generator reference PID integral coefficient REF_DERIV generator reference PID derivative coefficient BENCH_DELAY Seconds 120 generator bench feedback control delay BENCH_FREQ Seconds 10 1 60 generator bench adjustment frequency BENCH FSIZE generator bench filter size Pg A 12 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 BENCH_INTEG 0 0 1 generator bench PID integral coefficient BENCH_DER
272. ion by the result from step 4 EXAMPLE Your system has two analyzers each requiring 2SLPM of cal gas flow 1 2 3 2SLPM 2SLPM 4SLPM 4SLPM x 1 5 6SLPM Total Gas Flow Rate If you set your 7 calibrator so that the cal gas flow rate is 2SLPM therefore the Diluent Flow Rate would need to be set at 4 SLPM the Calibration Gas ratio would be 6SLPMm 2SLPM 3 1 Therefore if your Target Calibration Gas Concentration is intended to be 200 ppm the minimum required source gas concentration for this system operating at these flow rates would be 3 x 200ppm 600 ppm 3 2 3 CONNECTING DILUENT GAS TO THE M700E CALIBRATOR 1 2 Attach the zero air source line to the port labeled DILUENT IN Use the fittings provided with the calibrator to connect the zero air source line e First finger tighten e Then using the properly sized wrench make an additional 1 and 74 turn 3 2 4 CONNECTING CALIBRATION SOURCE GAS TO THE M700E 3 CALIBRATOR Connect the source gas line s to the ports labeled CYL1 through CYL4 on the back of the calibrator see Figure 3 2 e Source gas delivery pressure should be regulated between 25 PSI to 30 PSI e Use stainless steel tubing with a 1 8 inch outer diameter 05622 REV B 25 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 2 5 MAKING GAS OUTPUT CONNECTIONS FROM THE M700E 3 2 5 1 Set up for Dir
273. ioning properly 11 3 1 CPU STATUS INDICATOR DS5 a red LED that is located on upper portion of the motherboard just to the right of the CPU board flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop After power up approximately 30 60 seconds DS5 should flash on and off If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the calibrator If after 30 60 seconds neither DS5 is flashing nor have any characters been written to the front panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced yim CPU Status LED Figure 11 2 CPU Status Indicator 11 3 2 RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS There are seven LEDs located on the Relay PCA Some are not used on this model 11 3 2 1 PC Bus Watchdog Status LEDs The most important is D1 see Table 11 4 which indicates the health of the I C bus Table 11 4 Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications LED Function Fault Status Indicated Failure s D1 2 bus Health Continuously ON Failed Halted CPU Red Watchdog Circuit Faulty Mother Board Keyboard or Relay Faulty Connectors Wiring between Mother Board Keyboard or Relay PCA Failed Faulty 5 VDC Power Supply PS1 05622 REVB 245 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting
274. ions Revision D 1 APPENDIX A 4 Signal I O Definitions for 300E Series Analyzers Revision D 1 Table A 4 Signal I O Definitions for 300E Series Analyzers Revision D 1 M700E I O Signal List for Latest Revision Signal Name Bit or Channel Description Number U11 J1004 control inputs pins 1 6 bits 0 5 read default I O address 321 hex CONTROL IN 1 0 5 0 input asserted CONTROL IN 6 1 de asserted U14 J1006 control inputs pins 1 6 bits 0 5 read default I O address 325 hex CONTROL IN 7 0 input asserted CONTROL IN 12 1 de asserted Always 1 U17 J1008 control outputs pins 1 8 bits 0 7 write default I O address 321 hex CONTROL OUT 1 0 7 0 output asserted CONTROL OUT 8 1 de asserted U21 J1008 control outputs pins 9 12 bits 0 3 write default I O address 325 hex CONTROL OUT 9 0 3 0 output asserted CONTROL OUT 12 1 de asserted U7 J108 internal inputs pins 9 16 bits 0 7 read default I O address 322 hex 0 7 U8 J108 internal outputs pins 1 8 bits 0 7 write default I O address 322 hex ST SYSTEM OK 0 system OK 1 any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode 1 Spare ST_CAL_ACTIVE 0 executing sequence 1 not in diagnostic mode ST TEMP ALARM 4 0 any temperature alarm BEEN NN ST PRESS ALARM 5 0 any pressure alarm pP 1 all pressures OK 6 7 TI F N a 0 7 Relay board digital output PCF8575 write default address 44 hex RELAY_WATCHDOG Alternate b
275. ipment or property Static Charges can t build up on a conductive surface There are two errors in this statement Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded The charge will be equalized across the entire device but without access to earth ground they are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and or discharge triggered in the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench As long as my analyzer is properly installed it is safe from damage caused by static discharges It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves This does not prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things like you and your clothing from discharging through the instrument and damaging it 12 4 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges It is not however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro static discharge from occurring 12 4 1 GENERAL RULES Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station Setting up an ESD safe
276. iring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to ensure they are firmly and properly seated 6 Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed These are checked on the paperwork accompanying the calibrator 05622 REVB 11 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual VENTILATION CLEARANCE Whether the calibrator is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE Back of the instrument 10 cm 4 inches Sides of the instrument 2 5 cm 1 inch Above and below the instrument 2 5 cm 1 inch Various rack mount kits are available for this calibrator See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information 3 1 1 M700E CALIBRATOR FASTENER MODE FIELD LOCKING SCREW MESSAGE FIELD FASTENER TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Pollution Instrumentation ARM PAD DYNAMIC DILUTION CALIBRATOR MODEL 700E o 0005 0000 l O l ul m0 0 0 KEY DEFINITION FIELD KEYBOARD ON OFF SWITCH STATUS LED s Figure 3 1 M700E Front Panel Layout Photometer Generator PhotometerZero Status Outputs Control Outputs Analog Output Optional Ethernet Outlet to Inlet Exhaust Gas Connectors Photometer FAN Y Diluent Inlet AC Power Cal Gas Cal Gas Inlets DCE DTE COMM Ports
277. k corresponds to the physical CONTROL OUTPUT connections located on the back panel of the M700E see Figure 3 2 and Section 3 1 2 5 e BLOCK 2 The second status block does not correspond to any physical output but is used to communicate status over the serial data port To configure the either of the STATUS BLOCKS press Make sure that the M700E GEN STBY SFQ SETUP is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU LVL GAS SEQ MORE fLEVEL IO Gas Conc T Status Block Seta n PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT Toggle these keys until the number of the LEVEL to be edited is reached SETUP LEVEL NUMBER 12 lt SET SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until Desired Status Block is reached SETUP X X STATUS BLOCK 2 DISABLED SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X STATUS BLOCK 2 OFF EXIT discards the OFF ENTER EXIT new setting Toggle this key to turn the ENTR accepts the STATUS BLOCK ON OFF new setting I7 SETUP X X STATUS BLOCK 2 0 00000000000 CH CH gt 0 ENTER EXIT EXIT discards the Moves the p new setting cursor one character left or ENTR accepts the right new setting r7 Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON OFF 0 or 1 Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control output pins located on the back of the M7OOE see Figure 3 2 The left most bit is Bit 1 the next bit to the right bit 2 progressing rightward to bit 12 see Figure 3 10 for connector pin assignments
278. l cable of about 1 8 m length to connect the calibrator s COM port to a computer a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a DB 25 female connector The cable is terminated with one DB 9 female connector and one DB 25 male connector The DB 9 connector fits the calibrator s RS 232 port The calibrator is shipped with a standard shielded straight through DB 9F to DB 9F cable of about 1 8 m length which should fit most computers of recent build An additional cable of this type can be ordered as Option 60B 5 6 2 ETHERNET CABLE OPT 60C Option 60C consists of a 7 foot 2 meters long CAT 5 network cable terminated at both ends with standard RJ 45 connectors This cable is used to connect the M700E to any standard ETHERNET socket 5 6 3 RS 232 MULTI DROP OPT 62 The multi drop option is used with any of the RS 232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight calibrators with the host computer over a chain of RS 232 cables via the instruments COM1 Port It is subject to the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Multidrop Card Figure 5 6 M700E Multi drop Card The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly which is plugs into to the calibrator s CPU card see Figure 5 6 and is connected to the RS 232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument s back panel via a cable to the motherboard One Option 62 is required for
279. l loop will use the photometer s O3 measurement as input e To select a default generator mode press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GAS SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL O38 USER These keys initiate procedures for calibrating and verifying the operation of the Generator and Photometer see Chapter 12 SETUP X X GEN MODE REF CNST REF BNCH ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting Use these keys to select a control mode for the Generator p gt ENTR accepts the O3 GAS CONFIG new setting J7 42 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 3 10 SETTING THE M700E S TOTAL GAS FLOW RATE The default total gas flow rate for the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is 2 LPM The calibrator uses this flow rate along with the concentrations programmed into the calibrator for the component gas cylinders during set up to compute individual flow rates for both diluent gas and calibration source gasses in order to produce calibration mixtures that match the desired output concentrations This Total Flow rate may be changed to fit the users application Once the flow is changed then the new flow value becomes the total flow for all the gas concentration generated and recomputes the individual flow rates of the component gases and dilu
280. l valve driver assembly is available that can drive up to 8 eight watt valves based on the condition of the status block bits described above The option consists of a custom Printed Circuit Assembly PCA that mounts to the back of the M700E and a universal AC to DC power supply Figure 5 9 M700E Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed 05622 REV B 59 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION OPT 48A External Valve Driver Capability 12V OPT 48B External Valve Driver Capability 24 V Depending upon the capacity of the external supply either four standard or eight valves can be simultaneously energized The PCA P N 05697 is constructed such that it plugs through the rear panel into the Control Output connector J1008 on the M700E s motherboard LEADS Valve Diver Interface ValveDrive 1 ValveDrive 2 Return ValveDrive 3 ValveDrive 4 Return ValveDrive 5 ValveDrive 6 Return ValveDrive 7 ValveDrive 8 Figure 5 10 Valve Driver PCA Layout When one of the Control Outputs is energized the base of the associated PNP valve driver transistor U1 through U8 is taken to ground and the emitter collector junction becomes active NOTE This interface sources DC current to the valves rather than previous versions that sinks current from an external supply through th
281. lay device of the terminal or computer being used The ID number of the calibrator is only necessary if multiple calibrators are on the same communications line such as the multi drop setup Control C Pauses the listing of commands Control P Restarts the listing of commands 05622 REV B 149 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 7 2 Command Syntax Commands are not case sensitive and all arguments within one command i e ID numbers keywords data values etc must be separated with a space character All Commands follow the syntax X ID COMMAND lt CR gt Where X is the command type one letter that defines the type of command Allowed designators are listed in Table 7 3 and Appendix A 6 ID is the machine identification number Section 7 1 6 Example the Command 700 followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 700 COMMAND is the command designator This string is the name of the command being issued LIST ABORT NAME EXIT etc Some commands may have additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed Press CR or refer to Appendix A 6 for a list of available command designators CR is a carriage return All commands must be terminated by a carriage return usually
282. le calibration sequences see Section 6 5 1 5 for instructions on assigning the control inputs to specific calibration sequences Access to these inputs is via two separate 10 pin connectors labeled CONTROL IN that are located on the calibrator s rear panel Table 3 2 M700E Control Input Pin Assignments CONNECTOR INPUT DESCRIPTION To 1to6 Can be used as either 6 separate on off switches or as bits 1 through 6 of a 12 bit wide binary activation code Can be used as either 6 separate on off switches or as bits 7 through 7 to 12 12 of a 12 bit wide binary activation code BOTH Chassis ground To Input pin for 5 VDC required to activate pins A F This can be from an external source or from the pin of the connector Bottom Input pin for 5 VDC required to activate pins G L This can be from an external source or from the pin of the connector Internal source of 5V used to actuate control inputs when connected 18 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started There are two methods for energizing the control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin labeled is the most convenient method However if full isolation is required an external 5 VDC power supply should be used Example of Local Power Connections Example of External Power Connections CONTROL Bit 02 27
283. le between the calibrator s COMM port and the modem typically a DB 9F to DB 25M cable available from Teledyne API with P N WR0000024 Once the cable has been connected check to ensure that e The DTE DCE is in the DCE position e The M700E COMM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem e The Modem is designed to operate with an 8 bit word length with one stop bit e The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned ON Mode 64 see Section 7 1 4 Once this is completed the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the calibrator The default setting for this feature is AT YO amp 0 amp amp 10 S022 amp BO amp N6 amp MO Q1 amp WO This string can be altered to match your modem s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long To change this setting press GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE COM1 MODE 0 SET SET EDIT EXIT mum SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW Continue pressing SET or SET gt until COM1 PORT INIT AT YO amp DO amp H amp IO COMMUNICATIONS MENU SET SET EDIT EXIT ID COM1COM2 COM1 PORT INIT AT YO amp DO amp H amp IO EXIT discards the CH CH INS DEL A ENTR EXIT new setting The CH and CH keys move the cursor left and right along the text string ENTR accepts the new setting 7 The INS and CH key The DEL Toggle this key to cycle through the inserts a new deletes available cha
284. liar with the M700E theory of operation we recommend that you read Chapter 9 For information on navigating the calibrator s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A 1 3 3 1 START UP After all of the electrical and pneumatic connections are made turn on the instrument The exhaust fan and should start immediately If the instrument is equipped with an internal photometer installed the associated pump should also start up The display should immediately display a single horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system Once the CPU has completed this activity it will begin loading the calibrator firmware and configuration data During this process string of messages will appear on the calibrator s front panel display System waits 3 seconds then automatically begins its initialization routine No action required SELECT START OR REMOTE START CHECKING FLASH STATUS gt 1 System is checking the format of the instrument s flash memory chip LZ If at this point FLASH FORMAT INVALID appears contact T API customer service STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE The instrument is loading configuration and calibration data from the flash chip STARTING INSTRUMENT W FLASH 1 M700E CALIBRATOR The instrument is loading the calibrator firmware BOOT P
285. libration Gas MFC s 54 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Chassis DILUENT INLET brn DILUENT PRESSURE CAL GAS 1 INLET SENSOR INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA CAL GAS 2 CAL GAS e PRESSURE SENSOR CAL GAS 3 INLET CAL GAS 4 Flow Control 1 0 LPM GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR IOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA PHOTOMETER BENCH HOSN3S 0 jquiessy Joje1euec O 01 Jo13u02 Diluent Mass Flow Controller Cal Gas Mass Flow Controller 1 GAS INPUT MANIFOLD on back panel blk Flow Control 800 cm PHOTOMETER INLET REF MEAS Wi Valve PHOTOMETER ZERO IN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT INTERNAL VENT EXHAUST PHOTOMETER CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS OUTPUT 2 VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 5 4 M700E with Multiple Calibration Gas MFC s and Options OPT 01 a
286. librator 1 Remove the cover from the calibrator 2 Instruments with the optional photometer installed the photometer flow sensor PCA and pump must be bypassed e Using a 6 nut driver remove the hexagonal nut located at the top of the gas outlet of the photometer see Figure 10 1 e Using a 6 nut driver remove the hexagonal nut located on the fitting on the back side of the Flow Pressure sensor board see Figure 10 1 e Connect the end of the line removed from the Sensor PCA in Step 3 to the Photometer Outlet Fitting Photometer Gas Outlet Fitting Internal Vent Photometer Flow Sensor Pump Outlet Fitting Figure 10 1 Bypassing the Photometer Sensor PCA and Pump 05622 REV B 227 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M700E Operator s Manual 3 Using the 1 8 cap securely cover the outlet of the internal vent located just behind the valve relay PCA see Figure 10 1 4 Use the 1 4 caps to cover the following gas outlet ports on the back of the M700E see Figure 10 2 e Exhaust Only required for calibrators with O4 generators install e Both Cal Gas 1 outlet ports e The Vent port ih PHOTOMETER jnter eni Fitting N Cap These Ports ee ee eee Figure 10 2 Gas Port Setup for Auto Leak Check Procedure 5 Ifa bottle of source gas is connected to the CYL 1 port remove it
287. line is tuned to create a flow of 800 cm min A pressure sensor and a flow sensor located on the generator photometer pressure flow sensor PCA monitor the pressure and flow rate of the gas passing through the photometers absorption tube See Figure 9 18 and Figure 9 19 for depictions of the airflow related to the photometer 222 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 7 4 PHOTOMETER ELECTRONIC OPERATION PC 104 CPU Card Disk on Chip Flash Chip MOTHER BOARD A D AID Converter LE Bus 2 Bus Thermistor Interface sjndu sosues Photometer Sample Gas Pressure Senor AAA A RELAY PCA SS aes a ge aR ea ee Photometer M R 2 Valve Photometer gt mme Detector Photometer Status Generator Assembly Preamp Photometer Ba SEME GE Temperature l Temperature l Absorption tube Photometer Photometer Detector Pump Photometer Photometer Lamp Heater BT TTT a a Figure 9 22 O Photometer Electronic Block Diagram Like the generator the photometer and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU via the motherboard Communications to and from the CPU are handled by the motherboard Out
288. ll immediately begin to re build In some conditions a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few seconds Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti ESD storage bags or bins Even when you are not working on them store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti Static bag or bin This will prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it Use metallic anti ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies rather than pink poly bags The famous pink poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid similar to liquid laundry detergent which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag it does not prevent the build up of static charges If laying on a conductive grounded surface these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device Also the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag Anti Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal usually silvery in color provide all of the charge equaliz
289. lock A series of submenus for programming the activities and instructions that make up STEPS ante the calibration sequence PROGRESS MODE Allows the user to select the reporting style the calibrator uses to report the progress of the sequences on the front panels display as it runs The types of instruction steps available for creating calibration sequences are listed in Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction INSTRUCTION NAME DESCRIPTION GENERATE Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode Similar in operation and effect to the GENERATE gt AUTO function used at the front panel Initiates a Gas Phase Titration operation GPTPS Initiates a Gas Phase Titration Preset procedure Puts the calibrator into PURGE mode DURATION Adds a period of time between the previous instruction and the next Calls another sequence to be executed at this time The calling sequence will EXECSEQ resume running when the called sequence is completed Up to 5 levels of nested sequences can be programmed Allows the sequence to activate the M700E s digital control outputs Similar to the SETCCOUTPUT CC OUPUT attribute but can be set and reset by individual steps MANUAL Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode Similar in operation and effect to the GENERATE gt MAN function used at the front panel 92 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the
290. lure with the Relay board the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have failed e Using the PHOTO LAMP HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL I O function of the DIAG menu as described above turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater D15 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on e Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J13 of the Relay Board e fthe FET Driver has failed there will be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2 e fthe FET Driver Q2 checks out OK the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have failed e Unplug the connector to the UV Lamp Heater Thermistor PCB and measure the resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6 pin connector e The resistance near the 58 C set point is 8 1k ohms 05622 REV B 259 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 4 13 4 Ozone Generator Temperature There are three possible causes for the Ozone Generator temperature to have failed e The Os Gen heater has failed Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the six pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the Generator It should be approximately 5 Ohms e Assuming that the IC bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay board the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have failed Using the O3 GEN HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL I O
291. lve Photometer Zero Out fixture O3 Generation Valve and Internal Vent Flow Control Assembly 100 cm min O Outlet to Exhaust Fixture on back panel of calibrator Generation Le Valve Measure Reference Valve for Photometer Bench only present when photometer option is installed Regulator Adjustment Screw Generator Zero Air Pressure Regulator Regulator Gas Inlet Outlet to O Generator Pressure Sensor Outlet from Regulator to Generator Figure 9 14 O Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations 214 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 6 3 GENERATOR ELECTRONIC OPERATION Electronically the O3 generator and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU via the motherboard Sensors such as the UV lamp thermistor send analog data to the motherboard where it is digitized Digital data is sent by the motherboard to the calibrators CPU and where required stored in either flash memory or on the CPU s Disk on Chip Commands from the CPU are sent to the motherboard and forwarded to the various devices via the calibrators I C bus z MOTHER 3 BOARD PC 104 8 CPU Card Oy Generator Input i Pressure Sensor i E Pa Disk on mms J 3 gg Ke 1
292. m emm nns 13 Figure 3 4 M700E Internal Layout Top View with Optional Generator and Photometer 14 Figure 3 5 M700E Pneumatic Diagram Base Unit sssssssssssseeeeeen memes 15 Figure 3 6 M700E Pneumatic Diagram with Generator and Photometer 15 Figure 3 7 M700E Analog Output Connector nennen nennen nennen 16 Figure 3 8 Status Output Connector nnn nnns 17 Figure 3 9 M700E Digital Control Input Connectors ssssseeeeenn een eene 19 Figure 3 10 M70OE Digital Control Output Connector ssssesseeeee enn nennen nnne nnns 20 Figure 3 11 Set up for M700E Connecting the Basic M700E to a Sample Manifold 26 Figure 3 12 Set up for M700E Connecting the M700E to a Sample Manifold 27 Figure 3 13 Set for M700E Connecting the M700E to a Calibration Manifold 28 Another type of calibration setup utilizes separate span gas and the zero air manifolds see Figure 3 14 29 Figure 3 14 Set up for M700E Connecting the M700E to a Dual Span Gas Zero Air Manifold 29 Figure 5 1 Internal Pneuma
293. n a separate manual RS 232 Programming Notes Teledyne API s P N 013500000 258 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 4 13 TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the Photometer UV Lamp optional and the Ozone Generator Lamp optional If any of these temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled the M700E will perform poorly 11 4 13 1 Box Chassis Temperature The box temperature sensor is mounted to the Motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I O function under the DIAG Menu see Section 11 1 3 This parameter will vary with ambient temperature but at 30 C 6 7 above room temperature the signal should be 1450 mV 11 4 13 2 Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature The temperature of the gas in the photometer sample chamber should read approximately 5 0 C higher than the box temperature 11 4 13 3 UV Lamp Temperature There are three possible causes for the UV Lamp temperature to have failed e The UV Lamp heater has failed Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the six pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the Optical Bench e t should be approximately 30 Ohms e Assuming that the 2 bus is working and that there is no other fai
294. n and running e Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the calibrator Do not drop tools into the calibrator or leave those after your procedures e Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating inside the calibrator e Use common sense when operating inside a running calibrator 11 1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING The M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected evaluated and repaired During operation it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps 1 Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary 2 Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action 3 Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic communication channels are operating properly e Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay PCA e Note that the calibrator s DC power wiring is color coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA 4 Follow the procedures defined in Section 3 3
295. nce valve only OFF when the O3 mode is set for BNCH See Section 3 3 9 UNASSIGNED Sets the standard Temperature used in 2 n STD TEMP calculating Os flow rates and concentrations FC emi SEE Sets the standard pressure used in 15 00 50 00 STD PRESSURE calculating O3 flow rates and concentrations BELEE HRGA Adjusts the speed of the analyzer s clock Choose the sign if the clock is too slow 60 to 60 s day CLOCK_ADJ choose the sign if the clock is too fast See Default 0 Section 6 7 DO NOT ADJUST OR CHANGE these values unless instructed to by Teledyne API s customer service personnel Only available in calibrators with O3 photometer and generator options installed NOTE There is a 2 second latency period between when a VARS value is changed and the new value is stored into the analyzer s memory DO NOT turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be lost 130 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator To access and navigate the VARS menu use the following key sequence Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM lt IST TST gt GEM STBY SEQ Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD DO NOT CHANGE these settings unless specifically instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer
296. nd OPT 02 Installed 5 3 RACK MOUNT KITS OPT 20 OPT 20B amp OPT 21 There are several options for mounting the calibrator in standard 19 racks The slides are three part extensions one mounts to the rack one mounts to the calibrator chassis and the middle part remains on the rack slide when the calibrator is taken out The calibrator locks into place when fully extended and cannot be pulled out without pushing two buttons one on each side The rack mount brackets for the calibrator require that you have a support structure in your rack to support the weight of the calibrator The brackets cannot carry the full weight of a calibrator and are meant only to fix the calibrator to the front of a rack preventing it from sliding out of the rack accidentally OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION OPT 20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in chassis slides STD OPT 20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in chassis slides OPT 21 Rack mount brackets only 5 4 CARRYING STRAP HANDLE OPT 29 The chassis of the M700E calibrator allows to attach a strap handle for carrying the instrument The handle is located on the right side and pulls out to accommodate a hand for transport When pushed in the handle is nearly flush with the chassis only protruding out about 9 mm 3 8 05622 REV B DCN 5169 55 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Optional Hardware and Software M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual
297. nd Physical Specifications sssee eene 7 Table 2 3 M700E Specifications for Optional Ozone 8 Table 2 4 M700E Specifications for Optional 8 Table 3 1 Status Output Pin Assignments icii eenei aiie eea k R PARAKA RATIER nennen nennen entren enne 18 Table 3 2 M700E Control Input Pin Assignments ssssssesseeee eene nennen nnne nennen nennen 18 Table 3 3 M700E Control Input Pin Assignments sss eee nne 20 Table 3 4 NIST Standards for GO niet e er eere ttti Uni a eec eet 22 Eable 3 9 NIST Standards for E eee cera Le te ee E e es 23 T ble 3 6 NIST Standards for E295 nette erts cn aec ein edema pereo eo e e Du REL ee 23 Table 3572 NIST Standards for GHaren beer erret eere ha ee eir te en i eden ert etia e epu eL der 23 T ble 3 8 NIST Standards for Os a nr eerte ere teta sada b Dae ei ye aaa qur es a ei e e Du EIL ee 23 Table 3 9 NIST Standards for SQ eet rr eere eo eerte p ese ei Pu b ese hir de epu 24 Table 3 10 NIST Standards for INO ceteri tet e n te c ER e e EA te ER er E e ER 24 Table 3 11 NIST Standards for Propane C3Ha sssssssssssssssssse eene nnnm 24 Table 3 12 Front Panel Display during System Warm Up sssssseeeenem nem
298. nd an interrupt signal to the CPU IC INTERFACE CHIP e This IC performs several functions e Using a dedicated digital status bit it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the keyboard is ready to send e Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data the C interface chip resets the key depress detect flip flop e response to commands from the CPU it turns the front panel status LEDs and off and activates the beeper e Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or closed see Chapter 5 for information on these options DISPLAY DATA DECODER This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU in TTY format into a bitmapped image which is sent over a parallel data bus to the display DISPLAY CONTROLLER This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself It generates a clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized It can also in response to commands from the CPU turn off and or reset the display DISPLAY POWER WATCHDOG The M700E calibrator s display can begin to show garbled information or lock up if the DC voltage supplied to it falls too low even momentarily To alleviate this a brownout Watchdog Circuit monitors the level of the power supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off then back on
299. nd this for information on controlling the instrument through the RS 232 interface General Message Format All messages from the instrument including those in response to a command line request are in the format X DDD HH MM Id MESSAGE lt CRLF gt Where X is a command type designator a single character indicating the message type as shown in the Table 7 3 DDD HH MM is the time stamp the date and time when the message was issued It consists of the Day of year DDD as a number from 1 to 366 the hour of the day HH as a number from 00 to 23 and the minute MM as a number from 00 to 59 ID is the calibrator ID a number with 1 to 4 digits MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages test measurements variable values etc lt CRLF gt is a carriage return line feed pair which terminates the message The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy structure Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was issued hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble shooting and reference purposes Terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review 05622 REV B 151 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 1 7 5 COMM Port Password Security
300. network does not support DHCP see Section 7 4 for instructions on manually configuring the LAN connection 3 1 2 8 Connecting to a Multi drop Network If your unit has a Teledyne API s RS 232 multi drop card Option 62 see Section 7 2 1 for instructions on setting it up 3 2 PNENUMATIC CONNECTIONS 3 2 1 ABOUT DILUENT GAS ZERO AIR Zero Air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the calibrator s readings e Diluent Air should be dry approximately 20 C of Dew Point e Diluent Air should be supplied at a gas pressure of between 25 PSI and 35 PSI with a flow greater than the flow rate for the calibrator For the standard unit this means greater than 10 SLPM e Forcalibrator s with the 20 LPM diluent flow option OPT the diluent air should be supplied at a gas pressure of between 30 PSI and 35 PSI e M700E calibrator s with optional generators installed require that the zero air source supply gas flowing at a continuous rate of at least 100 cm min e Ifthe calibrator is also equipped with an internal photometer the zero air source supply gas must be capable of a continuous rate of flow of at least 1 1 LPM Zero Air can be purchased in pressurized canisters or created using a Teledyne API s Model 701 Zero Air Generator 05622 REV B 21 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrat
301. nfiguration eese 121 6 9 1 4 Turning the TEST CHANNEL Over Range Feature ON OFF 122 6 9 1 5 Adding a Recorder Offset to the TEST CHANNEL sese een emen 123 6 9 2 TEST CHANNEL onn Ete OT ERR XE BERE RR RR 124 6 9 2 1 Enabling or disabling the TEST CHANNEL Auto Cal 124 6 9 2 2 Automatic TEST CHANNEL Calibration seeene emm menn 125 6 9 2 3 Manual Calibration of the TEST CHANNEL Configured for Voltage Ranges 127 06 9 3 AIN Calibration 5 ee eee eai ie ere etu HR TER evade 129 6 10 SETUP gt MORE gt VARS Internal Variables VARS sss enne 130 6 11 SETUP gt LVL Setting up and using LEADS Dasibi Operating Levels 132 6 11 1 General Information about LEADS LEVELS sse ener enne 132 6 112 Dot commands tendit et eoi taedio el tae ees 132 GTE LEVES ane a tte mnn ftu a Em 133 0 11 4 Activating an existing Ra esit ema delirio a co de eig 133 6 11 5 Programming New LEVELS geo eed D mad o t mad e ER Abre 134 6 11 5 1 Creating a GENERATE LEVEL ornida tina e iora a e a nennen nennen nnns 135 0 11 5 2 Creating a GPT LEVEL ieie EE eo d Ea a AE nee
302. nitiates auto calibration of all J RANGE 1V analog outputs OVER FLOW CALIBRATION Ll See SECONDARY SETUP Menu RANGE 5V 10V EDIT REC OFFSET Sets a voltage offset for the Initiates auto calibration of the selected analog input 1 Only occurs if one of the voltage ranges is selected Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the AUTO CAL feature is OFF for the selected output or the RANGE is set for CURRent 4 Only appears if optional O3 generator is installed 6 DIAG Menu is inactive while instrument is in GENERATE mode 3 Only appears if optional photometer bench is installed 5 Only appears if optional 2nd Cal Gas MFC is installed 7 DO NOT Edit the settings for the MFC drives CALIBRATION GEN CALIBRATION MFG CAL Initiates auto calibration of the analog inputs zero and span points AUTO CALIBRATED CAL J CAL Auto Cal U100 CALIBRATION Ne DIAG CALIBRATION Submenu gt UP10 PRESSURE AIN ee AUTO LEAK CHECK Initiates Internal leak check See Chapter 11 for more information TEST CHAN OUTPUT PREV NONE PHOTO MEAS PHOTO REF GEN REF SAMPLE PRESSURE SAMPLE FLOW SAMPLE TEMP PHOTO LAMP TEMP O3 LAMP TEMP CHASSIS TEMP PHOTO CONG Manual caf UP DOWN DN10 D100 SECONDARY SETUP Menu DIAG Submenu GAS CONFIGURATION NEXT Backpressure Compensati
303. nt and chosen component gases to create the desired calibration mixture To use the GENERATE gt AUTO feature press 05622 REV B 77 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Make sure that the M7OCE is in STANDBY mode STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM TST TST GEM STBY SEQ Toggle these keys to set the target concentration Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM STANDBY SYSTEM RESET AUTO MAN PURG GENERATE ZERO ZERO ENTR SETUP GENERATE GENERATE 0 0 PPB 502 0 0 0 0 PPB 502 ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to scroll through the available gas types as programmed during Continue pressing this key until the desired initial setup gas type appears GENERATE GENERATE 0 0 PPB CO2 0 0 0 0 PPB CO2 ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to to seroll through the available units of measure GENERATE GENERATE 0 0 PPB CO2 0 0 0 0 CO2 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new gas type amp EE target concentration a ENTR accepts the new gas type amp GENERATE TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM target concentration j 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new i z flow rate ENTR accepts the ACT CAL 2 000 LPM new gas flow rate GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP The M7ODOE will stay in generate mode until the STBY button is pressed 78 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROL
304. nt to be deleted 8 1500 MV 5 0 MIN ON PREV NEXT DELETE YES NO DELETED 8 2000 MV 5 0 MIN ON INS DEL EDIT EXIT PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT 182 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification 8 4 3 4 Turning Generator Calibration Points ON OFF To enable or disable an existing calibration point press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ gt PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Toggle this key to turn the point ON OFF CAL PREV PREV NEXT ees NEXT PNTS Continue pressing NEXT until GEN CALIBRATION GEN CALIBRATION 1 500 MV 5 0 MIN ON INS DEL EDIT ENTR PREV SET CAL POINT ENABLELD ON ON ENTR EXIT Continue pressing PREV amp NEXT until your reach the point to be turned ON OFF 8 1500 MV 5 0 MIN ON NEXT SET SET EDIT CAL POINT DRIVE 0 MV INS DEL EDIT Continue pressing SET until CAL POINT ENABLELD ON SET EDIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting P 05622 REV B DCN 5169 183 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE U
305. nterface is working but either of the two Watchdog LEDs is not flashing the problem may be a wiring issue between the board and the motherboard 11 4 5 KEYBOARD DISPLAY INTERFACE The front panel keyboard display and Keyboard Display Interface PCA can be verified by observing the operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly e The vacuum fluorescent display is good if a character is visible on the upper left hand corner of the display at power up e If there is no character on the display at power up and D1 on the Relay PCA or D2 on the Valve Driver PCA is flashing then the Keyboard Display Interface PCA is bad e The CPU Status LED 055 is flashing but there is no character on the display at power up 250 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator e Ifthe calibrator starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not change the display then there are three possible problems 1 One or more of the keys is bad 2 The interrupt signal between the Keyboard Display Interface PCA and the motherboard is broken or 3 The Keyboard Display Interface PCA is bad 11 4 6 RELAY PCA Th
306. ntil 14 GAS USR1 MASS 28 890 GM NEXT EDIT 28 890 is the Molar Mass of ambient air This number is used as a default value for all user gasses until reset by the operator GAS USR1 MASS 28 890 GM ENAB NAME MASS ENABLE GAS ON EXIT discards the new ON ENTR EXIT B GAS NAME Toggle this key to enable disable the ENTR accepis the new GAS NAME gas type gt GAS USR1 MASS 28 890 GM ENAB NAME MASS EXIT 14 DISABLED NEXT EDIT 3 3 8 DEFINING CALIBRATION SOURCE GAS CYLINDERS 3 3 8 1 Setting Up the Ports with Single Gas Cylinders To program the M70OE calibrator s source gas input ports for a single gas cylinder press 05622 REV B 39 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY L c SE PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SOURCE GAS CONFIG CYL USER CYLINDER GAS CONFIG PRTI 1 NONE ADD EDIT PORTT NONE NONE The label for this key will change dynamically Continue pressing this key until the desired as the available gas list gas type is reached is cycled Toggle these keys to change PORT1 0 0 PPM CO2 5 5 PCT ENTR EXIT the target EXIT discards the new concentanon g Toggle this key to change GAS NAME the units of measure ENTR accepts the new GAS NAME p gt SETUP 15 5 PCT COZ Use this key to when ADD EDIT
307. nutes verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that are installed 2 Check to ensure that the calibrator is functioning within allowable operating parameters Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the calibrator s front panel as well as their expected values These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing problems with your calibrator Section 11 1 2 The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data sheet P N 05731 lists these values before the instrument left the factory To view the current values of these parameters press the following key sequence on the calibrator s front panel Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized ACT CAL 0 000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY sEC MSG CLR SETUP ACT CAL Value LPM TARG CAL Value LPM oggle lt TST TST keys t ACT DIL Va uej LPM scroll through list of TARG DIL Va ve LPM functions GEN REF Va ue MV FLOW Value LPM GEN DRIVE Value MV O3 LAMP TEMP Value C CAL PRESSURE Vaive PSIG DIL PRESSURE Va ue PSIG REG PRESSURE Vaive PSIG ACT Mode Value Gas Type TARG Mode Value Gas Type BOX TEMP Value C PHOTO MEASURE Value MV PHOTO REFERENCE Va ue MV PHOTO FLOW Value LPM PHOTO LAMP TEMP Va ue 9C PHOTO SPRESS Vaive IN HG A PHOTO STEMP Va ue C PHOTO SLOPE Vatue
308. o turn on within the specified timeout period default 30 sec Problem with Relay PCA 12 VDC power supply problem PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING The photometer lamp temp is lt 51 C or gt 61 C Possible failure of Bench lamp heater Bench lamp temperature sensor Relay controlling the bench heater Entire Relay PCA C Bus Hot Lamp table continued 05622 REV B DCN 5169 239 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual Table 11 1 Front Panel Warning Messages cont WARNING FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES PHOTO LAMP STABILITY WARNING Value output during the Photometer s reference cycle changes from measurements to measurement more than 2596 of the time Faulty UV source lamp Noisy UV detector Faulty UV lamp power supply Faulty 15 VDC power supply PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING Occurs when Ref is 2500 mVDC or gt 4950 mVDC Possible failure of UV Lamp UV Photo Detector Preamp REAR BOARD NOT DET Mother Board not detected on power up THIS WARNING only appears on Serial 1 0 COMM Port s Front Panel Display will be frozen blank or will not respond Failure of Mother Board REGULATOR PRESSURE Regulator pressure is Zero or source air supply is incorrectly set up or improperly vented Incorrectly adjusted Os zero air pressure r
309. on Pg A 10 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 Table 1 M700E Setup Variables Revision 0 1 M700E Setup Variables for Latest Revision Setup Variable Default Value Description Value Range LowAceesslevelSetupVarables 818 password Low Access Level Setup Variables 818 password PHOTO LAMP 0 100 Photometer lamp temperature Warnings set point and warning limits O3 GEN LAMP 0 100 generator lamp temperature Warnings set point and warning limits O3 CONC RANGE PPB 500 0 1 20000 Os concentration range for test channel analog output O3 PHOTO BENCH ONLY ON OFF ON Os bench control flag ON turns on pump and switches measure reference valve only in bench generation mode STD TEMP 25 0 100 Standard temperature for unit conversions STD_PRESS Hg 29 92 15 50 Standard pressure for unit conversions CLOCK ADJ Sec Day 60 60 Time of day clock speed adjustment Medium Access Level Setup Variables 929 password LANGUAGE SELECT ENGL Selects the language to use for the user interface Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface MAINT TIMEOUT Hours 0 1 100 Time until automatically switching out of software controlled maintenance mode pw DWELL Seconds 0 1 30 Dwell time after switching measu
310. on of algebra is required to rearrange the equation as follows lh 1 C zin asrP Unfortunately both ambient temperature and pressure influence the density of the sample gas and therefore the number of ozone molecules present in the absorption tube thus changing the amount of light absorbed Equation 9 6 In order to account for this effect the following addition is made to the equation Equation 9 7 l5 1 T 29 92inHg x XS o l aL 273 K P Where T sample ambient temperature in degrees Kelvin P ambient pressure in inches of mercury 218 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation Finally to convert the result into Parts per Billion PPB the following change is made Equation 9 8 I 10 9 T 29 92inHg x x o Ea I aL 2739 P The M700E photometer e Measures each of the above variables ambient temperature ambient gas pressure the intensity of the UV light beam with and without Os present e Inserts know values for the length of the absorption path and the absorption coefficient and e Calculates the concentration of O3 present in the sample gas 9 7 1 2 The Measurement Reference Cycle In order to solve the Beer Lambert equation it is necessary to know the intensity of the light passing through the absorption path both when is present and when it is not A valve call
311. ons of the component gases being used into the M700E s memory 3 3 6 DEFAULT GAS TYPES The 7 calibrator is programmed with the following default gas types corresponding to the most commonly used component gases Table 3 14 M700E Default Gas Types GAS TYPE Used for gas inlet ports where no gas bottle is attached sulfur dioxide hydrogen sulfide nitrous oxide nitric oxide nitrogen dioxide Ammonia carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide General abbreviation for hydrocarbon It is not recommended that ammonia be used in the M700E 3 3 7 USER DEFINED GAS TYPES 3 3 7 1 User Defined Gas Types General The M700E calibrator can accept up to four different user defined gases This allows the use of e Less common component gases not included in the M700E s default list e than one bottle of the same gas but at different concentrations In this case different user defined names are created for the different bottles of gas EXAMPLE Two bottles of are being used allow the calibrator to create two different CO calibration gases at the same flow rate Since identical names must not be assigned to two different bottles one bottle can be programmed using the default name CO2 and the other bottle programmed by assigning a user defined name such as 2 Alternatively both bottles can be assigned user defined names e g CO2A and CO2B User defined gas names are added to the M700E s g
312. or Operator s Manual 3 2 2 ABOUT CALIBRATION GAS Calibration gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range Usually it is a single gas type mixed with although bottles containing multiple mixtures of compatible gases are also available e g H2S O2 and CO mixed with N3 e Calibration gas should be supplied at a pressure of between 25 PSI and 35 PSI with a flow greater than the flow rate for the calibrator 3 2 2 1 NIST Traceable Calibration Gas Standards All calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology NIST To ensure NIST traceability we recommend acquiring cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials SRM These are available from a variety of commercial sources The following tables lists some of the most common NIST Primary gas standards Table 3 4 NIST Standards for CO 5 Substance 22 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started Table 3 5 NIST Standards for CO a Substance 2612 26138 2614 1677 16780 16790 1680b 16810 28358 28368 26378 26385 2639 2640 26418 26425 2740a 2 Table 3 6 NIST Standards for H2S Description Nominal Amount of Substance 2730
313. otometer lamp temperature is outside of allowable limits Photometer lamp reference step changes occur more than 25 of the time PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING The photometer reference reading is outside of allowable limits The calibrator s motherboard was not detected during power up REAR BOARD NOT DET THIS WARNING only appears on Serial I O COMM Port s The Front Panel Display will be frozen blank or will not respond REGULATOR PRESSURE The gas pressure regulator associated with the internal O3 generator option is WARNING reporting a pressure outside of allowable limits RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the calibrator s relay PCA SYSTEM RESET The calibrator has been turned off and on or the CPU was reset VALVE BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the valve controller board Only applicable for calibrators with the optional the generator installed Only applicable for calibrators with the optional photometer installed 3 On instrument with multiple Cal Gas MFC s installed the MFC FLOW WARNING occurs when the flow rate requested is lt 10 of the range of the lowest rated MFC i e all of the cal gas MFC are turned off 05622 REV B 33 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 3 3 4 FUNCTIONAL CHECK 1 After the calibrator s components have warmed up for at least 30 mi
314. out of the photometer e The vacuum diode UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current e A preamplifier assembly which convert the Detector s current output into DC Voltage then amplifies it to a level readable by the A to D converter circuitry of the instrument s motherboard UV Lamp Power Sample Gas UV Lamp Thermistor UV Detector Absorption Tube Transformer Thermistor UV Lamp Heater Behind Thermistor from 15 VDC power supply Sample Gas Outlet UV Detector Sample Gas Inlet UV Lamp Power UVL Heat Preamp PCA Supply UV Lamp ene BOCA 200 VAC Q 30 kHz Figure 9 21 O Photometer Layout Top Cover Removed 9 7 3 PHOTOMETER PNEUMATIC OPERATION The flow of gas through the photometer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air though the instrument There are several advantages to this pull through configuration Placing the pump down stream from the absorption tube avoids problems caused by the pumping process heating and compressing the sample In order to measure the presence of low concentrations of in the sample air it is necessary to establish and maintain a relatively constant and stable volumetric flow of sample gas through the photometer The simplest way to accomplish this is by placing a flow control assembly containing a critical flow orifice directly upstream of the pump but down stream from the absorption tube The critical flow orifice installed in the pump supply
315. p when programming a sequence see Section 6 5 2 1 The operator can individually set both the diluent flow rate and flow rates for the component gas cylinders as part of the following The GENERATE gt MANUAL menu see Section Error Reference source not found or e As part of a MANUAL step when programming a sequence see Section 6 5 2 9 NOTE When calculating total required flow for M700E s with photometers installed ensure to account for the 800 cc min flow it requires USER NOTES 44 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary 4 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS AND GLOSSARY 4 1 FAQ S The following list is a list from the Teledyne API S Customer Service Department of the 10 most commonly asked questions relating to the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Q My ozone ACT XXXX why A Look at the Photo Ref Meas These are most likely too low and need to be adjusted up to 4500mV Another possible cause would be no gas flow to the photometer causing the reading to be out of range low When I generate ozone it takes a long time to settle out or it fluctuates around the number until finally stabilizing A Perform an Gen Adjust and then an Gen Calibration Re run points See Chapter 8 Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display
316. panel lC keyboard default C address 4E hex MAINT MODE 5 input 0 maintenance mode eee _ LANG2_SELECT 6 input 0 select second language 1 select first language English SEQUENCE_LED 8 output 0 sequence LED on executing sequence Pg A 22 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision D 1 CL AUTO TIMER LED 9 output 0 automatic timer LED on automatic sequence timer enabled FAULT LED 10 output 0 fault LED on AEN e 0 beeper on for diagnostic testing only 1 off Rear board primary MUX analog inputs PHOTODET o Phemewrdeecermadg GEN Rer Der 1 Osgeneratorreference detectorreading o s Dewpemme c Perm PRESS Je Ommepemttepsus O z MFC 1 diluent flow output MFC 2 cal gas 1 flow output Rear board analog outputs MFC 1 diluent flow drive MFC 2 cal gas 1 flow drive MFC 3 cal gas 2 flow drive 3 Test measurement output analog output AD5321 default address 18 hex Os photometer lamp drive 0 5V analog output AD5321 default address 1A hex OJJ AJOJN MFC_FLOW_34 REF 4096 MV PHOTO SAMP PRES MFC FLOW 1 MFC FLOW 2 PHOTO SAMP PRES n MFCFLOW 1 12 MFCFLOW2 REFGND O gt N MFC_DRIVE_1 MFC DRIVE 2 MFC DRIVE 3 TE
317. ping container By design there is nominally 100 ccm of air flow across the tube and the tube is maintained at 50 C The output of the calibrator is the product of the elution rate with the total of the 100 sccm through the generator and the flow of dilutent gas The temperature is set at 50 0 C Check SETUP MORE VARS and scroll to the IZS TEMP variable to verify that the temperature is properly set It should be set to 50 C with over and under temperature warnings set at 49 C and 51 C There is a 105 cm min flow across the permeation tube at all times to prevent build up of the gas in the tubing This permeation tube source gas is diluted with zero air to generate desired concentration of the specific gas The calibrator s output concentration gas concentration can be calculated using the following equation P x Km C F Where P permeation rate ng min 50 C 24 46 Km where 24 46 is the molar volume in liters 25 C MW and MW is the molecular weight 760mmHg Km for SO 0 382 NO 0 532 H2S 0 719 and NH3 1 436 F total flow rate sum of 100 cm min and diluent flow cm min C 7 concentration ppm P 24 46 323 Thus C x F MW 298 Where Temperature at 50 C 323 Temperature at 25 C 298 64 5622 REV PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 5 11 EXTENDED WARRANTY OPT 92B
318. place the Lamp and if the problem persists replace the Lamp Power Supply 264 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 7 REPAIR PROCEDURES 11 7 1 DISK ON CHIP REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Replacing the DOC may be necessary in certain rare circumstances when a chip fails or when loading new instrument software This will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost However a backup copy of the operating parameters are stored in a second non volatile memory and will be loaded into the new the DOC on power up To change the DOC perform the following procedure 1 Turn off power to the instrument 2 Fold down the rear panel by loosening the thumbscrews on each side 3 Locate the Disk on Chip in the rightmost socket near the right hand side of the CPU assembly Remove the IC by gently prying it up from the socket 4 Reinstall the new Disk on Chip making sure the notch in the end of the chip is facing upward 5 Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine 11 8 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE If this manual and its troubleshooting amp repair sections do not solve your problems technical assistance may be obtained from TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE 9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE SAN DIEGO CALIFORNIA 92121 5201 USA Toll free Phone 800 324 5190 Phone 858 657 9800 Fax
319. ple Cal MFC s Installed 186 Figure 9 1 Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M700E s with Options Installed 196 Figure 9 2 Flow Control Assembly amp Critical Flow Orifice sssssssseene ener 197 Figure 9 3 M700E Electronic Block Diagram sssssseseene nennen enne 199 Figure 9 4 M700E CPU Board Annotated sssssssssssseese eene 201 Figure 9 5 Relay PORK e erp ete t tp e Ree eed ede dices ev a de eie de dente deed ed idi 202 Figure 9 6 Heater Control Loop Block Diagram sse nnne nnns 203 Figure 9 7 Status LED Locations Relay PCA sssssssssssseeene ener enne nennen nenne ener enne 204 Figure 9 8 Status LED Locations Valve Driver sssssssssssseeene nennen enne ener nnns 205 Figure 9 9 M700E Power Distribution Block diagram ssssessene enne 208 Figure 9 10 M70OE Front Panel Layout 00 0 2 ccc cette erent ee rennet eset tees eee nennen nne enne nennen nennen nenne nnne nnns 209 Figure 9 11 Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram 210 Figure 9 12 Schematic of Basic Software Operation sse eene eene nnne 212 Figure 9 13 Generator Internal
320. ponents are connected Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work Up to this point the closed metal casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static charges 4 f you must remove a component from the instrument do not lay it down on a non ESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait 5 Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer 12 4 2 2 Working at an Anti ESD Work Bench When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a anti ESD work bench 1 Plug you anti ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and induction from occurring 2 Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Only open any anti ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation e Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface e Before opening the container wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the container to be bled away by the worksta
321. present messages as they appear on the calibrator s display This manual is organized in the following manner TABLE OF CONTENTS Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information are presented This is a good overview of the topics covered in the manual There is also a list of appendices figures and tables In the electronic version of the manual clicking on any of these table entries automatically views that section SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION A brief description of the M700E calibrator architecture as well as a description of the layout of the manual and what information is located in its various sections and chapters SPECIFICATIONS AND WARRANTY A list of the calibrator s performance specifications and if applicable a description of the conditions and configuration under which EPA equivalency was approved as well as the Teledyne API s warranty statement GETTING STARTED Instructions for setting up installing and running your calibrator for the first time GLOSSARY Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the calibrator and a glossary of acronyms and technical terms OPTIONAL HARDWARE amp SOFTWARE A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your calibrator SECTION Il OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS USING THE M700E CALIBRATOR Step by Step instructions for using the display keyboard to set up and operate the M7OOE calibrator REMOTE OPERATION OF TH
322. r Assembly Lamp Adjustment Installation ssn 233 Figure 10 6 Generator Temperature Thermistor DC Heater 234 Figure 10 7 Location of Generator Reference Detector Adjustment 234 Figure 11 1 Example of Signal I O Function ssesssssseeeeennenene nennen nenne 243 Figure 11 2 CPI Status IndiCator iere t Ree Hep ex up a me ee Lu 245 Figure 11 3 Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting ssss eene 246 Figure 11 4 Valve Driver PCA Status LEDS Used for 247 Figure 11 5 Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA ssssssee eene 249 Figure 12 1 Triboelectric e dena tta Fea enean edad 267 Figure 12 2 Basic Anti ESD Work nns 270 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table of Contents LIST OF TABLES Table 2 1 M700E Dilution System Specifications essessesee enne nemen enne 7 Table 2 2 M700E Dilution Electrical a
323. r circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situation before turning the calibrator back on 5 Control BEY ensor Contro ANALOG SENSORS amp 1 0 Logic enerdtor g ACPOWER m Reference detector LOGIC DEVICES DC POWER Photometer UV Pre Amplifiers Detector amp Amplifiers e g CPU lC bus Keyboard Display MotherBoard etc er AC POWER IN MFC3 2nd Cal Gas 5 VDC DC WEE RELAY PCA TE Solenoid PS2 m AN SENSORS SENSORS arias ll Coolin OPTIONAL VALVES GPT valve an CAL GAS 1 GAS PRESSURE O Gen valve VALVE IPhotometer Uv PhotometerM R Photometer Lamp P S Pump Solenoid CAL GAS 2 t Drivers SALYE lO Generator UV DILUENT Lamp Xfromer WE VALVE CAL GAS 3 VALVE r DRIVE PCA uw S 3 Generator UV P Generator VALVE Lamp PS Lamp Figure 9 9 M700E Power Distribution Block diagram 208 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 4 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE FASTENER MODE FIELD LOCKING SCREW MESSAGE FIELD FASTENER TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Advanced Pollution Instrumentation AMA ene DYNAMIC DILUTION CALIBRATOR MODEL 700E _ m eee eee eS eee KEY DEFINITION FIELD KEYBOARD ON OF
324. racter set character before the character at Alpha A Z Upper and Lower cursor position J gt the cursor Case Special Characters space amp _ lt gt Numerals 0 9 position 7 05622 REV 153 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual To initialize the modem press GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU FLOW COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM2 1 MODE 0 lt SET SET gt EDIT Continue pressing lt SET or SET gt until COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM lt SET SET gt INIT INITIALIZING MODE Test Runs Automatically LT MODEM INITIALIZED PREV NEXT OFF If there is a problem initializing the modem the message MODEM NOT INITIALIZED will appear 154 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E 7 2 1 MULTI DROP RS 232 SET UP The RS 232 multi drop consists of a Printed Circuit Assembly PCA that plugs onto the CN3 CN4 and CN5 connectors of the CPU card and the cabling to connect it to the calibrator s motherboard This PCA includes all circuitry required to enable your calibrator for multi drop operation It converts the instrument s COM1 port to multi drop configuration allowing up to eight Teledyne API s E Series calibrators or E S
325. rator s Manual Optional Hardware and Software The output of the O3 generator can be controlled in one of two ways e CONSTANT mode By selecting a specific constant drive voltage corresponding to a specific O3 concentration for the generator or e REFERENCE mode The user selects a desired O4 concentration and the calibrator s CPU sets the intensity of the generator s UV lamp to an intensity corresponding to that concentration The voltage output of a reference detector also internal to the generator is digitized and sent to the M700E s CPU where it is used as input for a control loop that maintains the intensity of the UV lamp at a level appropriate for the chosen set point See Section 9 6 for more details on the operation of the generator 5 1 2 UV PHOTOMETER MODULE 02 The photometer option increases the accuracy of the M700E calibrator s optional generator OPT 01A see Section 5 1 1 by directly measuring content of the gas output by the generator The photometer s operation is based on the principle that ozone molecules absorb UV light of a certain wavelength A mercury lamp internal to the photometer emits UV light at that wavelength This light shines down a hollow glass tube that is alternately filled with sample gas the measure phase and zero gas the reference phase A detector located at the other end of the glass tube measure the brightness of the UV light after it passes though
326. re reference valve d Samples Number of Os detector readings to sample DARK OFFSET mV 1000 1000 Photometer dark offset for measure and reference readings FILT SIZE Samples 1 100 Moving average filter size FILT p Samples 1 100 Moving average filter size in adaptive mode DELTA 1 1000 Absolute concentration difference to trigger adaptive filter FILT_ nu Percent 1 100 Percent concentration difference to trigger adaptive filter 2 Seconds Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode FILT_ADAPT ON OFF ON ON enables adaptive filter OFF disables it 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 11 APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual PDELTA_GAIN PPB dIn Hg 200 200 Multiplied by difference between measure and reference pressure and added to concentration PDELTA CAL DUR Minutes 5 0 1 20 Duration of pressure compensation calibration procedure O3 SLOPE CONST 1 0 0 1 10 Constant factor to keep visible slope near 1 w O3 SLOPE 0 850 1 150 Os photometer slope O3 OFFSET 1000 1000 Os photometer offset O3 BCAL SET PPB 400 0 1 10000 Target Os concentration during bench span calibration O3 PUMP STARTUP ON OFF ON Os pump startup enable ON enables startup procedure O3 PUMP TIMEOUT 30 Os pump startup timeout O3 PUMP PULSE Seconds i O3 pump power off pulse duration PHOTO_CYCLE Seconds 10 Photometer lamp temperature control cycle per
327. red output flow for the calibrator see Section 3 3 10 11 5 1 4 The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings Confirm that the recorder offset see Section 6 9 1 5 is set to zero Perform an AIO calibration see Section 6 9 2 and photometer dark calibration see Section 8 3 5 11 5 1 5 Cannot Zero Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10 2 1 Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone The photometer needs 800 cm min of gas flow Ensure that this is accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator see Section 3 3 10 11 5 1 6 Cannot Span Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10 2 1 Check for proper operation of the meas ref switching valve as described in Section11 5 2 Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10 2 2 Check for operation of the A D circuitry on the motherboard See Section 11 4 10 1 Confirm the Sample Temperature Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct Check and adjust as required The photometer needs 800 cm min of gas flow Ensure that this is accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator see Section 3 3 10 05622 REV B 261 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator M700E Operator s Manual 11 5 2 CHECKING
328. reject interference from sulfur dioxide nitrogen dioxide nitric oxide water and meta xylene While the photometer rejects interference from the aromatic hydrocarbon meta xylene it should be noted that there are a very large number of volatile aromatic hydrocarbons that could potentially interfere with ozone detection If the M7OOE calibrator is installed an environment where high aromatic hydrocarbon concentrations are suspected specific tests should be conducted to reveal the amount of interference these compounds may be causing 9 7 2 PHOTOMETER LAYOUT The photometer is where the absorption of UV light by ozone is measured and converted into a voltage It consists of several sub assemblies 05622 REV B 221 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual e Amercury vapor UV lamp This lamp is coated in a material that optically screens the UV radiation output to remove the producing 185nm radiation Only light at 254nm is emitted e An AC power supply to supply the current for starting and maintaining the plasma arc of the mercury vapor lamp e thermistor and DC heater attached to the UV Lamp to maintain the Lamp at an optimum operating temperature e 42cm long quartz absorption tube A thermistor attached to the quartz tube for measuring sample gas temperature e Gas inlet and outlet mounting blocks that route sample gas into and
329. rnnt rnit anaiaren naaa 70 Figure 6 2 Front Panel Display 2 ati eo cem eet doubt dau eue ee d a uen dads 72 Figure 6 3 Gas Flow through M700E with Generator and Photometer Options during STANDBY 74 Figure 6 4 Gas Flow through Basic M700E in GENERATE Mode seems 75 Figure 6 5 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when Generating Non O Source 76 Figure 6 6 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when Generating Os sssesee em 76 Figure 6 7 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when GPT Mode ssseemm em 84 05622 REV B ix DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Table of Contents M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Figure 6 8 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when in GPTPS Mode 87 Figure 6 9 Gas Flow through M700E with Options when in PURGE 89 Figure 6 10 M700E the TEST CHANNEL Connector ssssessseeee eene 117 Figure 6 11 Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL sse eene eene enne enne 127 Figure 7 1 Default Pin Assignments for Back Panel COMM Port Connectors RS 232 DCE amp DTE 142 Figure 7 2 Default Pin Assignments for CPU COMM Port Connector RS 232
330. roduced using a gas cylinder as the source with the following exceptions and note e f you need a particular flow and don t require a specific concentration then use MANUAL mode When generating in MANUAL mode the output concentration is set by adjusting the DILUENT flow The target and actual concentrations are displayed as test values e f you need a particular concentration but don t require a specific flow then use AUTO mode When generating in AUTO mode the output concentration is set by entering the desired concentration The TOTAL flow entry has no effect the calibrator s output flow depends on the target concentration Again the target and actual concentrations as well as the target and actual flows will be indicated as test parameters e Please note that the name for the permeation tube gas MUST be different than any gas supplied to the calibrator from a bottle For example if there is a H2S permeation tube installed and a bottle of HS gas connected to the calibrator one should be named H5S while the second should be named something like H2S5 The generator is shipped WITHOUT a permeation tube installed The tube MUST be removed during shipping or anytime that there is no dilutant gas connected to the calibrator since there must be a continuous purge flow across the tube Permeation tubes require 48 hours at 50 C to reach a stable output We recommend waiting this long before any calibration checks adjustments or conclusions are reach
331. rrents or back diffusion 3 2 6 OTHER PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS Some of the M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator s optional equipment requires additional pneumatic connections 3 2 6 1 O3 Generator Option In addition to the connections discussed in Sections 3 2 3 3 2 4 and 3 2 5 above this option also requires an O3 exhaust line be connected to the EXHAUST outlet on the back of the M700E see Figure 3 2 NOTE The EXHAUST line must be vented to atmospheric pressure using maximum of 10 meters of 1 4 PTEF tubing Venting must be outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument 3 2 6 2 O5 Generator with Photometer Option In addition to the connections discussed in the previous sections this option also requires the following e Loop back lines must be connected between e PHOTOMETER OUTLET fixture and the PHOTOMETER INLET fixture e PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT fixture and the PHOTOMETER ZERO IN fixture e AnOsexhaust line must be connected to the EXHAUST outlet See Figure 3 2 for the location of these fixtures NOTE The EXHAUST line must be vented to atmospheric pressure using maximum of 10 meters of 1 4 PTEF tubing Venting must be outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument 30 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 3 INITIAL OPERATION If you are unfami
332. rservice teledyne com PHONE 858 657 9800 TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 FAX 858 657 9816 Model 700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics Table D 1 List of Included Diagrams and Schematics Document Document Title 05818 Interconnect Drawing M700E 05821 Interconnect List M700E 04420 SCH PCA 04120 UV DETECTOR M400E 04422 SCH PCA 04144 DC HEATER TEMP SENSOR 04421 SCH PCA 04166 UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY M400E 04259 SCH PCA 04258 KEYBOARD E SERIES 04354 SCH PCA 04003 Pressure Flow Transducer Interface 04395 SCH PCA 04394 INTRFC ETHERNET E SERIES 04524 SCH PCA 04523 RELAY CARD M100E M200E M400E 05470 SCH PCA 05469 VALVE DRIVER M700E 05698 SCH PCA 05697 ADPTR EXT VALVE DRIVER M700E 05703 SCH PCA 05702 MTHERBRD E SER GEN 4 05626 Rev A Pg D 1 APPENDIX D Diagrams and Schematics Model 700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Pg D 2 05626 Rev A
333. s to enter the starting HOUR MINUTE time new selling P7 98 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 5 1 5 Setting Up Control Inputs for a Sequence The 7 calibrator s control inputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source This feature allows the calibrator to operate in a slave mode so that external control sources such as a datalogger can initiate the calibration sequences Each of the M700E calibrator s control outputs is located on the back of the instrument see Figure 3 2 e 12 separate ON OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences e A 12 bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration sequences To assign a CC INPUT pattern code to a particular sequence press Make sure to 7 is in GEN STBY SEQ SETUP standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M700E OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS SETUP XX NAME 0 SET EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Sacia pack Continue pressing SET gt until existing sequences SETUP X X CC INPUT DISA
334. s Manual To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU See Section 6 9 1 1 DIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED NO CAL Continue pressing SET until you reach the output to be configured EXIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT RANGE 5V SET gt EDIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT CALIBRATED NO SET SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT VOLT Z 0 mV 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT These keys increase decrease These menu s the analog output signal level if not the value on the display only appear by 100 10 or 1 counts AUTO CAL is Continue adjustments until the DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT VOLT S 4500 mV OF voltage measured at the output ofthe analyzer and or the input U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT ofthe recording device reads 0 mV or 9096 of full 4 DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT CALIBRATED YES SET SET CAL EXIT 128 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 9 3 AIN CALIBRATION This is the sub menu calibrates the calibrator s A to D conversion circuitry This calibration is only necessary after amajor repair such as the replacement of a CPU a motherboard or a power supply To perform an AIN CALIBRATION press From the AIO CONFIGURATION S
335. s in the photometer 0 C 70 C absorption tube PHOTOLAMPTEMP LAMP TEMP The temperature of the The temperature of the photometer UV lamp UV The temperature of the photometer UV lamp EM LAMP TEMP The temperature of the generator s UV 0 mV 5000 mV lamp CHASSIS TEMP The temperature inside the M700E s chassis 0 C 70 C same as BOX TEMP O3 PHOTO CONC The current concentration of being 0 PPM 1 ppm measured by the photometer Once a function is selected the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the analog output but also adds TEST to the list of Test Functions viewable via the Front Panel Display 05622 REV B 119 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual To activate the TEST Channel and select a function press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD Toggle these keys to choose a mass flow controller TEST channel paramete STANDBY SETUP X X COMM ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU VARS FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until TEST CHAN OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR TEST CHAN NONE TEST CHANNEL CHASSIS TEMP PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 120 PRINTED DOCUMENT
336. s it to accept any AC power configuration within the limits specified in Table 2 2 3 1 2 2 Analog Output Connections The M700E is equipped with an analog output channel accessible through a connector on the back panel of the instrument The standard configuration for this output is mVDC It can be set by the user to output one of a variety of diagnostic test functions see Section 6 9 1 2 To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and or data logger to the appropriate analog output connections on the rear panel of the calibrator Pin outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are ANALOG OUT Figure 3 7 M700E Analog Output Connector 16 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 1 2 3 Connecting the Status Outputs The status outputs report calibrator conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors which sink up to 50 mA of DC current These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D NOTE Most PLC s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external device When connecting to a unit that doe
337. s not have this feature an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA At 50 mA the transistor will drop approximately 1 2V from its collector to emitter The status outputs are accessed via a 12 pin connector on the calibrator s rear panel labeled STATUS The function of each pin is defined in Table 3 1 STATUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D x x 0 o o Of of 2 lt z af 3 2 o a s xi of Ss lt 1 oF 2 gt oj 2 o a a lo ei gt lt x 0 0 o e lt x T ol x 2 E 0 c c gt amp 4 Of 5 5 o wy E a a Lr ad O x m x 2 Figure 3 8 Status Output Connector The pin assignments for the Status Outputs are 05622 REVB 17 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Getting Started M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table 3 1 Status Output Pin Assignments 6 PRESS ALARM On whenever gas pressure alarm is active Emitter BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together Digital Ground The ground level from the calibrator s internal DC power supplies Emitter BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 9 to 16 are bussed together DC POWER 5VDC 3 1 2 4 Connecting the Control Inputs The calibrator is equipped with 12 digital control inputs that can be used to Initiate various user programmab
338. s the front of the optical bench when it is reassembled prior to gently retightening the tube retainer screws This will ensure that the tube is assembled with the forward end against the stop inside the detector manifold 05622 REV B 231 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M700E Operator s Manual 10 2 3 UV SOURCE LAMP ADJUSTMENT This procedure provides in detail the steps for adjustment of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly This procedure should be done whenever the PHOTO REFERENCE test function value drops below 3000 mV Ensure that the calibrator is warmed up and has been running for at least 30 minutes before proceeding Remove the cover from the calibrator Locate the optional Photometer see Figure 3 4 Locate the UV DETECTOR GAIN ADJUST POT on the photometer assembly see Figure 10 5 Or qs oS ads Perform the following procedure Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEQ MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 8 1 8 ENTR Toggle these keys to enter the correct PASSWORD SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT ENTR PREV NEXT JUMP JUMP TO 1 5 4 ENTR a Toggle these keys to show the ID number for the desired signal see Appendix A 54 PHOTO_DET 3342 2 MV PREV NEXT PRNT Additional adjustment can be made by physically rotating the lamp in it
339. scards the 0 1 JAN O 6 ENTR new setting ENTR accepts the new setting r7 Toggle these keys to enter starting day month and year DAY MONTH YEAR SYSTEM TIME 12 00 EXIT discards the 1 2 0 n ENTR EXIT si new setting SEL AL ENTR accepts the new setting IZ Toggle these keys to enter the DELTA HOUR MINUTE time 05622 REV B 97 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual To set the delta timer press Make sure that the M O0E GEN STBY SEQ SETUP is in standby mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS SEG MORE SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION EDIT PRINT EXIT his display only appears if there are no sequences currently programmed into the M7OOE OTHERWISE END OF SEQUENCES INS 1 SEQ NAME X STEPS INS BEL EDIT SETUP X X NAME SET EDIT EXIT Deletes the sequence shown Edits the sequence shown in the message field in the message field Seite cane Continue pressing SET until existing sequences SETUP X X TIMER DELTA 001 00 00 sET gt EDIT SETUPX X TIMER DELTA 0 Days STEET 0 0 ENTR EXIT new setling Toggle these keys to enter PER number of days to wait new selling 7 between before running sequence again SYSTEM TIMER DELTA 00 00 EXIT discards the 1 2 EU e ENTR EXIT p new setling E IE ENTR accepts the Toggle these key
340. sensors installed as well In the basic unit a printed circuit assembly located near the front of the calibrator near the MFC s includes sensors that measure the pressure of the diluent gas and the source gas currently selected to flow into the calibrator The calibrator monitors these sensors e Should the pressure of one of them fall below 15 PSIG or rise above 36 PSIG a warning is issued 05622 REV B 197 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual In units with the optional O3 generator installed a second PCA located at the rear of the calibrator just behind the generator assembly includes a sensor that measures the gas pressure of the zero air flowing into the generator A regulator is also located on the gas input to the generator that maintains the pressure differential needed for the critical flow orifice to operate correctly e Should the pressure of one of this sensor fall below 15 PSIG or rise above 25 PSIG a warning is issued In calibrators with photometers installed a second pressure located on the rear PCA measures the pressure of gas in the photometer s absorption tube This data is used by the CPU when calculating the concentration inside the absorption tube 198 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation 9 3 ELECTRONIC O
341. setting J gt ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle these keys until CA LEVEL number the designation of the existing defined level program is reached ENTR accepts the new LEVEL number 138 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 11 5 5 Editing or Deleting a LEVEL To edit or delete an existing LEVEL press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode GEN STBY SEQ SETUP L PRIMARY SETUP MENLI LVL GAS SEQ MORE EVEL jGas Conc Status Block Set PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT Continue pressing NEXT or PREV until until LEVEL to be edited or deleted appears SETUP X X 7 PURGE PREV NEXT S DEL EDIT SETUP X X DELETEL STEP SETUP LEVEL NUMBER 12 YES NO Toggle these keys SET SET gt EDIT select the parameter to be edited B Level ID Number SETUP X X DURATION 10 0 MIN Action Status Block 1 Press EDIT then follow the instructions for the PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT parameter See Sections 6 11 3 through 6 11 5 4 Status Block 2 and 6 11 6 05622 REV B 139 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 11 6 CONFIGURING LEVEL STATUS BLOCKS There are two STATUS BLOCKS associated with LEADS LEVELS e BLOCK 1 This bloc
342. splay directly above each active key defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being performed Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the calibrator Note that the keys do not auto repeat In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two consecutive operations it must be released and repressed 9 4 1 3 Display The main display of the calibrator is a vacuum florescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each Information is organized in the following manner see Figure 9 10 e MODE FIELD Displays the name of the calibrator s current operating mode e MESSAGE FIELD Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages operation data and response messages during interactive tasks e KEY DEFINITION FIELD Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display These definitions are dynamic context sensitive and software driven 9 4 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface Electronics to Relay Board 2 to from CPU Key Press Detect Display Data Decoder Keyboard Interrupt Status Bit Display Power Watchdog Parallel Data Keypad Decoder Display Write From 5 VDC Power Supply Optional Maintenance eos LED Sample LED Green 2 Lang l switch I 4 Cal LED Yellow 2x40 CHAR VACUUM Fault LED FLUORESCENT DISPLAY Red
343. sssssssseee ennemis 217 9 77 Photomieter Operation ec t ve bee bes 217 9 7 1 Measurement Method 218 9 7 1 1 Calculating Concentration ioiaren oidart enrii enne nnns 218 9 7 1 2 The Measurement Reference Cycle sssssssssssseseeeeeen nennen nnns 219 9 7 1 3 The Absorption Path iecore eese te eel eig eee eel ero a erant recen 221 9 71 4 Interferent Rejection cuiii edidi eee d teli e Ld ah edd Ee dd dandi de uide a cdd dk dd ocn 221 9 7 2 Photometer Layout e e e e Lee vance ecl ure te Pv eng e Le 221 9 7 3 Photometer Pneumatic Operation enne nennen nennen nnn 222 9 7 4 Photometer Electronic Operation sss eene eren nnne nnne nnn 223 9 7 4 1 Photometer Temperature Control cccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenss 223 9 7 4 2 Pneumatic Sensors for the 224 10 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp PROCEDURES nnn nnn nnns 225 10 1 Maintenance Schedule tee eee GR Peg 225 10 2 Maintenance Procedures ec e edere eerie ree ht e erp ue ee Exeter e eret dade tet Dees Reda setas 227 10 2 1 5 Auto Leak Check sendet
344. ssure Sensor Calibration Setup ASSOCIATED PRESSURE MONITOR TEST FUNCTION MEASUREMENT POINT Diluent Pressure Sensor DIL PRESSURE Insert monitor just before the inlet port of the diluent MFC Cal Gas Pressure Sensor CAL PRESSURE Insert monitor just before the inlet port of the cal gas MFC O Reaulator P Insert monitor in line between the regulator ba a and the O3 gas pressure sensor located on T i REG PRESSURE the O3 generator photometer pressure P flow sensor PCA Sample Gas Pressure Use monitor to measure ambient Sensor PHOTO SPRESS atmospheric pressure at the calibrator s Optional Photometer location 05622 REV B 185 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibration and Verification M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Chassis DILUENT INLET CAL GAS 1 INLET CAL GAS 2 INLET CAL GAS 3 INLET CAL GAS 4 INLET DILUENT Valve Purge GAS INPUT MANIFOLD back pane INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA Pressur gt l gey N Monitor 1 DILUENT PRESSURE SENSOR Diluent Mass Flow Controller CAL GAS PRESSURE SENSOR Cal Gas yal Mass Flow Controller On Back Panel PHOTOMETER INLET PHOTOMETER ZEROIN PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET
345. st Functions Pump Diaphragm Absorption Perform Flow Check Perform Leak Check Pneumatic lines Table 10 1 M700E Maintenance Schedule Date Performed Action Manual Section Weekly or after any Maintenance or Repair Record and analyze No Replacement Required Under Normal Circumstances this Pump Will Last the Lifetime of the Instrument Cleaning of the Photometer Absorption Tube Should Not Be Required Inspect as long as EAS As Needed Sina ONLY CLEAN DRY PARTICULATE FREE Clean Zero Air Diluent Gas is used with the M700E Calibrator Annually or any Verify Flow time the M700E s of MFC s internal DAC is recalibrated Verify Leak Annually or after any Maintenance Tight or Repair Examine As needed Yes if and clean cleaned Only applies to M700E Calibrator s with photometer options installed 226 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 10 2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard maintenance of the M700E calibrator 10 2 1 AUTO LEAK CHECK 10 2 1 1 Equipment Required Four 4 1 4 Pneumatic caps One 1 1 8 Pneumatic Cap One 1 6 hexagonal Driver Wrench One 1 Pneumatic T fitting 10 2 1 2 Setup Auto Leak Check To perform a leak check on the M70OE ca
346. submenu of the DIAG menu as described above turn the UV Lamp Heater on and off Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J14 of the Relay Board If the FET Driver has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2 e If the FET Driver checks out OK the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have failed Unplug the connector to the Ozone Generator Heater Thermistor PCB and measure the resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6 pin connector 11 5 TROUBLE SHOOTING THE OPTIONAL PHOTOMETER 11 5 1 DYNAMIC PROBLEMS WITH THE OPTIONAL PHOTOMETER Dynamic problems are problems that only manifest themselves when the photometer is measuring O3 concentration gas mixtures These can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve Since many photometer behaviors that appear to be a dynamic in nature are often a symptom of a seemingly unrelated static problems it is recommended that dynamic problems not be addressed until all static problems warning conditions and subsystems have been checked and any problems found are resolved Once this has been accomplished the following most common dynamic problems should be checked 11 5 1 1 Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero e Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10 2 1 e Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone e Confirm that the Source Lamp is fully inserted and that the lamp hold down
347. t INLET bin A 2 Flow Control seras Were lve OFF a E 800 om bin 39 i S 9 whi 1 TAL GAEL whi PHOTOMETER PRESSURE E IMEET ad Gontrollar e ZERO IM ZERO OUT CAL GAS 2 TALET INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA 1 INTERHAL i VENT CAL GAS d 1 INLET EXHAUST o d TAL GAS OFF PHOTOMETER INLET et 9 yet GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yet L fou back panel yt CAL GAS QUTPUT 1 QUTPUT 2 ECT Volume VENT blu 1 Grt Mata Flow Gontrollar 1 1 CAL GAS 1 1 l 1 GAS OUTPUT MAMIFOLO Figure 6 3 Gas Flow through M700E with O Generator and Photometer Options during STANDBY 74 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator 6 4 GENERATE MODE 6 4 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE GENERATE MODE This mode allows the user to generate the desired calibration gas mixtures The types of gas include NO SO CO HC or ZERO gas based on the source gas concentration entered during initial setup see Section 3 3 8 If the units has an optional generator installed various concentrations of be generated as well M700E Chassis
348. t card manually The INET sub menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card s configuration properties Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package The DHCP software is unable to initialize the calibrator s interface You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones automatically chosen by DHCP Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two step process STEP 1 Turn DHCP OFF While DHCP is turned ON the ability to set the INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK manually is disabled m 4 c a GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MENU lD ADDR INET EXIT SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 amp 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X DHCP ON SET SET EDIT EXIT Toggle this key SETUP X X DHCP ON to turn DHCP ON ENTR EXIT ON OFF SETUP X X DHCP OFF ENTR accepts OFF ENTR EXIT the new seiting EXIT ignores the new setting p Continue to Step 2 Below 162 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E STEP 2 Configure the INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing Internet Configuration Keypad Functions From Step 1 above Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and available characters 0 9 amp CH CH Moves the cursor one ch
349. t panel The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode This mode is used for performing certain configuration operations such as programming the concentration of source gases setting up automatic calibration sequences and configuring the analog digital inputs and outputs The SETUP mode is also used for accessing various diagnostic tests and functions during troubleshooting Mode Field STANDBY ACT CAL 0 000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEN STBY SEQ Figure 6 2 Front Panel Display The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running Besides STANDBY and SETUP other modes the calibrator can be operated in are listed in Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Calibrator Operating Modes One of the calibrator s diagnostic modes is being utilized When the diagnostic functions that have the greatest potential to conflict with generating concentrations are active the instrument is automatically placed into standby mode GENERATE In this mode the instrument is engaged in producing calibration gas mixtures GPT The calibrator is using the generator and source gas inputs to mix and generate calibration gas using the gas phase titration method GPTPS Stands for Gas Phase Titration Preset In this mode the M700E determines the precise performance characteristics of the O3 generator at the target values for an upcoming GP
350. tatic Devices FEP Acronym for Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer one of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon along with PFA and PTFE FLASH flash memory is non volatile solid state memory 2 Bus read I square C Bus A serial clocked serial bus for communication between individual system components IC Acronym for Integrated Circuit a modern semi conductor circuit that can contain many basic components Such as resistors transistors capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies iDAS Acronym for Internal Data Acquisition System previously referred to as DAS LAN Acronym for ocal area network LED Acronym for Light Emitting Diode LPM Acronym for Liters Per Minute Acronym for Mass Flow Controller MOLAR MASS The molar mass is the mass expressed in grams of 1 mole of a specific substance Conversely one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance 46 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary EXAMPLE The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams Conversely one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements PCA Acronym for Pr
351. tation APPENDIX A 1 Model 700E Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 APPENDIX A 2 Model 700E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I O Revision D 1 APPENDIX 3 Model 700E Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I O Revision D 1 APPENDIX 4 Model 700E Signal I O Definitions Revision D 1 APPENDIX A 5 Model M700E Terminal Command Designators Revision D 1 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 1 APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documentation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES Pg A 2 05623 Rev DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 TEST TST TST gt x GEN STBY Press to cause calibrator to enter STANDBY mode See GENERATE E ACT CAL Value LPM TARG CAL Value LPM ACT DIL Value LPM TARG DIL Value LPM GEN REF Value MV 03 FLOW Value LPM GEN DRIVE Value MV LAMP TEMP Value CAL PRESSURE Value PSIG DIL PRESSURE Value PSIG REG PRESSURE Value PSIG ACTz Mode Value Gas TARG Mode Value Gas Type BOX TEMP Value C PHOTO MEASURE Value MV PHOTO REFERENCE Value MV PHOTO FLOW Value LPM PHOTO LAMP TEMP Value C PHOTO SPRESS Value IN HG A PHOTOSTEMP Value C PHOTO SLOPE Value PHOTO OFFSET Value TIME HH MM SS
352. tenance Schedule amp Procedures 10 2 2 CLEANING OR REPLACING THE ABSORPTION TUBE NOTE Although this procedure should never be needed as long as the user is careful to supply the photometer with clean dry and particulate free zero air only it is included here for those rare occasions when cleaning or replacing the absorption tube may be required Remove the center cover from the optical bench Unclip the sample thermistor from the tube Loosen the two screws on the round tube retainers at either end of the tube Using both hands carefully rotate the tube to free it ak WN gt Slide the tube towards the lamp housing e The front of the tube can now be slid past the detector block and out of the instrument CAUTION DO NOT CAUSE THE TUBE TO BIND AGAINST THE METAL HOUSINGS THE TUBE MAY BREAK AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY Clean the tube by rinsing with de ionized water Air dry the tube Check the cleaning job by looking down the bore of the tube e t should be free from dirt and lint 9 Inspect the o rings that seal the ends of the optical tube these o rings may stay seated in the manifolds when the tube is removed e fthere is any noticeable damage to these o rings they should be replaced 10 Re assemble the tube into the lamp housing and perform an AUTO LEAK CHECK on the instrument NOTE It is important for proper optical alignment that the tube be pushed all the way toward
353. tep The duration step causes the M700E to continue performing whatever action was called for by the preceding step of the sequence e fthat step put the instrument into STANDBY mode the calibrator stays in STANDBY mode for the period specified by the DURATION step e If that step put the instrument into GENERATE mode the will continue to GENERATE whatever calibration mixture was programmed into that step for the period specified by the DURATION step To insert DURATION step into a sequence press Staring at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREY NEXT ENTR EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys 1a scroll hough ihe list of available instrucbians INSERT STEP OURSTION ENTR EXIT DURATION 1 0 MIN ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set DURATION of this step L7 SETUP 3 DURATION 1043 MIN PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT 6 5 2 7 The EXECSEQ Step The EXECSEQ step allows the sequence to call another already programmed sequence This is a very powerful tool in that it allows the user to create a toolbox of often used operations that can then be mixed and matched by an overhead sequence To insert an EXECSEQ step into a sequence press Use these keys to scroll hough the list of available sequences Starting at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP X X INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT k
354. th understanding how electro static charges occur in the first place Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate some electrons from one surface are retained by the other Materials Makes Contact Materials Separate PROTONS 3 PROTONS 3 PROTONS PROTONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 LECTRONS ELECTRONS 4 ems emer od a NET CHARGE 0 NET CHARGE O NET CHARGE 1 NET CHARGE 1 Figure 12 1 Triboelectric Charging If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place or static The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor With each step electrons change places and the resulting electro static charge builds up quickly reaching significant levels Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of Styrofoam pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges Table 12 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities MEANS OF GENERATION 65 90 RH 10 25 RH Walking across nylon carp
355. than 10 of full scale or greater than full scale WMFCCAL MFC CALIBRATION WARNING Any MFC sensor offset greater than allowable limit WOSPUMP PUMP WARNING Os pump failed to turn on within timeout period specified by 03 PUMP TIMEOUT variable WOUTPUT INVALID OUTPUT WARNING An invalid output has been selected for the requested gas generation For example output B was selected when generating ozone WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board WVALVEBOARD VALVE BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the valve board WLAMPDRIVER LAMP DRIVER WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with Pg A 18 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision D 1 either the O3 generator or photometer lamp C driver chip FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel WFRONTPANEL WMFCCOMM MFC COMMUNICATION WARNING Firmware is unable to communicate with any MFC ANALOG CAL WARNING The A D or at least one D A channel has not been calibrated WANALOGCAL 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 19 APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Table A 3 M700E Test Functions Revision D 1 Test Measurements ACTCALFLOW TARGCALFLOW ACTDILFLOW TARGDI
356. the calibrator s firmware allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing painstaking preventative maintenance procedures For the most part the M700E calibrator is maintenance free there are however a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the M700E photometer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Chapter 11 of this manual 10 1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Table 10 1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the M700E Please note that in certain environments i e dusty very high ambient pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown NOTE If the instrument has the optional photometer installed a Span and Zero Calibration Check must be performed on the photometer following some of the maintenance procedure listed below See Section 8 3 for instructions on performing checks CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING ANY OF THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS THAT REQUIRE ENTRY INTO THE INTERIOR OF THE CALIBRATOR CAUTION THE OPERATIONS OUTLINED IN THIS CHAPTER ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL ONLY 05622 REV B 225 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M700E Operator s Manual Verify Te
357. ther case wait several seconds Place the item in the container 4 Seal the container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields e Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device NOTE If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti ESD bags or containers available Teledyne API s Customer Service department will supply them see Section 11 8 for contact information Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation USER NOTES 05622 REV B 273 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS A Primer on Electro Static Discharge M700E Operator s Manual USER NOTES 274 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge USER NOTES 05622 REV B 275 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS A Primer on Electro Static Discharge M700E Operator s Manual USER NOTES 276 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual APPENDIX Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documen
358. thumb screw is tight e Check for a dirty Absorption Cell and or pneumatic lines Clean as necessary as described in Section 10 2 2 e Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench the pneumatic line at the lamp end of the bench and plug the port in the bench If readings remain noisy the problem is in one of the electronic sections of the instrument If readings become quiet the problem is in the instrument s pneumatics 260 05622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual General Troubleshooting amp Repair of the M700E Calibrator 11 5 1 2 Noisy Unstable or Non Linear Span O3 Readings Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10 2 1 Check for proper operation of the meas ref switching valve as described in Section 11 5 2 Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10 2 2 Check for operation of the A D circuitry on the motherboard See Section 11 4 10 1 Confirm the Sample Temperature Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct Check and adjust as required 11 5 1 3 Slow Response to Changes in Concentration Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10 2 2 Check for pneumatic leaks as described in Section 10 2 1 The photometer needs 800 cm min of gas flow Ensure that this is accounted for when calculating total requi
359. tics for M700E Calibrator with Optional Generator and GPT Chamber 50 Figure 5 2 Internal Pneumatics for M700E Calibrator with Optional Generator and Photometer 52 Figure 5 3 Basic M700E with Multiple Calibration Gas MFOC s sssssssssee enm emm nennen 54 Figure 5 4 M700E with Multiple Calibration Gas MFC s and Options OPT 01A and OPT 02A Installed 55 Figure 5 5 M700E with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets 56 Figure 5 6 M700E Multi drop Card ssessseeeee eene nen mmn enne eren nnne nennen rennen iaia 57 Figure 5 7 M7QOE Ethernet Card oenruk dente bead 58 Figure 5 8 M700E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed ssssseeene enm emen eren 58 Figure 5 9 M700E Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed sssesssseeeenm enm nennen 59 Figure 5 10 Valve Driver PCA Layout aud d e eee vanes 60 Figure 5 11 Permeation Tube Gas Generator Option enne ennemis 61 Figure 5 12 Pneumatic Diagram of M700E with Permeation emm 62 Figure 5 13 Internal Pneumatics for M700E Calibrator with Optional Dual Gas Output NO Special 66 Figure 6 1 Viewing M700E Test Functions sessseeeeneeme emm nennen eren nen
360. ties manually See your network administrator 160 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED 5622 REV B DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Remote Operation Of The M700E To view the above properties listed in Table 7 5 press GEN STBY SEQ PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COMI INET EXIT SETUP ENTER PASSWORD218 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP XX DHCP ON SET SET EDIT EXI SETUP XX INST IP20 0 0 0 SET EDIT key is disabled when DHCP is ON SETUP X X GATEWAY IF 0 0 0 0 SET gt SETUP SUBNET MASK IP 0 0 0 0 SET SET DO NOT alter unless SETUP X X TCP PORT 3000 SET SET EDIT instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel SETUP HOSTNAME M7DOE SET SET EDIT EXI SETUP X X INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically SETUP INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP X X INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID ADDR INET EXIT Contact your IT Network Administrator 05622 REV B 161 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Remote Operation Of The M700E M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 7 4 2 1 Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses There are several circumstances when you may need to configure the interface settings of the calibrator s Etherne
361. tion as AOUT CALIBRATED but on this one channel only AIN CALIBRATED Shows the calibration status YES NO and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital converter circuit on the motherboard Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output To configure the calibrators TEST CHANNEL set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the outputs This consists of 1 Choosing a TEST CHANNEL function to be output on the channel 2 Selecting a signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel 3 Determining if the over range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly 4 Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal if required Section 6 9 1 5 05622 REV B 117 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 5 Calibrating the output channel This can be done automatically or manually for each channel see Section 6 9 2 To access the analog I O configuration sub menu press Make sure that the M700E is in standby mode Toggle these keys to enter the Optional 2nd CAL GAS MFC STANDBY ACT CAL 0 0000 LPM lt TST TST gt GEM STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS FLOW DIAG EXIT SETUP XX ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O NEXT ENTR EXIT
362. tion calculations and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU They are stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners e Through the calibrator s keyboard and vacuum florescent display over a clocked digital serial I O bus using a protocol called 1 C e RS 232 and RS485 serial I O channels e Via an optional Ethernet communications card e Various digital and analog outputs and e A set of digital control input channels Finally the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches also over the IC bus located on a separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters motors and valves 9 3 2 CPU The CPU is a low power 5 VDC 0 8A max high performance 386 based microcomputer running a version of the DOS operating system Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification version 2 3 for embedded PC and PC AT applications It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock rate over an internal 32 bit data and address bus Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4 channel direct memory access DMA devices over data busses of either 8 bit or 16 bit bandwidth The CPU supports both RS 232 and RS 485 serial protocols Figure 9 4 shows the CPU board The CPU communicates with the
363. tion s grounded protective mat 4 Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive Device e Only lay tools or ESD sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation Never lay them down on any non ESD preventative surface 5 Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti static storage bags or bins and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap 6 Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench 05622 REV B 271 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS A Primer on Electro Static Discharge M700E Operator s Manual 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne API analyzer to an anti ESD workbench or back 1 Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation 2 Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin 3 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate e lf you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point e f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds 4 Place the item in the container Seal the container If using a ba
364. tor Fiow Control 1 0 LPM LA gm LY 1 I Oo GAS INPUT _ PRESSURE SENSOR HOSN3S O PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR _ DILUENT A e INLET Se 100 e a 9 DILUENT Diluent 2 GEN PHOTOMETER Valve Mass Flow Controller Perm Tube PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR Oven REFIMEAS io PHOTOMETER valve INLET Flow Control Permeation E 800 cm Tube af s 3 DILUENT E PHOTOMETER CAL GAS E pressure SER ZERO IN 1 INLET m E SENSOR Perm ccc iu V Valve PHOTOMETER 77 c Rd i 3 2 ZERO OUT CAL GAS 2 E y A 2 INLET INTERNAL P CAL GAS aln E PRESSURE GPT LN CAL GAS A SENSOR Valve 3 INLET J EXHAUST CAL GAS lt PHOTOMETER 4 INLET 1 OUTLET yel GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel __ ton back panal CAL GAS Cal Gas OUTPUT 1 Mass Flow Controller 1 CAL GAS i i blu OUTPUT 2 Volume N A VENT p P GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 5 12 Pneumatic Diagram of M700E with Permeation Generator 62 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Once installed and stabilized generating a calibration gas from the M700E with a permeation generator is the same as if the gas was being p
365. tor Operator s Manual Table 2 3 M700E Specifications for Optional Ozone Generator Maximum Output 6 ppm LPM Minimum Output 100 ppb LPM Response Time 180 Sec 98 Optical Feedback Standard Stability 24 hours 1 of Reading or 1 ppb whichever is greater Photometer Feedback Mode Table 2 4 M700E Specifications for Optional Photometer Full Scale Range 100 ppb to 10 ppm User Selectable Precision 1 0 ppb Linearity 1 0 Full Scale Rise Fall Time lt 20 sec photometer response Response Time 95 180 sec system response Zero Drift 1 0 ppb 7 days Span Drift lt 1 24 hours lt 2 7 days Minimum Gas Flow Required 800 cc min 2 2 CE MARK COMPLIANCE EMISSIONS COMPLIANCE Teledyne API s M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant with EN61326 1997 w A1 98 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 Class A Tested on 9 29 06 at CKC Laboratories Inc Report Number CE06 161 SAFETY COMPLIANCE Teledyne API s M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant with IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 Tested on 10 24 06 at CKC Laboratories Inc Report Number SAFO06 014 8 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Specifications Approvals and Warranty 2 3 WARRANTY WARR
366. tor path length BOX SET 04 00 Internal box temperature set mS point and warning limits 5 45 GAS MOL WEIGHT MolWt 1 99 999 Molar mass of sample gas for computing concentrations by weight instead of volume SERIAL_NUMBER 00000000 Any character Unique serial number for in the allowed instrument character set Up to 100 characters long 05623 Rev C DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 15 APPENDIX 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Revision D 1 700 Calibrator Operator s Manual DISP_INTENSITY 2 RESET ENABLE e ms MFC_BUSY_TIME CLOCK_FORMAT Front panel display intensity Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface OFF ON bus automatic reset enable N TIME H M S Time it takes for MFC to process command Time of day clock format flags Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface Any character in the allowed character set Up to 100 characters 95a Abbreviated weekday long name b Abbreviated month name d Day of month as decimal number 01 31 Hour in 24 hour format 00 23 l Hour in 12 hour format 01 12 j Day of year as decimal number 001 366 m Month as decimal number 01 12 Minute as decimal number 00 59 p A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock
367. tration prior to doing a GPT As many as 50 independent calibration sequences may be programmed into the M70OE covering time periods of up to one year The setup of sequences is simple and intuitive These sequences may be actuated manually automatically or by a remote signal The sequences may be uploaded remotely including remote editing All programs are maintained in non volatile memory The M700E design emphasizes fast response repeatability overall accuracy and ease of operation It may be combined with the M701 Zero Air Generator to provide the ultimate in easy to use precise calibration for your gas calibrators Some of the exceptional features of your M700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator are e Advanced E Series electronics e Lightweight for transportability e Optional Ethernet connectivity e Generates precise calibration gases for Ozone NO NO HC H2S SO e 12 independent timers for sequences e Nested sequences up to 5 levels e Software linearization of Mass Flow controllers e 4 calibration gas ports configurable for single or multi blend gases e Glass GPT chamber e Optional Ozone generator and photometer allows use as primary or transfer standard 05622 REVB 3 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Introduction M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 1 2 USING THIS MANUAL NOTE Throughout this manual words printed in capital bold letters such as SETUP or ENTR re
368. tscrew and pull the lamp from its housing 7 Install the new lamp in the housing pushing it all the way in Leave the UV lamp setscrew loose for now Turn the calibrator back on and allow to warm up for at least 30 minutes Turn the UV detector gain adjustment pot See Figure 10 5 clockwise to its minimum value The pot may click softly when the limit is reached 10 Perform the UV Lamp Adjustment procedure described in Section 10 2 3 with the following exceptions a Slowly rotate the lamp in its housing up to 74 turn in either direction until a MINIMUM value is observed e Ensure the lamp is pushed all the way into the housing while performing this rotation e Ifthe PHOTO_DET will not drop below 5000 mV while performing this rotation contact Teledyne API S Customer Service for assistance b Once a lamp position is found that corresponds to a minimum observed value for PHOTO_DET tighten the lamp setscrew at the approximate minimum value observed c Adjust PHOTO_DET within the range of 4400 4600 mV 11 Replace the cover on the calibrator NOTE The UV lamp contains mercury Hg which is considered hazardous waste The lamp should be disposed of in accordance with local regulations regarding waste containing mercury 05622 REV B 233 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures M700E Operator s Manual 10 2 5 ADJUSTMENT O
369. ture containing using a gas phase titration process GPT by precisely mixing bottled NO of a known concentration with O3 of a known n concentration and diluent gas zero air The principle of GPT is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O that produces quantities of NO as according to the following equation Equation 9 3 NO O5 gt NO Under controlled circumstances the NO O reaction is very efficient 196 residual therefore the concentration of resulting from the mixing of NO and can be accurately predicted and controlled as long as the following conditions are met e The amount of used in the mixture is known f The amount of NO used in the mixture is AT LEAST 10 greater than the amount O in the mixture g The volume of the mixing chamber is known h The NO and O flow rates from which the time the two gases are in the mixing chamber are low enough to give a residence time of the reactants in the mixing chamber of 22 75 ppm min Given the above conditions the amount of NO being output by the M700E will be equal to at a 1 1 ratio to the amount of added Since e The O flow rate of the M700E s generator is a fixed value typically about 0 105 LPM e The GPT chamber s volume is known e The source concentration of NO is a fixed value Once the TOTALFLOW is determined and entered into the M700E s memory and target concentration for the O
370. uction provided by Teledyne API or iii not properly maintained THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OF TELEDYNE API S PERFORMANCE HEREUNDER WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE TERMS AND CONDITIONS All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center After the repair the equipment will be returned freight prepaid USER NOTES 05622 REVB 9 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Specifications Approvals and Warranty M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 10 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started 3 GETTING STARTED 3 1 UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP CAUTION THE M700E WEIGHS ABOUT 17 KG 40 POUNDS WITHOUT OPTIONS INSTALLED TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND USING TWO PERSONS TO LIFT AND CARRY THE CALIBRATOR 1 Inspect the received packag
371. ue LPM e TARG CAL Value LPM e ACT DiL Va ue LPM e TARG DIL Value LPM e GEN REF Value MV FLOW Value LPM e GEN DRIVE Value MV e 03 LAMP C CAL PRESSURE Value PSIG e DIL PRESSURE Value PSIG e REG PRESSURE Value PSIG e ACT2 Mode Value Gas Type e TARG Mode Value Gas Type e BOX TEMP Vaiue C e PHOTO MEASURE Value MV e PHOTO REFERENCE Value MV e PHOTO FLOW Value LPM e PHOTO LAMP TEMP Valuej C e PHOTO SPRESS Valuej IN HG A e PHOTO STEMP Value C e PHOTO SLOPE Value e PHOTO OFFSET Value PPB e TIME2 HH MM SS Toggle lt TST TST gt keys to scroll through list of functions Only appears when warning messages are active Only appears when an one or more calibration sequences are programmed into the calibrator s memory Only appears if optional Os generator is installed Only appears if optional Os photometer bench is installed Figure 6 1 Viewing M700E Test Functions 70 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Operating the M700E Calibrator Table 6 1 Test Functions Defined DISPLAY PARAMETER UNITS DESCRIPTION ACT CAL ACTCALFLOW LPM The actual gas flow rate of source gas being output by the calibrator TARGCALFLOW S source gas flow rate for which the calibrator output is ACT DIL ACTDILFLOW LPM The actual gas
372. uence the M70OE firmware will automatically insert a DURATION step that needs to be defined To insert GPTPS step into a sequence press Toggle these keys to set the NO target concentration MUST be at least 10 Higher than the Target Concentration 2 Toggle these keys to set the NO target concentration Should be equal to the expected concentration Toggle these keys to set the target TOTAL FLOW Default 2 000 LPM Toggle these keys to set DURATION of this step Starting at the STEPS Submenu INSERT STEP Submenu SETUP INSERT STEP GENERATE PREV NEXT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the list of available instructions SETUP ENTR EXIT INSERT STEP GPTPS PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP GPTPS 0 0 PPB NO EXIT discards the new gas type amp 0 0 0 0 PPB ENTR EXIT target concentration p 1 ENTR accepts the new gas type amp target concentration SETUP GPTPS 0 0 PPB O3 0 PPB ENTR Exr EXIT piene the is type amp arget concentration ENTR accepts the new gas type amp target concentration SETUP TOTAL FLOW 2 000 LPM EXIT discards the new flow rate 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new gas flow rate Z7 DURATION 10 0 MIN EXIT discards the new setting 0 1 0 0 SSS ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting J gt SETUP 3 DURATION 10 0 MIN PREV NEXT INS
373. unicate with the Front Panel Display Keyboard WARNING only appears on Serial I O COMM Port s Front Panel Display will be frozen blank or will not respond Failed Keyboard 2 Bus failure Loose Connector Wiring LAMP DRIVER WARN The CPU is unable to communicate with either the O3 generator or photometer lamp C driver chip l C has failed MFC COMMUNICATION WARNING Firmware is unable to communicate with any MFC has failed One of the MFC s has failed Cabling loose or broken between MFC and Motherboard MFC PRESSURE WARNING One of the calibrator s mass flow controllers internal gas pressure is lt 15 PSIG or gt 36 PSIG Zero or source air supply is incorrectly set up or improperly vented Leak or blockage exists in the M700E s internal pneumatics Failed CAL GAS or DUILUENT pressure sensor GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING IZS Ozone Generator Temp is outside of control range of 48 C 3 C No IZS option installed instrument improperly configured O3 generator heater generator temperature sensor Relay controlling the O3 generator heater Entire Relay PCA lC Bus GEN REFERENCE The Oz generator s Possible failure of O3 generator UV Lamp 1 reference detector output generator reference detector WARNING 1 has dropped below 50 mV generator lamp power supply l C bus The photometer pump Failed Pump PUMP WARNING failed t
374. use its internal clock to start a sequence STEPS PROGRESS MODES STEP PCT ELAP REM ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT As the sequence runs As the sequence runs the calibrator s display the calibrator s display will show progress by will show progress as displaying the step elapsed time Cycles through YES NO currently being executed list of GENERATE ist sequence GPT commands Inserts a new step Edits programmed As the sequence runs As the sequence runs the GPTPS parameters for selected calibrator s display will show progress as the time remaining the calibrator s display will show progress as a PURGE STANDBY percent of its total of its total programmed DURATION programmed duration duration EXECSEQ SETCCOUTPUT MANUAL Figure A 5 step See Chapter 6 for further instructions See Chapter 6 for further instructions on programming each of these commands PRIMARY SETUP Menu SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION Submenu 05623 Rev DCN 5298 2 23 09 Pg A 7 APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Revision D 1 M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual MAIN MENU gt SETUP gt MORE COMM FLOW VARS DIAG1 ENTER PASSWORD 818 ID COM1 COM2 TARG STAT PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT SETUP MACHINE ID 700 ID SET SET EDIT 0 7 0 0 ENTR EXIT coo 0 PHOTO LAMP ValuejDegC 1 3 GEN LAMP Value DegC
375. user and the outside world in a variety of ways e Through the calibrator s keyboard and vacuum fluorescence display over a clocked digital serial I O bus using the 2 protocol read square C bus e RS 232 and or RS 485 serial ports one of which can be connected to an Ethernet converter e Various analog voltage and current outputs e Several digital I O channels 200 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Theory of Operation Realtime 2 RS 485 COM Port COM 2 Connector COM1 Connector Clock Chip Connector Configuration RS 232 or Ethernet RS 232 Jumper E48 Power Connector C UN Bo External Parallel Port unused Disk on Chip Mn22n2 n32 P 10555801 REV C A8 M700E E f AMD hnos404 casTD SW1 COM Port L TUE Configuration EN Switch BIOS Chip PC 104 Bus Connector External Floppy Disk Drive unused 386 External Keyboard and External IDE Disk Memory Processor Chip Power Connector Drive Connector unused Expansion Slot Figure 9 4 M700E CPU Board Annotated Finally the CPU issues commands also over the Pe bus to a series of relays and switches located on a separate PCA the relay PCA located in the right rear of the chassis on its own mounting bracket to control the function of heaters and valves The CPU includes two types of non volatile data storage
376. ve Control The relay PCA also hosts two valve driver chips each of which can drive up four valves In the M7OOE the relay PCA controls only those valves associated with the generator and photometer options All valves related to source gas and diluent gas flow are controlled by a separate valve driver PCA see Section 9 3 4 9 3 3 2 Heater Control The relay PCA controls the various DC heaters related to the generator and photometer options MOTHER BOARD AID Converter VIF Thermistor s e g photometer sample gas temp photometer lamp temp C generator lamp temp eel Q Generator Lamp Heater Lamp Heater Figure 9 6 Heater Control Loop Block Diagram 9 3 3 3 Relay PCA Status LEDs amp Watch Dog Circuitry Thirteen LEDs are located on the calibrator s relay PCA to indicate the status of the calibrator s heating zones and some of its valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator Table 9 1 shows the status of these LEDs and their respective functionality 05622 REV B 203 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Theory of Operation M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual D9 Green Photometer Pump Status D8 Green Generator Valve Status D7 Green Photometer Meas Ref Valve u ie 70 00 D6 p D15 Yellow Photometer Lamp Heater D16 Yellow O Generator Lamp Heat
377. very 6 months see Sections 8 1 and 8 2 e Os Photometer If your M7OOE is equipped with the optional photometer its performance should be periodically verified against and external transfer standard see Section 8 3 e Generator If your M70OOE is equipped with the optional generator it should be periodically calibrated see Section 8 4 8 1 VIEWING THE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS FOR THE M700E S MFC S It is possible to view the target flow rate actual flow rate and actual gas pressure for each MFC via the FLOW submenu in the M700E calibrator in real time To access this information press Make sure that the M7006 is in standby GEN STBY SEQ SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU GAS MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM FLOW FLOW MENU TARG STAT View current flow and SETUP X X DILTF 1 980 1 980 P 29 31 PSIG pressure statistics for the diluent mass flow controller NEXT EXIT View current flow and SETUP F 0 0200 0 0204 P 25 00 PSIG pressure statistics for the Calibration gas mass flow EREVINEKT EXIT controller gt EXIT returns to the main FLOW menu SETUP X X CALZ OFF P 30 00 PSIG View current flow and pressure statistics for the PREV optional 2nd calibration gas mass flow controller Only appears when this option is installed 166 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual M700E Calibration
378. ves e The manifold should be kept as clean as possible to avoid loss of sample gas flow from blockages or constrictions The manifolds as shown the above drawing are oriented to simplify the drawing Their actual orientation in your set up is with the ports facing upward All unused ports must be capped e When initiating calibration wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the calibrator to flood the entire calibration manifold with calibration gas 28 5622 REV B PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Getting Started CALIBRATION MANIFOLD EXHAUST VENT LINE The manifold s excess gas should be vented outside of the room This vent should be of large enough internal diameter to avoid any appreciable pressure drop and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to assure that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion 3 2 5 4 Connecting the M700E Calibrator to a Dual Span Gas Zero Air Calibration Manifold Another type of calibration setup utilizes separate span gas and the zero air manifolds see Figure 3 14 SAMPLING CANE FILTER SCREEN BLOWER PUMP SAMPLE MANIFOLD ROOF VENT TO OUTSIDE OF ROOM NSS TEE H20 TRAP Pr 1 2 Sample Inlet Span Gas Inlet Zero Air Inlet Teledyne Instruments E Series Gas Analyzer outlets MUST be capped LEX REL EG E
379. void allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your calibrator APPENDICES For easier access and better updating some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a series of appendices at the end of this manual These include version specific software menu trees warning messages definitions Modbus registers and serial I O variables as well as spare part listings repair questionnaires interconnect drawing detailed pneumatic and electronic schematics USER NOTES 05622 REV B 5 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Introduction M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual USER NOTES 6 5622 REVB PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED DCN 5169 TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual Specifications Approvals and Warranty 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS AND WARRANTY 2 1 SPECIFICATIONS Table 2 1 M700E Dilution System Specifications Flow Measurement Accuracy 1 0 of Full Scale Repeatability of Flow Control 0 2 of Full Scale Linearity of Flow Measurement 0 5 of Full Scale Flow Range of Diluent Air 0 to 10 SLPM Optional Ranges 0 to 5 SLPM 0 to 20 SLPM Flow Range of Cylinder Gases 0 to 100 cm min Optional Ranges 0 to 50 0 to 200 cm min Zero Air Required 10 SLPM 30 PSIG Optional 20 SLPM 30 PSIG CAL gas input ports 4 configurable Diluent Gas Input Ports 1 Response Time 60 Seconds 98
380. w Control PHOTOMETER BENCH LPR Prosa Q GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR MosNas 0 INLET PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR O GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA Flow Control 800 cm W jquiessy 10je1euec O Mats Flow Controllar 1033u02 moj zT EI 001 PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT CAL GAS 2 INLET gry INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR INTERNAL 1 CAL G S 3 INLET EXHAUST PHOTOMETER OUTLET GAS INPUT MANIFOLD fom beck Cal Gat Mat Flow Controlla d GPT CAL GAS OUTPUT 1 CAL GAS OUTPUT lt volume KE A VENT GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD Figure 6 5 Gas Flow through M700E with O Options when Generating Non O Source Gas M700E Chassis Flow Control 1 0 LPM PHOTOMETER BENCH Pressure Regulator O GAS INPUT PRESSURE SENSOR DILUENT INLET YOSNIS O PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR PHOTOMETER INLET GEN PHOTOMETER PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR PCA Flow Control 800 Ajqui
381. workstation need not be complicated A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti ESD workstation 05622 REV B 269 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS A Primer on Electro Static Discharge M700E Operator s Manual Protective Mat Ground Point M Wrist Strap Figure 12 2 Basic Anti ESD Work Station For technicians that work in the field special lightweight and portable anti ESD kits are available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear These include everything needed to create a temporary anti ESD work area anywhere Always wear an Anti ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer An anti ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels Anti ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no available grounded plug Also anti ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor usually around one meg ohm that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument s power supply Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient While this may temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges wi
382. you reach the output to be configured DIAG AlO TEST_OUTPUT OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT OUTPUT 5V SET gt EDIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT REC OFS mV SET SET EDIT Toggle these DIAG AIO TEST QUTPUT REC OFS 0 mv keys to set ther 0 0 it SoS 0 ENTR EXIT value of the desired offset DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT REC OFS 10 mV 0 0 1 DIAG AIO TEST OUTPUT REC OFS 10 mV 0 ENTR EXIT lt SET SET gt EDIT 05622 REV B 123 DCN 5169 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS Operating the M700E Calibrator M700E Calibrator Operator s Manual 6 9 2 TEST CHANNEL CALIBRATION TEST CHANNEL calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the calibrator performed in the factory as part of the configuration process or whenever recalibration is required The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or adjusted manually During automatic calibration the calibrator tells the output circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high scale point signal usually about 90 of chosen analog signal scale then measures actual signal of the output Any error at zero or high scale is corrected with a slope and offset Automatic calibration can be performed via the AOUTS CALIBRATION command or by using the CAL button located inside TEST_CHANNEL submenu By default the calibrator is configured so that c

MODEL 700E DYNAMIC DILUTION CALIBRATOR

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents